G21LD,G21HD

Transcription

G21LD,G21HD

WORKSHOP MANUAL
G21LD,G21HD
KiSC issued 04, 2006 A
TO THE READER
This Workshop Manual has been prepared to provide servicing personnel with
information on the mechanism, service and maintenance of G21LD and G21HD. It is
divided into three parts, “General”, “Mechanism” and “Servicing”.
■ General
Information on the product identification, the general precautions, maintenance
check list, check and maintenance and special tools are described.
■ Mechanism
Information on the construction and function are included. This part should be
understood before proceeding with troubleshooting, disassembling and servicing.
Refer to Diesel Engine Workshop Manual (Code No. 97897-03173) for the one which
has not been described to this workshop manual.
■ Servicing
Information on the troubleshooting, servicing specification lists, tightening torque,
checking and adjusting, disassembling and assembling, and servicing which cover
procedures, precautions, factory specifications and allowable limits.
All information, illustrations and specifications contained in this manual are based on
the latest product information available at the time of publication.
The right is reserved to make changes in all information at any time without notice.
June 2005
© KUBOTA Corporation 2005
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
SAFETY FIRST
This symbol, the industry’s “Safety Alert Symbol”, is used throughout this manual and on labels on
the machine itself to warn of the possibility of personal injury. Read these instructions carefully.
It is essential that you read the instructions and safety regulations before you attempt to repair or use
this unit.
DANGER
: Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in
death or serious injury.
WARNING
: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
death or serious injury.
CAUTION
: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in
minor or moderate injury.
■ IMPORTANT
: Indicates that equipment or property damage could result if instructions are not
followed.
■ NOTE
: Gives helpful information.
BEFORE SERVICING AND REPAIRING
• Read all instructions and safety instructions in this
manual and on your machine safety decals.
• Clean the work area and machine.
• Park the machine on a firm and level ground, and set
the parking brake.
• Lower the implement to the ground.
• Stop the engine, and remove the key.
• Disconnect the battery negative cable.
• Hang a “DO NOT OPERATE” tag in operator
station.
1
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
SAFETY STARTING
• Do not start the engine by shorting across starter
terminals or bypassing the safety start switch.
• Do not alter or remove any part of machine safety
system.
• Before starting the engine, make sure that all shift
levers are in neutral positions or in disengaged
positions.
• Never start the engine while standing on ground.
Start the engine only from operator’s seat.
SAFETY WORKING
• Do not work on the machine while under the influence
of alcohol, medication, or other substances or while
fatigued.
• Wear close fitting clothing and safety equipment
appropriate to the job.
• Use tools appropriate to the work. Makeshift tools,
parts, and procedures are not recommended.
• When servicing is performed together by two or more
persons, take care to perform all work safely.
• Do not work under the machine that is supported
solely by a jack. Always support the machine by
safety stands.
• Do not touch the rotating or hot parts while the engine
is running.
• Never remove the radiator cap while the engine is
running, or immediately after stopping. Otherwise, hot
water will spout out from radiator. Only remove
radiator cap when cool enough to touch with bare
hands. Slowly loosen the cap to first stop to relieve
pressure before removing completely.
• Escaping fluid (fuel or hydraulic oil) under pressure
can penetrate the skin causing serious injury. Relieve
pressure before disconnecting hydraulic or fuel lines.
Tighten all connections before applying pressure.
AVOID FIRES
• Fuel is extremely flammable and explosive under
certain conditions. Do not smoke or allow flames or
sparks in your working area.
• To avoid sparks from an accidental short circuit,
always disconnect the battery negative cable first and
connect it last.
• Battery gas can explode. Keep sparks and open
flame away from the top of battery, especially when
charging the battery.
• Make sure that no fuel has been spilled on the engine.
2
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
VENTILATE WORK AREA
• If the engine must be running to do some work, make
sure the area is well ventilated. Never run the engine
in a closed area. The exhaust gas contains poisonous
carbon monoxide.
PREVENT ACID BURNS
• Sulfuric acid in battery electrolyte is poisonous. It is
strong enough to burn skin, clothing and cause
blindness if splashed into eyes. Keep electrolyte
away from eyes, hands and clothing. If you spill
electrolyte on yourself, flush with water, and get
medical attention immediately.
DISPOSE OF FLUIDS PROPERLY
• Do not pour fluids into the ground, down a drain, or
into a stream, pond, or lake. Observe relevant
environmental protection regulations when disposing
of oil, fuel, coolant, electrolyte and other harmful
waste.
PREPARE FOR EMERGENCIES
• Keep a first aid kit and fire extinguisher handy at all
times.
• Keep emergency numbers for doctors, ambulance
service, hospital and fire department near your
telephone.
3
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
SAFETY DECALS
The following safety decals are installed on the machine.
If a decal becomes damaged, illegible or is not on the machine, replace it. The decal part number is listed in
the parts list.
4
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
5
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
6
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
7
SPECIFICATIONS
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
G21LD
G21HD
Maximum gross power
15.6 kw (21 HP)
Model
D782-E2-G21
Type
Indirect injection, vertical, water cooled, 4-cycle diesel engine
Number of cylinders
3
67.0 × 73.6 mm (2.64 × 2.90 in.)
Bore and stroke
778 cm3 (47.48 cu.in.)
Total displacement
Rated revolution
3000 rpm
Combustion chamber
Spherical type (E-TVCS)
Fuel injection pump
Bosch MD type mini pump
Governor
Engine
Centrifugal ball mechanical governor
Injection nozzle
Bosch throttle type
Injection timing
0.28 to 0.31 rad (16° to 18°) before T.D.C.
Injection order
1-2-3
Injection pressure
13.73 MPa (140 kgf/cm2, 1991 psi)
Compression ratio
24 : 1
Lubricating system
Cooling system
Forced Iubrication by gear pump
Pressurized radiator, forced circulation with water pump
API Service classification CC or CD, Below 0°C (32 °F) : SAE 10W or 10W-30, 0 to 25 °C
(32 °F to 77 ° F) : SAE 20 or 10W-30, Above 25 °C (77 °F) : SAE 30 or 10W-30
Lubricating oil
Starting system
Electric starter (12 V, 1.0 kW)
Battery
51R (12V, 450CCA)
Fuel
Capacities
No.2-D diesel fuel (ASTM D975)
[No.1-D diesel fuel, if temperature is below - 10 °C (14 °F)]
Fuel tank
22L (5.8U.S.gals., 4.8 lmp. gals.)
Engine crankcase
2.8L (2.95 U.S.qts., 2.4 Imp.qts.)
Engine coolant
2.1L (2.2 U.S.qts., 1.8 Imp.qts.)
Recovery tank
0.25 L (0.26 U.S.qts., 0.22 Imp.qts.)
Transmission (Including
HST and cylinder)
4.5L (4.75 U.S.qts., 3.96 Imp.qts.)
Mower gear case oil
Tires
Traveling
speeds
0.40L (0.42 U.S.qts., 0.35 Imp.qts.)
Front
16 × 6.50-8 (4PR) Turf
Rear
23 × 10.5-12 (4PR) Turf
Forward
0 to 15.0 km/h (0 to 9.3 mph)
Reverse
0 to 6.0 km/h (0 to 3.8 mph)
Overall length
(with grass collector)
2930 mm (115.4 in.)
Overall width (with mower)
Dimensions
6.0L (6.34 U.S.qts., 5.28 Imp.qts.)
Overall height
1280 mm (50.4 in.)
1280 mm (50.4 in.)
Wheel base
Treads
2990 mm (117.7 in.)
1450 mm (57.1 in.)
1280 mm (50.4 in.)
Front
825 mm (32.5 in.)
Rear
780 mm (30.7 in.)
Weight (Without mower deck and grass
collector)
440 kg (970 lbs)
510 kg (1124 lbs)
PTO
Shaft drive
PTO clutch
Belt tension
2576 min-1 (rpm)
Revolution (PTO speed)
PTO brake
Available
W1028929
8
SPECIFICATIONS
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Model
G21LD
G21HD
Steering
Electric power steering (EPS)
Transmission
Hydrostatic transmission
Brake
Mower
Internal expanding brake
Model
RCK48G18-PRO
Total length
900 mm (35.4 in.)
Total width
1280 mm (50.4 in.)
Total height
315 mm (12.4 in.)
Mounting method
Quick joint, parallel linkage
Adjustment of cutting height
Dial gauge
Cutting width
1219 mm (48.0 in.)
Cutting height
25 to 102 mm (1.0 to 4.0 in.)
Number of blades
3
Weight (Approx.)
95 kg (209 lbs)
Discharge direction
Model
Grass
collector
Rear side
GCK500
Container capacity
GCK500HD
500 L (132 U.S.gals, 110 Imp.gals)
Weight (Approx.)
30 kg (66 Ibs)
60 kg (132 Ibs)
Dumping height
—
1750 mm (68.9 in.)
The company reserves the right to chage the specifications without notice
W1030228
9
DIMENSIONS
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
DIMENSIONS
10
DIMENSIONS
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
11
G
GENERAL
GENERAL
CONTENTS
1. IDENTIFICATION............................................................................................. G-1
2. GENERAL PRECAUTIONS ............................................................................ G-2
3. HANDLING PRECAUTIONS FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS AND WIRING .. G-3
[1] WIRING...................................................................................................... G-3
[2] BATTERY................................................................................................... G-5
[3] FUSE.......................................................................................................... G-5
[4] CONNECTOR ............................................................................................ G-5
[5] HANDLING OF CIRCUIT TESTER......................................................... G-6
4. LUBRICANTS, FUEL AND COOLANT ......................................................... G-7
5. TIGHTENING TORQUES ............................................................................... G-8
[1] GENERAL USE SCREWS, BOLTS AND NUTS................................... G-8
[2] METRIC SCREWS, BOLTS AND NUTS ............................................... G-8
[3] AMERICAN STANDARD SCREWS, BOLTS AND NUTS WITH UNC
OR UNF THREADS ................................................................................. G-9
6. MAINTENANCE CHECK LIST ..................................................................... G-10
7. CHECK AND MAINTENANCE ..................................................................... G-12
[1] DAILY CHECK ........................................................................................ G-12
[2] CHECK POINTS OF INITIAL 50 HOURS ........................................... G-21
[3] CHECK POINTS OF EVERY 50 HOURS ........................................... G-23
[4] CHECK POINTS OF EVERY 100 HOURS ......................................... G-29
[5] CHECK POINT OF EVERY 150 HOURS ......................................... G-32
[6] CHECK POINTS OF EVERY 200 HOURS ........................................ G-32
[7] CHECK POINTS OF EVERY 300 HOURS ......................................... G-34
[8] CHECK POINT OF EVERY 500 HOURS ........................................... G-35
[9] CHECK POINT OF EVERY 1500 HOURS ......................................... G-36
[10]CHECK POINT OF EVERY 3000 HOURS ......................................... G-36
[11]CHECK POINTS OF EVERY 1 YEAR ................................................ G-37
[12]CHECK POINTS OF EVERY 2 YEARS.............................................. G-40
[13]OTHERS .................................................................................................. G-43
8. SPECIAL TOOLS .......................................................................................... G-44
[1] SPECIAL TOOLS FOR ENGINE .......................................................... G-44
[2] SPECIAL TOOLS FOR MACHINE........................................................ G-50
9. IMPLEMENT LIMITATIONS.......................................................................... G-55
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
1. IDENTIFICATION
(1) Engine Serial Number
(2) Machine Serial Number
(3) Mower Serial Number
(4) Hour Meter
W1010714
G-1
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
2. GENERAL PRECAUTIONS
• During disassembly, carefully arrange removed parts in a clean
area to prevent confusion later. Screws, bolts and nuts should be
installed in their original position to prevent reassembly errors.
• When special tools are required, use KUBOTA genuine special
tools. Special tools which are not frequently used should be
made according to the drawings provided.
• Before disassembling or servicing electrical wires, always
disconnect the ground cable from the battery first.
• Remove oil and dirt from parts before measuring.
• Use only KUBOTA genuine parts for parts replacement to
maintain machine performance and to assure safety.
• Gaskets and O-rings must be replaced during reassembly.
Apply grease to new O-rings or oil seals before assembling.
See the figure left side.
• When reassembling external snap rings or internal snap rings,
they must be positioned so that sharp edge faces against the
direction from which a force is applied. See the figure left side.
• When inserting spring pins, their splits must face the direction
from which a force is applied. See the figure left side.
• To prevent damage to the hydraulic system, use only specified
fluid or equivalent.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Grease
Force
Sharp Edge
Axial Force
Rotating Movement
(A) External Snap Ring
(B) Internal Snap Ring
W1010904
G-2
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
3. HANDLING PRECAUTIONS FOR ELECTRICAL PARTS
AND WIRING
To ensure safety and prevent damage to the machine and
surrounding equipment, heed the following precautions in handling
electrical parts and wiring.
■ IMPORTANT
• Check electrical wiring for damage and loosened
connection every year. To this end, educate the customer to
do his or her own check and at the same time recommend
the dealer to perform periodic check for a fee.
• Do not attempt to modify or remodel any electrical parts and
wiring.
• When removing the battery cables, disconnect the negative
cable first. When installing the battery cables, connect the
positive cable first.
(1) Negative Terminal
(2) Positive Terminal
W1011114
[1] WIRING
• Securely tighten wiring terminals.
(1) Correct
(Securely tighten)
(2) Incorrect
(Loosening leads to faulty contact)
W1011216
• Do not let wiring contact dangerous part.
(1) Dangerous Part
(2) Wiring (Incorrect)
(3) Wiring (Correct)
(4) Dangerous Part
W1011313
• Securely insert grommet.
(1) Grommet
(A) Correct
(B) Incorrect
W1011388
G-3
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
• Securely clamp, being careful not to damage wiring.
(1) Clamp
• Wind Clamp Spirally
(2) Wire Harness
(3) Clamp
(4) Welding Dent
W1011458
• Clamp wiring so that there is no twist, unnecessary sag, or
excessive tension, except for movable part, where sag be
required.
(1) Wiring
(2) Clamp
(A) Correct
(B) Incorrect
W1011587
• In installing a part, take care not to get wiring caught by it.
(1) Wiring
(A) Incorrect
W1011670
• After installing wiring, check protection of terminals and clamped
condition of wiring, only connect battery.
(1) Cover
• Securely Install Cover
W1011735
G-4
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
[2] BATTERY
• Take care not to confuse positive and negative terminal posts.
• When removing battery cables, disconnect negative cable first.
When installing battery cables, check for polarity and connect
positive cable first.
• Do not install any battery with capacity other than is specified
(Ah).
• After connecting cables to battery terminal posts, apply high
temperature grease to them and securely install terminal covers
on them.
• Do not allow dirt and dust to collect on battery.
•
•
•
•
CAUTION
Take care not to let battery liquid spill on your skin and
clothes. If contaminated, wash it off with water immediately.
Before recharging the battery, remove it from the machine.
Before recharging, remove cell caps.
Do recharging in a well-ventilated place where there is no
open flame nearby, as hydrogen gas and oxygen are formed.
W1011816
[3] FUSE
• Use fuses with specified capacity.
Neither too large or small capacity fuse is acceptable.
• Never use steel or copper wire in place of fuse.
• Do not install working light, radio set, etc. on machine which is not
provided with reserve power supply.
• Do not install accessories if fuse capacity of reserve power
supply is exceeded.
(1) Fuse
(2) Slow Blow Fuse
W1012092
[4] CONNECTOR
• For connector with lock, push lock to separate.
(A) Push
W1012211
• In separating connectors, do not pull wire harnesses.
• Hold connector bodies to separate.
(A) Correct
(B) Incorrect
W1012272
G-5
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
• Use sandpaper to remove rust from terminals.
• Repair deformed terminal. Make certain there is no terminal
being exposed or displaced.
(1) Exposed Terminal
(2) Deformed Terminal
(3) Sandpaper
(4) Rust
W1012346
• Make certain that there is no female connector being too open.
(A) Correct
(B) Incorrect
W1012430
• Make certain plastic cover is large enough to cover whole
connector.
(1) Cover
(A) Correct
(B) Incorrect
W1054624
[5] HANDLING OF CIRCUIT TESTER
• Use tester correctly following manual provided with tester.
• Check for polarity and range.
W1012684
G-6
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
4. LUBRICANTS, FUEL AND COOLANT
Place
1
2
Capacity
G21LD
22 L
5.8 U.S.gals.
4.8 Imp.gals.
Fuel
Cooling
system
2.1 L
2.2 U.S.qts.
1.8 Imp.qts.
Recovery
tank
0.25 L
0.26 U.S.qts.
0.22 Imp.qts.
Coolant
3
Engine crankcase
4
Transmission (Including
HST & cylinder)
5
Mower gear case
2.8 L *
2.95 U.S.qts.
2.4 Imp.qts.
4.5 L
4.75 U.S.qts.
3.86 Imp.qts.
Lubricants
G21HD
6.0 L
6.34 U.S.qts.
5.28 Imp.qts.
0.40 L
0.42 U.S.qts.
0.35 Imp.qts.
[ASTM D975]
No. 2-D diesel fuel
No. 1-D diesel fuel if temperature is below
−10 °C (14 °F)
Fresh clean water (soft water) with antifreeze
Engine oil : API Service Classification
CD, CE or CF
Below 0 °C (32 °F) : SAE10W, 10W-30
or 10W-40
0 to 25 °C (32 to 77 °F): SAE20, 10W-30
or 10W-40
Above 25 °C (77 °F): SAE30, 10W-30 or
10W-40
KUBOTA UDT or SUPER UDT fluid
SAE #90 gear oil
King pin (Left and right)
Center pin
PTO tension arm
6
Universal joint
Until grease overflows
Multipurpose grease
NLGI-2 or NLGI-1 (GC-LB)
Moderate amount
Oil or spray type grease
Side blade shaft
Center blade shaft
Mower tension arm
Speed control pedal shaft
Lift lever shaft
Brake pedal shaft
7
PTO lever fulcrum
Anti-scalp roller
Speed control link
Accelerator cable
■ NOTE
• * : Oil amount when the oil level is at the center of the oil level gauge.
G-7
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
5. TIGHTENING TORQUES
[1] GENERAL USE SCREWS, BOLTS AND NUTS
Screws, bolts, and nuts whose tightening torques are not specified in this Workshop Manual should be
tightened according to the table below.
Indication on top of
bolt
No-grade or 4T
Material of bolt
Material of opponent
part
Unit
Diameter
M6
(6 mm, 0.24 in.)
M8
(8 mm, 0.31 in.)
M10
(10 mm, 0.39 in.)
M12
(12 mm, 0.47 in.)
M14
(14 mm, 0.55 in.)
M16
(16 mm, 0.63 in.)
M18
(18 mm, 0.71 in.)
M20
(20 mm, 0.79 in.)
7T
SS400, S20C
Ordinariness
N·m
7.85
to
9.31
17.7
to
20.5
39.3
to
45.1
62.8
to
72.5
108
to
125
167
to
191
246
to
284
334
to
392
0.80
to
0.95
1.8
to
2.1
4.0
to
4.6
6.4
to
7.4
11.0
to
12.8
17.0
to
19.5
25.0
to
29.0
34.0
to
40.0
5.79
to
6.87
13.1
to
15.1
29.0
to
33.2
46.3
to
53.5
79.6
to
92.5
123
to
141
181
to
209
246
to
289
SCr435,
SCM435
S43C, S48C
Aluminum
kgf·m ft-lbs
9T
Ordinariness
Aluminum
Ordinariness
N·m
kgf·m
ft-lbs
N·m
kgf·m
ft-lbs
N·m
kgf·m ft-lbs
7.85
to
8.82
16.7
to
19.6
31.4
to
34.3
0.80
to
0.90
1.7
to
2.0
3.2
to
3.5
5.79
to
6.50
12.3
to
14.4
23.2
to
25.3
–
–
–
5.79
to
6.50
13.1
to
15.1
29.0
to
32.5
46.3
to
53.5
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7.24
to
8.31
17.4
to
20.2
35.5
to
41.2
57.2
to
66.5
91.2
to
108
145
to
166
203
to
235
272
to
318
0.80
to
0.90
1.8
to
2.1
4.0
to
4.5
6.4
to
7.4
–
1.00
to
1.15
2.4
to
2.8
4.9
to
5.7
7.9
to
9.2
12.6
to
15.0
20.0
to
23.0
28.0
to
32.5
37.5
to
44.0
7.85
to
8.82
17.7
to
20.5
39.3
to
44.1
62.8
to
72.5
–
9.81
to
11.2
23.6
to
27.4
48.1
to
55.8
77.5
to
90.2
124
to
147
197
to
225
275
to
318
368
to
431
–
–
–
N·m
kgf·m
ft-lbs
12.3
to
14.2
29.5
to
34.3
60.9
to
70.6
103
to
117
167
to
196
260
to
304
344
to
402
491
to
568
1.25
to
1.45
3.0
to
3.5
6.2
to
7.2
10.5
to
12.0
17.0
to
20.0
26.5
to
31.0
35.0
to
41.0
50.0
to
58.0
9.05
to
10.4
21.7
to
25.3
44.9
to
52.0
76.0
to
86.7
123
to
144
192
to
224
254
to
296
362
to
419
W1034542
[2] METRIC SCREWS, BOLTS AND NUTS
Grade
Property class 8.8
Property class 10.9
Unit
Nominal
Diameter
N·m
kgf·m
ft-lbs
N·m
kgf·m
ft-lbs
M8
23.6 to 27.4
2.4 to 2.8
17.4 to 20.2
29.4 to 34.3
3.0 to 3.5
21.7 to 25.3
M 10
48.1 to 55.8
4.9 to 5.7
35.5 to 41.2
60.8 to 70.5
6.2 to 7.2
44.9 to 52.1
M 12
77.5 to 90.1
7.9 to 9.2
57.2 to 66.5
103.0 to 117.0
10.5 to 12.0
76.0 to 86.8
M 14
124.0 to 147.0
12.6 to 15.0
91.2 to 108.0 167.0 to 196.0
17.0 to 20.0
123.0 to 144.0
M 16
196.0 to 225.0
20.0 to 23.0
145.0 to 166.0 260.0 to 303.0
26.5 to 31.0
192.0 to 224.0
W1016172
G-8
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
[3] AMERICAN STANDARD SCREWS, BOLTS AND NUTS WITH UNC OR
UNF THREADS
SAE GR.5
Grade
SAE GR.8
Unit
N·m
kgf·m
ft-lbs
N·m
kgf·m
ft-lbs
5/16
23.1 to 27.8
2.35 to 2.84
17.0 to 20.5
32.5 to 39.3
3.31 to 4.01
24.0 to 29.0
3/8
47.5 to 57.0
4.84 to 5.82
35.0 to 42.0
61.0 to 73.2
6.22 to 7.47
45.0 to 54.0
1/2
108.5 to 130.2
11.07 to 13.29
80.0 to 96.0
149.2 to 179.0
15.22 to 18.27
110.0 to 132.0
9/16
149.2 to 179.0
15.22 to 18.27
110.0 to 132.0
217.0 to 260.4
22.14 to 26.57
160.0 to 192.0
5/8
203.4 to 244.1
20.75 to 24.91
150.0 to 180.0
298.3 to 358.0
30.44 to 36.53
220.0 to 264.0
Nominal Diameter
W1022485
G-9
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
6. MAINTENANCE CHECK LIST
Hour meter reading
Period
Every 50 Hr
No.
50
Item
100
150
200
300
400
450
500
✩
1
Tires
Check
2
Battery condition
Check
3
Safety device
Check
4
Engine oil
Change
★
5
Engine oil filter cartridge
Change
★
6
Transmission fluid
Change
7
Transmission oil filter cartridge Replace
8
Transmission oil strainer
9
Hydraulic hose
G-23
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
G-27
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
Every 100 Hr
G-21
Every 200 Hr
G-21
✩
Every 300 Hr
G-34
✩
✩
Every 300 Hr
G-22
Clean
✩
✩
Every 300 Hr
G-35
Check
✩
Every 200 Hr
G-33
Every 2 Years*
G-41
Every 100 Hr
G-29
Every 2 Years*
G-40
✩
Every 100 Hr
G-29
✩
Every 500 Hr
G-35
Every 200 Hr
G-32
Every 2 Years*
G-40
Every 100 Hr**
G-29
★
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
Fuel lines
Replace1
✩
Check
Fuel filter
Radiator hose and clamp
✩
✩
✩
Replace1
✩
Check
12
G-31
✩
Check
11
Every 100 Hr
✩
Replace
10
After
Reference
page
✩
Replace1
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
13
Radiator core
Clean
14
Cooling system
Clean
Every 1 Year
G-37
15
Coolant
Change
Every 1 Year
G-37
16
Air cleaner element
Clean
✩**
G-26
Replace
Every 1 Year**
G-37
17
Fan belt tension
Adjust
✩
G-24
18
Front PTO belt tension
Adjust
✩****
G-26
19
Brake play
Adjust1
✩
G-23
20
Greasing
✩
G-25
21
Fuel injection nozzle
Check
Every 1500 Hr
1-S54
22
Injection pump
Check
Every 3000 Hr
1-S52
–
W1035769
G-10
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Hour meter reading
Period
Every 50 Hr
No.
50
Item
100
150
300
✩
Check
23
200
400
450
✩
After
Reference
page
Every 200 Hr
G-33
Every 2 Years
G-41
Intake air line
Replace
24
500
Grass collector net
Check
✩***
G-20
Replace
25
Mower gear box oil
Change
26
Mower gear box oil seal
Replace
★
✩
✩
✩
Every 1 Year*
G-39
Every 150 Hr
G-22
Every 2 Years*
G-42
■ IMPORTANT
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
★ :
* :
** :
*** :
**** :
The maintenance indicated by ★ must be done initially.
Replace only if necessary.
This maintenance should be done more often in dusty conditions than in normal conditions.
This check should be done daily.
Initial elongation of the front PTO belt may occur prior to 25 hours. Adjust the tension spring length as needed to maintain
belt tension.
1 : These items should be serviced by an authorized KUBOTA Dealer, unless the owner has the proper tools and is mechanically
proficient.
@ : The items listed above (@ marked) are registered as emission related critical parts by KUBOTA in the U.S. EPA nonroad
emission regulation.
W1027342
G-11
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
7. CHECK AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION
• Be sure to check and service the machine on a flat place with engine shut off, the key removed, the parking
brake on and chock the wheels.
• Do not put yourself below the raised grass collector.
• If it must be going below the raised collector to do some work, make sure the raised collector is securely
supported.
[1] DAILY CHECK
To prevent trouble from occurring, it is important to know the condition of the machine. Check the following items
before starting.
Checking
• Check areas where previous trouble was experienced
• Walk around the machine.
1. The tire pressure, wear and damage.
2. Oil and water leak.
3. Engine oil level.
4. Coolant level in the recovery tank.
5. Damage of machine body, tightness of all screws, bolts and nuts.
6. Radiator screen.
7. Panel screen.
8. Brake play.
9. Oiling.
10.Fuel level.
11.Air cleaner.
•
1.
2.
3.
4.
Mower.
Make sure blade bolts are tight.
Check blades for wear or damage.
Check all hardware.
Make sure all pins are in place.
•
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Grass Collector.
Check grass collector net material for deterioration, wear and damage.
Tightness of all bolts and nuts.
Make sure all pins are in place.
Check all hardware.
Oiling.
•
1.
2.
3.
4.
While sitting in the operator’s seat.
Speed control pedal.
Brake pedal.
Parking brake.
Steering wheel.
• Turning the key switch “ON”.
1. Performance of the easy checker light.
2. Head lights.
•
1.
2.
3.
Starting the engine.
Color of the exhaust fumes.
Safety start switch, seat safety control and another safety devices.
Check for abnormal noise and vibration.
G-12
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Checking Engine Oil Level
•
1.
2.
3.
4.
■
•
•
CAUTION
To avoid personal injury : Always stop the engine and
remove the key before checking oil.
Check engine oil before starting and 5 minutes or more after the
engine has stopped.
Wipe dipstick area clean.
To check the oil level, remove the dipstick (2), wipe it clean,
replace it, and draw it out again. Check to see that the oil level is
between the two notches.
Add new oil to the prescribed level at the oil port if necessary.
IMPORTANT
Use the specified engine oil.
Refer to “LUBRICANTS, FUEL AND COOLING WATER”.
(See page G-7)
When using new oil of a different maker or viscosity from the
previous one, drain all used oil.
Never mix two different types of oil.
(1) Oil Inlet Plug
(2) Dipstick
(A) Upper Level
(B) Lower Level
W1021025
Checking Transmission Fluid Level
1. Park the machine on a level ground.
2. To check the oil level, remove the dipstick (1), wipe it clean,
replace it and draw it out again.
3. Check to see that the oil level is between the upper (A) and lower
(B) levels.
4. Add new oil to the prescribed level if necessary.
■ IMPORTANT
• Use the specified transmission fluid.
• Refer to “LUBRICANTS, FUEL AND COOLANT”.
(See page G-7.)
(1) Dipstick
(2) Oil Inlet Plug
(3) Cover
(A)
(B)
[a]
[b]
Upper Level
Lower Level
G21LD
G21HD
W1014533
G-13
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Checking Amount of Fuel and Refueling
CAUTION
• Handle fuel carefully. If the engine is running, do not fill the
fuel tank. If engine is hot, let engine cool several minutes
before adding fuel. Do not smoke while filling the fuel tank
or servicing the fuel system. Fill fuel tank only to bottom of
filler neck.
1. Check the fuel level.
2. Take care that the fuel tank does not become empty.
Fuel tank capacity
22 L (5.8 U.S.gal.)
■
•
1.
2.
3.
IMPORTANT
Use diesel fuel only
Use No.2 diesel fuel.
Use No.1 diesel fuel if the temperature is below –10 °C (14 °F).
Always use a strainer when refueling to prevent fuel injection
pump contamination.
■ NOTE
• No.2-D is a distillate fuel of lower volatility for engines in
industrial and heavy mobile service.
(SAE J313 JUN87)
Grade of diesel fuel oil according to ASTM D975
Flash Point
°C (°F)
Water and
Sediment,
volume %
Carbon Residue
on, 10 percent
Residuum, %
Ash, weight %
Min
Max
Max
Max
52
(125)
0.05
0.35
0.01
Distillation
Temperatures
°C (°F)
90 % Point
Viscosity
Kinematic
cSt or mm2/s
at 40 °C
Viscosity
saybolt,
SUS
at 100 °F
Sulfur,
weight
%
Copper
strip
Corrsion
Catane
Number
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Max
Max
Min
282
(540)
338
(640)
1.9
4.1
32.6
40.1
0.50
No.3
40
W1021324
G-14
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Radiator Screen and Panel Screen
Daily or after every 5 hours of operation, check to be sure the
radiator screen (1) and panel screen (2) are clean. Dirt or chaff on
the radiator screen (1) or radiator core decrease cooling
performance.
1. Remove the radiator screen (1) and remove all foreign material.
2. Remove the dust from between the fins and the tube.
3. If scale forms in the tube, clean with scale inhibitor or its
equivalent.
4. Each time the panel screen is covered with grass during
operation, wipe off the screen with hand. Check the radiator
screen (1) from time to time if grass often gets on it.
5. If dust or chaff is accumulated inside of the panel, clean the
inside of the panel.
■ IMPORTANT
• Be sure to stop the engine before cleaning the radiator
screen.
(1) Radiator Screen
(2) Panel Screen
W1022263
Retightening Mower Blade Screw
CAUTION
• To avoid injury, always handle the mower blade with care.
1. Dismount the mower and turn it over to expose the mower
blades.
2. Wedge a wooden block (1) securely between the mower blade
and mower deck.
3. Retighten the mower blade screw to the specified torque.
4. If the mower blade screw (2) is worn or broken, replace it.
■ NOTE
• The screw of the red-painted mower blade is of inverse
helical type.
Tightening torque
(1) Wooden Block
(2) Mower Blade Screw
Mower blade screw
88.2 to 117.6 N·m
9.0 to 12.0 kgf·m
65.1 to 86.8 ft-lbs
(A) LOOSEN
(B) TIGHTEN
W1022525
Checking Mower Blade
1. Check the cutting edge of mower blade.
2. Sharpen the cutting edges, if the mower blades are as shown in
figure (2).
3. Replace the mower blades, if they are as shown in figure (3).
■ NOTE
• To sharpen the mower blades by yourself, clamp the mower
blade securely in a vise and use a large mill file along the
original bevel.
• To balance the mower blade, place a small rod through the
center hole and check to see if the blade balances
evenly.File heavy side of the blade until it balance out even.
(1) New Blade
(2) Worn Blade
(3) Cracked Blade
W1022841
G-15
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Oiling [G21LD, G21HD]
•
■
•
1.
CAUTION
Be sure to stop the engine and remove the key before oiling.
Oil the following points before starting.
NOTE
Oil these points on both sides of the machine.
Apply oil to the following points.
(1) Link Fulcrum
(4) Brake Pedal
(2) PTO Lever (Fulcrum) and PTO cable (5) Seat Adjuster
(3) Front PTO Cable
W1030315
G-16
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Oiling [G21LD, G21HD] (Continued)
■
•
1.
CAUTION
NOTE
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
Speed Control Pedal Shaft
Throttle Cable
Mower Univerdsl Joint
Front Link
•
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
Around the hole of the Mower Link
Around the Link
Pivot of Mower Link
Pivot of Liftarm
W1054445
G-17
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Oiling [G21LD]
•
■
•
1.
CAUTION
NOTE
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
L Pin
Latch
Linkage
Guide Hole
Duct Rod Link
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
Grass Collector Linkages
Grass Collector Cable
Around the Pin
Around the Hole of the Launching
Plate Link
W1013174
G-18
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Oiling [G21HD]
•
■
•
1.
CAUTION
NOTE
(1) Grass Catcher Cable
(2) Pin
(3) Quick Clean Lever Link
(4) Back Cover Link
(5) Back Cover Pivot
W1030878
G-19
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Checking Grass Collector Net
CAUTION
• Be sure to stop engine before checking the grass collector
net condition.
• The grass collector net material is subject to deterioration
and wear.
Check it frequently.
Use only genuine
replacement net from KUBOTA.
• Make sure all shields and guards are securely in place
following all service, cleaning, or repair work.
[G21LD]
1. The grass collector net (1) is made of cloth and plastic.
2. Check grass collector net (1) for deterioration, wear and damage.
3. After inspection, if the grass collector net (1) is found worn or
deteriorated, replace it.
4. If the grass collector net (1) is unusually dirty or grass stained, it
should be washed with a mild detergent and hung up to dry.
[G21HD]
The grass collector net should be checked daily.
■ NOTE
• Do not attempt to dry the collector net in clothes dryer!
(1) Grass collector Net
[a] G21LD
[b] G21HD
W1020458
G-20
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
[2] CHECK POINTS OF INITIAL 50 HOURS
Changing Engine Oil
•
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
■
•
•
•
CAUTION
Be sure to stop the engine before changing oil.
Start and warm up the engine for approx. 5 minutes.
Place an oil pan underneath the engine.
To drain the used oil, remove the drain plug (1) at the bottom of
the engine and drain the oil completely.
Screw in the drain plug (1).
Fill new oil up to upper line on the dipstick (3).
IMPORTANT
When using an oil of different manufacture or viscosity from
the previous one, remove all of the old oil.
Never mix two different type of oil.
Use the proper SAE engine oil according to ambient
temperatures.
Refer to “LUBRICANTS, FUEL AND COOLANT”.
(See page G-7)
(1) Drain Plug
(2) Oil Inlet Plug
(3) Dipstick
(A) Upper Level
(B) Lower Level
W1030749
Replacing Engine Oil Filter Cartridge
CAUTION
• Be sure to stop the engine before changing the oil filter
cartridge.
• Allow engine to cool down sufficiently, oil can be hot and
may cause burns.
1. Remove the engine oil filter cartridge (1) with the filter wrench.
2. Apply a slight coat of oil onto the rubber gasket of new cartridge.
3. To install the new cartridge, screw it in by hand. Over tightening
may cause deformation of rubber gasket.
4. After the cartridge has been replaced, the engine oil level
normally lowers a little. Add engine oil to proper level. Check for
oil leaks around filter gasket.
■ IMPORTANT
• To prevent serious damage to the engine, element of
recommended type must be used. Use only a genuine
KUBOTA filter or its equivalent.
(1) Engine Oil Filter Cartridge
W1030949
G-21
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Replacing Transmission Oil Filter Cartridge
•
•
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
■
•
CAUTION
Be sure to stop the engine before changing the oil filter
cartridge.
Allow transmission case to cool down sufficiently ; oil can
be hot and may cause burns.
The oil filter cartridge must be changed every 300 service hours.
Remove the oil filter cartridge with the filter wrench.
Lightly tighten the screw (2) by using a screwdriver.
Apply a slight coat of oil onto the cartridge gasket.
To install the new cartridge, screw it in by hand.
Over tightening may cause deformation of rubber gasket.
After the new cartridge has been replaced, the transmission fluid
level normally lowers a little. Add fluid to proper level. Check for
oil leaks around filter gasket.
IMPORTANT
To prevent serious damage to hydraulic system, the
replacement filter must be a highly efficient, 10 μm filter.
Use only a genuine KUBOTA filter or its equivalent.
(1) Transmission Oil Filter Cartridge
(2) Screw
W1031068
Changing Mower Gear Box Oil
1. Dismount the mower, and place the mower on level ground.
2. Remove the oil inlet plug (2).
3. Remove the drain plug (1), and drain the used oil completely.
4. After draining the used oil, reinstall the drain plug (1).
5. Fill with new oil up to the specified level.
■ IMPORTANT
• Use the proper SAE Gear Oil.
• Refer to “LUBRICANTS, FUEL AND COOLANT”.
(See page G-7)
(1) Drain Plug
(2) Oil Inlet Plug
W1031440
G-22
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
[3] CHECK POINTS OF EVERY 50 HOURS
Checking Tire Pressure
1. Check the wear and damage or tires.
2. Check the tire pressure.
3. If insufficient, add air. If excessive, reduce air.
Front
200 kPa
2.0 kgf/cm2
28 psi
Rear
140 kPa
1.4 kgf/cm2
20 psi
Tire pressure
CAUTION
• Always maintain the correct tire pressure. Do not inflate
tires above the recommended pressure.
(1) Ground
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
Insufficient
Normal
Excessive
Bad
W1068933
Adjusting Brake Pedal Play
CAUTION
• When making adjustments, park the machine on a flat area,
block wheels, stop engine and remove the key.
1. If brake pedal play is not correct, loose the lock nut (2) and turn
the nut (3) in the desired direction until the proper play is
achieved.
2. After adjustment, retighten lock nut securely.
Brake play
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Brake Pedal
Lock Nut
Nut
Spring
Factory spec.
15 to 25 mm
0.59 to 0.98 in.
(A) Brake Pedal Play
W1069219
G-23
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Adjusting Fan Belt Tension
CAUTION
• Be sure to stop the engine and remove the key before
checking belt tension.
1. If the fan drive belt becomes loose, the engine may overheat.
2. To adjust, loosen bolts and turn the alternator to tighten the belt.
3. After adjustment, securely tighten the bolts.
Moderate belt tension :
The belt deflect approx. 10 mm (0.4 in.) when the center of the
belt is depressed with finger pressure of 98 N (10 kgf, 22 lbs).
Fan belt tension
Factory spec.
Approx. 10 mm
0.4 in.
■ IMPORTANT
• When replacing fan belt, be careful not to catch it on the cap
under the water pump. See the illustration to the left.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Cap
Tension bolt
Alternator
Adjustment bolt
(A) Approx. 10 mm (0.4 in.)
W1069477
G-24
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Greasing
CAUTION
greasing.
1. Apply grease to the following points.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
King Pin
Center Pin
Mower Universal Joint
Machine Universal Joint
Grease Nipple (Side Blade Shaft
(LH, RH))
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
Grease Nipple (Center Blade Shaft)
Grease Nipple (Mower Tension Arm)
Grass Collector Rotating Pivot
Tension Lever
W1069765
G-25
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Cleaning Air Cleaner Element
1. The air cleaner uses a dry element, never apply oil.
2. Do not touch the filter element except where cleaning is required.
To clean the element, use clean and dry compressed air on the
inside of the element. Air pressure should not exceed 205 kPa
(2.1 kgf/cm2, 30 psi).
■ NOTE
• Operating in dusty conditions requires frequent
maintenance.
(1) Air Cleaner Cover
(2) Air Cleaner Element
(3) Evacuator Valve
W1070714
Checking and Adjusting Front PTO Belt Tension
CAUTION
• Always stop the engine, set the parking brake, remove the
key, and disengage the PTO lever before working on the
front PTO.
If the front PTO belts slip when the PTO is operating under load,
check the front PTO belt tension and adjust the tension spring
length, as explained below.
1. Engage the PTO lever.
2. Measure tension spring length L.
3. If L is shorter than 87 mm (3.43 in.), adjust it with the tension
clutch cable adjusting nut.
• L should be 88 to 90 mm (3.47 to 3.54 in.).
4. After adjustment, tighten the nut securely.
• When replacing the new front PTO belts, L should be 91 to 92
mm (3.58 to 3.62 in.).
■ IMPORTANT
• When replacing the front PTO belts, be sure to replace the
complete set. These belts are a matched set.
Front PTO belt tension
(L)
Factory spec.
88 to 90 mm
3.47 to 3.54 in.
(1) Adjusting Nut
W1034175
G-26
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Checking Safety Devices
The Safety Devices in your machine help to protect you while
operating. Please check this Safety Devices periodically–daily is
best–to test function of the Safety Devices before operation.
CAUTION
To avoid personal injury :
• Do not allow anyone near the machine while testing.
• If the machine does not pass a test, do not operate the
machine.
• Sit on operator’s seat for all tests.
1. Check the following tests before operating the machine.
2. If the machine does not pass one of the following tests, do not
operate the machine, check the related safety switches and the
wiring harness.
Test 1 (Safety Start Control 1)
1. Depress the brake pedal (1) fully.
2. Engage the PTO lever (2).
3. Turn the key switch to “START” position.
4. The engine should not crank.
Test 2 (Safety Start Control 2)
1. Disengage PTO lever (2).
2. Release the brake pedal (1).
3. Turn the key to “START” position.
4. The engine should not crank.
Test 3 (Seat Safety Control 1)
1. Run the engine at half throttle.
3. Stand up. (DO NOT GET OFF THE MACHINE.)
4. Engine should shut off.
Test 4 (Seat Safety Control 2)
2. Disengage PTO lever (2).
3. Release the brake pedal (1).
4. Stand up. (DO NOT GET OFF THE MACHINE.)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Brake Pedal
PTO Lever
Pin
Joint of Lift Arm
PTO Wire
(A) ENGAGED
(B) DISENGAGED
W1031130
G-27
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Checking Safety Devices (Continued)
Test 5 (PTO Safety Control 1)
[G21LD]
1. Dismount the grass collector from the platform.
[G21HD]
1. Remove the pin (3) of the PTO wire (5).
4. Lift the grass collector.
6. Be sure to attach the PTO wire (5) to original position.
Test 6 (PTO Safety Control 2)
[G21LD]
3. Dump the grass collector.
4. PTO lever (2) automatically disengage.
[G21HD]
2. Lower the grass collector.
4. Lift the grass collector.
5. PTO lever (2) automatically disengage.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Brake Pedal
PTO Lever
Pin
Joint of Lift Arm
PTO Wire
(A) ENGAGED
(B) DISENGAGED
W1058728
G-28
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Changing Engine Oil
1. See page G-21.
W1034674
Checking Fuel Lines And Fuel Filter
CAUTION
• Be sure to stop the engine and remove the key when
attempting to make the following checks and changes.
• Never fail to check the fuel lines periodically. The fuel lines
are subject to wear and age. Fuel may leak out onto the
running engine, causing a fire.
1.
2.
3.
■
•
The fuel line connections should be checked annually or every
100 service hours, whichever comes first.
The fuel lines is made of rubber and ages regardless of service
period.
If the fuel line and clamps are found damages or deteriorated,
replace them.
Check fuel filter, if it is clogged by debris, and replace it.
IMPORTANT
When the fuel line is disconnected for maintenance or
repair, close both ends of the fuel line with a piece of clean
cloth or paper to prevent dust and dirt from entering. In
addition, particular care must be taken not to admit dust and
dirt into the fuel pump. Entrance of dust and dirt causes
malfunction of the fuel pump.
(1) Pipe Clamps
(2) Fuel Line
(3) Fuel Filter
W1034725
Checking Radiator Core
CAUTION
• Be sure to stop the engine before removing the screen.
1. Remove the radiator screen (1).
2. Check the radiator core (2) for the dust and chaff.
3. If the dust or chaff is accumlated, clean the radiator core
completely. After cleaning, place the screens properly.
(1) Radiator Screen
(2) Radiator Core
W1034897
G-29
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Checking Battery Condition
CAUTION
• Never remove the vent cap while the engine is running.
Keep electrolyte away from eyes, hands and clothes. If you
are spattered with it, wash it away completely with water
immediately and get medical attention.
• Wear eye protection and rubber gloves when working
around battery.
Mishandling the battery shortens the service life and adds to
maintenance costs.
The original battery is a maintenance-free, non accessible type
battery.
If the battery is weak, the engine will be difficult to start and the
lights will become dim. It is important to check the battery
periodically.
(1) Battery
W1035046
G-30
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Battery Charging
DANGER
To avoid serious injury or death :
• When the battery is being activated, hydrogen and oxygen
gases in the battery are extremely explosive. Keep open
sparks and flames away from the battery at all times,
especially when charging the battery.
CAUTION
• When charging battery, ensure that the vent caps are
securely in place (if equipped).
• When disconnecting the cables from the battery, start with
the negative terminal first.
When connecting the cables to the battery, start with the
positive terminal first.
• Never check battery charge by placing a metal object across
the posts.
Use a voltmeter or hydrometer.
(For accessible maintainable type batteries with removable vent
caps.)
1. Make sure each electrolyte level is at the bottom of vent wells, if
necessary add distilled water in a well-ventilated area.
2. The water in the electrolyte evaporates during recharging. Liquid
shortage damages the battery. Excessive liquid spills over and
damages the machine body.
3. To slow charge the battery, connect the battery positive terminal
to the charger positive terminal and the negative to the negative,
then recharge in the standard fashion.
4. A boost charge is only for emergencies. It will partially charge the
battery at a higher rate and in a short time.
When using a boost-charged battery, it is necessary to recharge
the battery as soon as possible.
Failure to do this will shorten the battery’s service life.
5. When the specific gravity of electrolyte reaches 1.27 to 1.29,
charge has completed.
6. When exchanging an old battery with new one, use a battery of
equal specifications shown in “SPECIFICATIONS”.
(For non-accessible maintenance-free type batteries.)
Maintenance-free, non-accessible batteries are designed to
eliminate the need to add water. Yet the volume of electrolyte
above plates may eventually become depleted due to abnormal
conditions such as high heat or improper regulator setting. Use
a voltmeter to check the state of charge. (See reference chart to
determine if charging is necessary.)
Battery voltage
Reference state of charge
12.6
100 % (Full charge)
12.4
75 %
12.2
50 %
12.0
25 %
11.8
0%
(1) Vent well
(2) Separator
(3) Electrolyte
A : HIGHEST LEVEL
B : LOWEST LEVEL
W1062448
G-31
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
[5] CHECK POINT OF EVERY 150 HOURS
Changing Mower Gear Box Oil
1. See page G-22.
W1036280
Changing Engine Oil Fiter Cartridge
1. See page G-21.
W1036341
Checking Radiator Hose and Clamp
■ NOTE
• Check to see if the radiator hoses are properly fixed every
200 hours of operation or 6 months, whichever comes first.
1. If clamp bands (2) are loose or water leaks, tighten clamp band
(2) securely.
2. Replace radiator hoses (1) and tighten clamp bands (2) securely,
if radiator hoses (1) are swollen, hardened or cracked.
Repalce radiator hoses (1) and clamp bands (2) every 2 years or
earlier if checked and found that hoses are swollen, hardened or
cracked.
■ NOTE
• Take the following actions in the event the coolant
temperature be nearly or more than the boiling point, what is
called “Overheating”.
• Park the machine in a safe place and keep the engine
unloaded idling.
• Don’t stop the engine suddenly, but stop it after about 5
minutes of unloaded idling
• Keep yourself well away from the machine for further 10
minutes or while the steam is belown out.
• Checking that there gets no danger such as burning, get rid
of the causes of overheating and then start the engine again.
(1) Radiator Hose
(2) Clamp Band
W1036392
G-32
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Checking Hydraulic Hose
•
•
•
■
•
1.
2.
CAUTION
Be sure to stop the engine and remove the key before
checking and replacing hydraulic hose.
Allow transmission case to cool down sufficiently; oil can be
hot and may cause burns.
When replace the hoses, dismount the grass collector.
(G21LD : See page 2-S6, G21HD : See “High Dump Grass
Collector” section )
NOTE
Check to see if the hydraulic hoses are properly fixed every
200 hours of operation.
Check to see that all lines and hose clamps are tight and not
damaged.
If hoses and clamp are found worn or damaged, replace or repair
them at once.
(1) Mower Lift Cylinder Hose
(2) Grass Collector Cylinder Hose
[a] G21LD
[b] G21HD
W1036641
Checking Intake Air Line
1. Check to see that hoses and hose clamps are tight and not
damaged.
2. If hoses and clamps are found worn or damaged, replace them
at once.
(1) Hose
(2) Clamp
W1041481
G-33
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Changing Transmission Fluid
CAUTION
changing or checking the oil.
• Allow transmission case to cool down sufficiently; oil can be
1. Place the machine on level ground.
2. Remove the drain plug (1) and oil inlet plug (2), and drain the
used oil completely.
3. After draining the oil, reinstall the drain plug (1).
4. Fill with new oil up to the upper level (A) on the oil level dipstick
(3).
5. After draining, disassemble and clean the strainers and change
the oil filter cartridge. After reassembling, fill with UDT or SUPER
UDT hydraulic transmission fluid, or its equivalent.
6. After running the engine for a few minutes, stop it and check the
oil level again; add oil to the prescribed level.
■ IMPORTANT
• Operate only at low RPM’s immediately after changing the
transmission fluid and filter cartridge.
Keep the engine at medium speed for a few minutes to
insure proper lubrication of all parts so there is no damage
to transmission.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Drain Plug
Oil Inlet Plug
Oil Level Dipstick
Cover
(A)
(B)
[a]
[b]
Upper Level
Lower Level
G21LD
G21HD
W1036772
Changing Transmission Oil Filter Cartridge
1. See page G-22.
W1036964
G-34
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Cleaning Transmission Oil Strainer
•
•
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CAUTION
cleaning the transmission oil strainer.
Remove 2-M8 bolts.
Remove the suction pipe (1) with O ring (2).
Clean completely the oil strainer (3) with kerosene.
Install the suction pipe (1) with O ring (2).
Install the bolts.
(1) Suction Pipe
(2) O-ring
(3) Oil Strainer
W1037015
Replacing Fuel Filter
1. Replace the fuel filters (1).
(1) Fuel Filter
W1037174
G-35
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Checking Fuel Injection Nozzle
1. See page 1-S54.
W1042838
Checking Injection Pump
1. See page 1-S52.
G-36
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
[11] CHECK POINTS OF EVERY 1 YEAR
Replacing Air Cleaner Element
1. Remove the air cleaner element (2) once a year.
■ IMPORTANT
• The air cleaner uses a dry element, never apply oil.
• Do not run the engine with filter element removed.
• Be sure to refit the air cleaner cover (1) as shown in the
figure. If the air cleaner cover (1) is improperly fitted,
evacuator valve (3) will not function and dust will adhere to
the element.
• If it is loose, dust and dirt may be sucked in, wearing down
the cylinder and piston rings earlier and thereby resulting in
poor power output.
(1) Air Cleaner Cover
(2) Air Cleaner Element
(3) Evacuator Valve
W1037268
Flushing Cooling System and Changing Coolant
CAUTION
• Never open radiator cap when engine is hot.
• When opening, loosen cap slightly to the stop to relieve any
excess pressure before removing radiator cap completely.
1. Stop the engine and let cool down.
2. To drain the coolant, open the radiator drain plug (3) and engine
drain plug (4) and remove the radiator cap (1). The radiator cap
(1) must be removed to completely drain the coolant.
3. After all coolant is drained, fill with clean water and cooling
system cleaner.
4. Follow directions of the cleaner instruction.
5. After flushing, fill with clean water and anti-freeze until the coolant
level is just below the port.
6. Fill with clean water and anti-freeze upper level of the recovery
tank (2).
7. Start and operate the engine for few minutes.
8. Stop the engine. Check coolant level and add coolant if
necessary.
9. Install the radiator cap (1) securely.
■ IMPORTANT
• Do not start engine without coolant.
• Use clean, fresh water and anti-freeze to fill the radiator and
recovery tank.
Refer to “LUBRICANTS, FUEL AND COOLANT”.
(See page G-7)
• When the anti-freeze is mixed with water, the anti-freeze
mixing ratio must be less than 50 %.
• Securely tighten the radiator cap (1). If the cap is loose or
improperly fitted, water may lead out and the engine could
overheat.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Radiator Cap
Recovery Tank
Radiator Drain Plug
Engine Drain Plug
A : Highest Level
B : Lowest Level
W1037402
G-37
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Flushing Cooling System and Changing Coolant (Continued)
■ Anti-Freeze
If cooling water freezes, the cylinders and radiator can be
damaged. It is necessary, if the ambient temperature falls below
0 °C (32 °F), to remove cooling water mix it with anti-freeze and
full the radiator with it.
1. There are two types of anti-freeze available; use the permanent
type (PT) for this engine.
2. Before adding anti-freeze for the first time, clean the radiator
interior by pouring fresh water and draining it a few times.
3. The procedure for mixing of water and anti-freeze differs
according to the maker of the anti-freeze and the ambient
temperature, basically should be referred to SAE J1034, more
specially also to SAE J814c.
4. Mix the anti-freeze with water, and then fill in to the rediator.
Vol % Antifreeze
■
•
•
•
•
Freezing Point
Boilling Point*
°C
°F
°C
°F
40
-24
-12
106
222
50
-37
-34
108
226
* At 101 kPa (760 mmHg) pressure (atmospheric). A higher
boiling point is obtained by using a radiator pressure cap which
permits the development of pressure within the cooling system.
NOTE
The above date represent industry standards that
necessitate a minimum glycol content in the concentrates
anti-freeze.
When the cooling water level drops due to evaporation, add
water only. In case of leakage, add anti-freeze and water in
the specified mixing ratio.
Anti-freeze absorbs moisture. Keep unused anti-freeze in a
tightly sealed container.
Do not use radiator cleaning agents when anti-freeze has
been added to the cooling water. (Anti-freeze contains an
anti-corrosive agent, which will react with the radiator
cleaning agent forming sludge which will affect the engine
parts.)
W1037674
G-38
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Replacing Grass Collector Net (G21LD)
1. Remove the knob nut (1) from top of grass collector cover.
2. Remove plastic cover (2) from collector.
3. Remove the 2 clevis pins, 2 cotter-pins (3), 2 flange bolts and the
height adjust stay (4) from the top of collector frame.
4. Remove 4-1/4 hex bolts, 7-1/4 curved bolts and bottom plate
from collector frame.
5. Remove the 4-M6 bolts and 2 side beams (6) from collector.
6. Remove the 4-M6 bolts and 2 bottom corner plates (5) from
collector frame.
7. Remove the 2 curved bolts (7), 2 hex bolts (8), 4 spacers (9), 4
plain washers (10), 4 lock washers (11), 4 hex nuts (12), bottom
corner plate (14) and pipe frame bag (13) from bag frame.
8. Then remove the hopper net from frame.
9. To attach new or cleaned net (15), reverse the above procedures
and be sure to install removed components.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Knob Nut
Plastic Cover
Cotter-pin
Height Adjust Stay
Bottom Corner Plate
Side Beam
Curved Bolt
Hex Bolt
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
Spacer
Plain Washer
Lock Washer
Hex Nut
Pipe Frame Bag
Bottom Corner Plate
New or Cleaned Net
W1021670
G-39
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
[12] CHECK POINTS OF EVERY 2 YEARS
Replacing Fuel Line
1. Replace the fuel hoses (1) and hose clamps (2).
Refer to “Checking Fuel Line”. (See page G-29.)
(1) Fuel Hose
(2) Hose Clamp
Replacing Radiator Hose and Clamp Band
1. Replace the radiator hoses (1) and clamp bands (2).
Refer to “Checking Radiator Hose and Hose Clamp”.
(See page G-32.)
(1) Radiator Hose
(2) Clamp Band
G-40
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Replacing Hydraulic Hoses
•
•
•
1.
CAUTION
checking and replacing hydraulic hose.
When replace the hoses, dismount the grass collector.
(G21LD : See page 2-S6, G21HD : See “High Dump Grass
Collector” section)
Replace hydraulic hoses and hose clamp every 2 years or earlier
if checked and found that hydraulic hoses are swollen, hardened
or cracked.
(2) Grass Collector Cylinder Hose
[a] G21LD
[b] G21HD
Replacing Intake Air Line
1. Replace intake air line.
(1) Hose
(2) Clamp
W1046200
G-41
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Replacing Mower Gear Box Oil Seals
1. Replace the mower gear box oil seals (1), (2).
Refer to “Disassembling Gear Box Assembly”.
(See page 9-S14.)
(1) Oil Seal
(2) Oil Seal
G-42
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
[13] OTHERS
Replacing Fuses
1. The electrical system is protected from potential damage by
fuses.
A blown fuse indicates that there is an overload or short
somewhere in the electrical system.
2. If any of the fuses should blow, replace with a new one of the
same capacity.
■ IMPORTANT
• Before replacing a blown fuse, determine why the fuse blew
and make any necessary repairs. Failure to follow this
procedure may result in serious damage to the electrical
system.
■ Protected Circuit
FUSE NO.
(ID LABEL)
1
CAPACITY
(A)
Protected circuit
(a) EPS MT
30
Electric power steering moter
circuit
(b) E/G STOP
15
Engine stop timer relay
(c) IG/M
10
Fuel pump, head light, power
steering control unit, etc.
2
–
Slow blow fuse 40
(1) Fuse
Check circuit against wrong
battery connection
(2) Slow Blow Fuse
Replacing Bulbs
(A) Replacing the head light bulb
1. Open hood.
2. Turn bulb socket to remove socket from headlight housing.
3. Push bulb down and turn one quarter turn to remove bulb from
the socket.
4. Install new bulb to the socket.
5. Install the socket in housing.
6. Close hood.
Head light bulb
Capacity
1.04A / 12.8 Rated
voltage
(B) Replacing the indicator light bulb
1. Open hood.
2. Turn bad bulb socket to the left.
3. Pull bulb from the socket.
4. Push new bulb into the socket.
5. Install the socket.
6. Close hood.
Indicator light bulb
Capacity
0.27A / 14.0 Rated
voltage
G-43
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
8. SPECIAL TOOLS
[1] SPECIAL TOOLS FOR ENGINE
Special Use Puller Set
Code No.: 07916-09032
Application: Use exclusively for pushing out bearing, gears and
other parts with ease.
W1048293
Piston Ring Compressor
Code No.: 07909-32111
Application: Use exclusively for pushing in the piston with piston
rings into the cylinder.
W1048361
Piston Ring Tool
Code No.: 07909-32121
Application: Use exclusively for removing or installing the piston ring
with ease.
W1048421
Diesel Engine Compression Tester
Code No.: 07909-30208 (Assembly) 07909-31251 (G)
07909-30934 (A to F)
07909-31271 (I)
07909-31211 (E and F)
07909-31281 (J)
07909-31231 (H)
Application: Use to measure diesel engine compression and
diagnostics of need for major overhaul.
(1) Gauge
(2) L Joint
(3) Adaptor A
(4) Adaptor B
(5) Adaptor C
(6) Adaptor E
(7) Adaptor F
(8) Adaptor G
(9) Adaptor H
(10) Adaptor I
(11) Adaptor J
W1048481
G-44
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Oil Pressure Tester
Code No.: 07916-32032
Application: Use to measure lubricating oil pressure.
(1) Gauge
(2) Cable
(3) Threaded Joint
(4) Adaptor 1
(5) Adaptor 2
(6) Adaptor 3
(7) Adaptor 4
(8) Adaptor 5
W1048722
Valve Seat Cutter
Code No.: 07909-33102
Application: Use to reseat valves.
Angle:
0.785 rad. (45 °)
0.262 rad. (15 °)
Diameter:
28.6 mm (1.126 in.)
31.6 mm (1.244 in.)
35.0 mm (1.378 in.)
38.0 mm (1.496 in.)
41.3 mm (1.626 in.)
50.8 mm (2.000 in.)
W1048944
Radiator Tester
Code No.: 07909-31551
Application: Use to check of radiator cap pressure, and leaks from
cooling system.
Remarks: Adapter (1) BANZAI Code No. RCT-2A-30S
W1049045
Connecting Rod Alignment Tool
Code No.: 07909-31661
Application: Use to check the connecting rod alignment.
Applicable: Connecting rod big end I.D.
range
30 to 75 mm (1.18 to 2.95 in.) dia.
Connecting rod length
65 to 300 mm (2.57 to 11.81 in.)
W1049118
Flywheel Puller
Code No.: 07916-32011
Application: Use exclusively for removing the flywheel with ease.
W1049723
G-45
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Nozzle Tester
Code No.: 07909-31361
Application: Use to check the fuel injection pressure and spray
pattern of nozzle.
Measuring: 0 to 50 MPa
range
(0 to 500 kgf/cm2, 0 to 7000 psi)
W1049783
Plastigage
Code No.: 07909-30241
Application: Use to check the oil clearance between crankshaft and
bearing, etc..
Measuring: Green.....0.025 to 0.076 mm (0.001 to 0.003 in.)
range
Red........0.051 to 0.152 mm (0.002 to 0.006 in.)
Blue.......0.102 to 0.229 mm (0.004 to 0.009 in.)
W1049942
Red Check
Code No.: 07909-31371
Application: Use to check cracks on cylinder head, cylinder block,
etc..
W1050024
■ NOTE
• The following special tools are not provided, so make them referring to the figure.
Valve Guide Replacing Tool
Application: Use to press out and press fit the valve guide.
A
20 mm dia. (0.79 in. dia.)
B
9.96 to 9.98 mm dia.
(0.3921 to 0.3929 in. dia.)
C
5.5 to 5.7 mm dia.
(0.2165 to 0.2244 in. dia.)
D
200 mm (7.87 in.)
E
80 mm (3.15 in.)
F
40 mm (1.58 in.)
G
15 mm (0.59 in.)
H
5 mm (0.197 in.)
I
6.0 to 6.1 mm dia. (0.236 to 0.240 in. dia.)
J
18 mm dia. (0.71 in. dia.)
K
10.6 to 10.7 mm dia. (0.417 to 0.421 in. dia.)
L
7 mm (0.276 in.)
C1
Chamfer 1.0 mm (0.039 in.)
C2
C0.3
W1050106
G-46
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Injection Pump Pressure Tester
Application: Use to check fuel tightness of injection pumps.
A
Pressure gauge full scale: More than
29.4 MPa (300 kgf/cm2, 4267 psi)
B
Copper gasket
C
Flange (Material: Steel)
D
Hex. nut 27 mm (1.06 in.) across the plat
E
Injection pipe
F
PF1/2
G
5 mm (0.20 in.)
H
17 mm dia. (0.67 in. dia.)
I
8 mm dia. (0.31 in. dia.)
J
1.0 mm (0.039 in.)
K
17 mm dia. (0.67 in. dia.)
L
6.10 to 6.20 mm dia.
(0.2402 to 0.2441 in. dia.)
M
8 mm (0.31 in.)
N
4 mm (0.16 in.)
O
11.97 to 11.99 mm dia.
(0.4713 to 0.4721 in. dia.)
P
PF1/2
Q
23 mm (0.91 in.)
R
17 mm (0.67 in.)
S
4 mm (0.16 in.)
T
12.00 to 12.02 mm dia.
(0.4724 to 0.4732 in. dia.)
U
100 mm (3.94 in.)
V
M12 × P1.5
a
Adhesive application
b
Fillet welding on the enter circumference
W1050289
G-47
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Bushing Replacing Tool
Application: Use to press out and to press fit the bushing.
1. For small end bushing
A
145 mm (5.71 in.)
B
20 mm (0.79 in.)
C
100 mm (3.94 in.)
D
19.90 to 19.95 mm dia.
(0.7835 to 0.7854 in.dia.)
E
21.90 to 21.95 mm dia.
(0.8622 to 0.8642 in.dia.)
F
25 mm dia. (0.98 in.dia.)
a
6.3 μm (250μin.)
b
6.3 μm (250μin.)
2. For idle gear bushing
A
150 mm (5.91 in.)
B
20 mm (0.79 in.)
C
100 mm (3.94 in.)
D
19.90 to 19.95 mm
(0.7835 to 0.7854 in.)
E
21.90 to 21.95 mm
(0.8622 to 0.8642 in.)
F
25 mm (0.98 in.)
a
6.3 μm (250μin.)
b
6.3 μm (250μin.)
W1050660
Flywheel Stopper
Application: Use to loosen and tighten the flywheel screw.
A
200 mm (7.87 in.)
B
20 mm (0.79 in.)
C
30 mm (1.18 in.)
D
8 mm (0.31 in.)
E
10 mm dia. (0.39 in. dia.)
W1050819
G-48
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Crankshaft Bearing 1 Replacing Tool
Application: Use to press out and to press fit the crankshaft bearing
1.
[Press Out]
A
135 mm (5.31 in.)
B
72 mm (2.83 in.)
C
40° (1.57 rad.)
D
10 mm (0.39 in.)
E
22 mm (0.87 in.)
F
G
47.90 to 47.95 mm dia.
(1.8858 to 1.8878 in. dia.)
H
43.90 to 43.95 mm dia.
(1.7283 to 1.7303 in. dia.)
[Press Fit]
A
130 mm (5.12 in.)
B
72 mm (2.83 in.)
C
40° (1.57 rad.)
D
9 mm (0.35 in.)
E
24 mm (0.95 in.)
F
G
68 mm dia. (0.79 in. dia.)
H
39.90 to 39.95 mm dia.
(1.5709 to 1.5728 in. dia.)
W1051113
G-49
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
[2] SPECIAL TOOLS FOR MACHINE
Steering Wheel Puller
Code No.: 07916-51090
Application: Use for removing the steering wheel without damaging
the steering shaft.
W1051779
Toe-in Gauge
Code No.: 07909-31681
Application: This allows easy measurement of toe-in for all machine
models.
W1051843
Relief Valve Pressure Tester
Code No.: 07916-50045
Application: This allows easy measurement of relief set pressure.
(1) Gauge (07916-50322)
(2) Cable (07916-50331)
(3) Threaded Joint (07916-50401)
(4) Threaded Joint (07916-50341)
(5) Adaptor B (M18 × P1.5)
(07916-50361)
(6) Adaptor C (PS3/8) (07916-50371)
(7) Adaptor D (PT1/8) (07916-50381)
(8) Adaptor E (PS3/8) (07916-50392)
(9) Adaptor F (PF1/2) (07916-62601)
(10) Adaptor 58 (PT1/4) (07916-52391)
W1051907
Pressure Gauge 50
Code No.: 07916-52961
Application: This pressure gauge is used to measure the low oil
pressure.
W1052218
G-50
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
■ NOTE
• The following special tool is not provided, so make it referring to the figure.
Steering Wheel Puller Adaptor
Application: Use for removing the steering wheel with steering wheel
A
22 mm (0.87 in.)
F
116 mm (4.57 in.)
B
64 mm (2.52 in.)
G
5 mm (0.20 in.)
C
11 mm (0.43 in.)
H
9.5 mm (0.38 in.)
D
32 mm (1.26 in.)
I
3 mm (0.12 in.)
E
20 mm (0.79 in.)
J
5 mm (0.20 in.)
G-51
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Adaptor Bolt for HST
Application: Use for checking the charge relief valve setting pressure.
A
26 mm (1.02 in.)
K
0.4 mm (0.02 in.)
B
18 mm (0.71 in.)
L
0.5 mm (0.02 in.)
C
15 mm (0.59 in.)
M
15 mm (0.59 in.)
D
30 mm (1.18 in.)
N
G 3/8
E
RP 1/4
O
Chamfer 1 mm (0.04 in.)
F
22 mm (0.87 in.)
P
8 mm (0.31 in.) dia. drill thru
Chamfer 0.5 mm (0.02 in.) (Both ends)
G
10 mm (0.39 in.)
Q
10 mm dia. (0.39 in. dia.)
H
0.8 mm (0.03 in.)
R
16.8 mm dia. (0.66 in. dia.)
I
46.5 mm (1.83 in.)
S
24.5 mm dia. (0.96 IN. dia.)
J
17 mm (0.67 in.)
G-52
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Adaptor for Control Valve
Application: Use for checking the main relief valve setting pressure.
A
40 mm (1.57 in.)
I
4.5 mm dia. (0.18 in. dia.)
B
18 mm (0.71.)
J
C
6 mm (0.24 in.)
K
RP 1/4 thread depth 15 mm (0.59 in.)
Drill depth 20 mm (0.79 in.)
D
3 mm (0.12 in.)
L
0.5 mm (0.02 in.)
E
3 mm (0.12 in.)
M
7/16-20 SAE 37 ° flare
F
0.785 rad. (45 °)
N
21 mm (0.83 in.)
G
0.523 rad. (30 °)
O
24.2 mm (0.95 in.)
H
0.645 rad. (37 °)
G-53
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Flange for Control Valve
1.
■
•
1.
2.
Use for checking the relief valve setting pressure.
NOTE
When using , attach with following parts.
O-ring: 04811-10240
O-ring: 04811-10600.
A
RP 1/4
N
B
14.5 mm dia. (0.59 in. dia.)
O
2.70 to 2.95 mm (0.106 to 0.116 in.)
C
2.09 rad. (120 °)
P
2.09 rad. (120 °)
D
20 mm (0.79 in.)
Q
20 mm dia. (0.79 in. dia.)
E
3/4-16 UNF
R
23.95 to 24.00 mm dia.
(0.9429 to 0.9449 in. dia.)
F
Chamfer 1mm (0.04 in.)
S
63.00 to 63.05 mm dia.
(2.4803 to 2.4823 in. dia.)
G
38 mm (1.50 in.)
T
76 mm dia. (2.99 in. dia.)
H
18 mm (0.71 in.)
U
R 0.5 mm (0.02 in.)
I
15 mm (0.59 in.)
V
1.4 to 1.5 mm (0.055 to 0.059 in.)
J
1.4 to 1.5 mm (0.055 to 0.059 in.)
W
2.70 to 2.95 mm (0.106 to 0.116 in.)
K
Chamfer 1mm (0.04 in.)
X
R 0.5mm (0.02 in.)
L
R 0.5 mm (0.02 in.)
Y
20 mm (0.79 in.)
M
R 0.5 mm (0.02 in.)
Z
26 mm (1.02 in.)
G-54
G GENERAL
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
9. IMPLEMENT LIMITATIONS
The KUBOTA Machine has been thoroughly tested for proper performance with implements sold or approved by
KUBOTA. Use of implements which exceed the maximum loading weight listed below, or which are not recommended
for use with the KUBOTA Machine may result in malfunctions or failures of the machine, damage to other property
and injury to the operator or others.
(Any malfunctions or failures of the machine resulting from use with improper implements are not covered by the
warranty.)
Maximum axle loading weight
G21LD
G21HD
Front axle
Wf
Rear axle
Wr
Total gross machine weight
350 kg (770 lbs)
550 kg (1210 lbs)
900 kg (1980 lbs)
W1054384
G-55
1
ENGINE
SERVICING
CONTENTS
1. TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................................................................1-S1
2. SERVICING SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................................1-S5
[1] ENGINE BODY ........................................................................................1-S5
[2] LUBRICATING SYSTEM .........................................................................1-S9
[3] COOLING SYSTEM.................................................................................1-S9
[4] FUEL SYSTEM ......................................................................................1-S10
3. TIGHTENING TORQUES ............................................................................1-S11
4. CHECKING, DISASSEMBLING AND SERVICING.....................................1-S12
[1] SEPARATING ENGINE .........................................................................1-S12
(1) Disassembling and Assembling ........................................................1-S12
[2] ENGINE BODY ......................................................................................1-S17
(1) Checking and Adjusting ....................................................................1-S17
(3) Servicing ...........................................................................................1-S32
[3] LUBRICATING SYSTEM .......................................................................1-S47
(1) Checking ...........................................................................................1-S47
(2) Servicing ...........................................................................................1-S47
[4] COOLING SYSTEM...............................................................................1-S49
[5] FUEL SYSTEM ......................................................................................1-S52
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
1.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom
Engine Does Not
Start
Probable Cause
Reference
Page
Solution
No fuel
Replenish fuel
–
Air in the fuel system
Bleed fuel system
–
Water in the fuel system
Change fuel and
replace fuel system
–
Fuel pipe clogged
Clean fuel pipe
–
Fuel filter clogged
Replace fuel filter
G-35
Excessively high viscosity of fuel or engine oil at
low temperature
Use specified fuel or
engine oil
G-7
Fuel with low cetane number
Use specified fuel
G-7
Fuel leak due to loose injection pipe retaining nut
Tighten retaining nut
1-S55
Incorrect injection timing
Adjust injection
timing
1-S52
Fuel camshaft worn
Replace fuel
camshaft
1-S25
Injection nozzle clogged
Clean injection
nozzle
1-S54
Injection pump malfunctioning
Repair or replace
injection pump
1-S52
Seizure of crankshaft, camshaft, piston, cylinder
or bearing
Replace crankshaft,
camshaft, piston,
cylinder or bearing
1-S29, S30
Compression leak from cylinder
Replace head
gasket, tighten
cylinder head screw,
glow plug and nozzle
holder
1-S21, S22
Improper valve timing
Correct valve timing
1-S52
Piston ring and cylinder worn
Replace piston ring
and bore oversize
cylinder
1-S28, S46
Excessive valve clearance
Adjust valve
clearance
1-S19
W1014322
1-S1
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Symptom
Engine Does Not
Start
(Starter Does Not
Run)
Engine Revolution Is
Not Smooth
Either White or Blue
Exhaust Gas Is
Observed
Either Black or Dark
Gray Exhaust Gas Is
Observed
Probable Cause
Solution
Reference
Page
Battery discharged
Charge battery
G-31
Starter malfunctioning
Repair or replace
starter
8-S13
Slow blow fuse blown
Replace slow blow
fuse
Main switch malfunctioning
Repair or replace
main switch
8-S8
PTO switch defective
Replace PTO switch
8-S24
Brake switch defective
Replace brake switch
8-S23
Seat switch defective
Replace seat switch
8-S24
Wiring harness disconnected
Connect wiring
harness.
Fuel filter clogged or dirty
Replace fuel filter
Air cleaner clogged
Clean or replace air
cleaner element
G-26, G-37
Fuel leak due to loose injection pipe retaining nut
Tighten retaining nut
1-S20
Injection pump malfunctioning
Repair or replace
injection pump
1-S23
Incorrect nozzle injection pressure
Adjust nozzle
injection pressure
1-S54
Injection nozzle stuck or clogged
Repair or replace
injection nozzle
1-S54
Governor malfunctioning
Repair governor
1-S25
Excessive engine oil
Reduce to specified
engine oil level
Piston ring and cylinder worn or stock
Repair piston ring
and bore oversize
piston
1-S28
Adjust injection
timing
1-S52
Deficient compression
Adjust top clearance
1-S18
Overload
Lessen load
–
Low grade fuel used
Use specified fuel
–
Fuel filter clogged
Replace fuel filter
G-35
Air cleaner clogged
Clean or replace air
cleaner element
Deficient nozzle injection
Repair or replace
nozzle
–
–
G-35
–
G-26, G-37
1-S54
W1084427
1-S2
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Symptom
Deficient Output
Excessive Lubricant
Oil Consumption
Fuel Mixed into
Lubricant Oil
Water Mixed into
Lubricant Oil
Probable Cause
Reference
Page
Solution
Adjust injection
timing
1-S52
Engine's moving parts seem to be seized
Repair or replace
engine’s moving
parts
–
Uneven fuel injection
Repair or replace
injection pump
1-S52
Repair or replace
nozzle
1-S54
Compression leak from cylinder
Replace head
gasket, tighten
cylinder head screws,
glow plugs and
nozzle holders
1-S21, S22
Piston ring gap facing the same direction
Shift ring gap
direction
1-S27, S28
Oil ring worn or stuck
Replace oil ring
1-S28
Piston ring groove worn
Replace piston
1-S28
Valve stem and valve guide worn
Replace valve stem
and valve guide
1-S33
Oil leaking due to defective seals or packing
Replace defective
seals or packing
Injection pump's plunger worn
Replace pump
element or injection
pump
1-S53
Repair or replace
nozzle
1-S54
Injection pump broken
Replace injection
pump
1-S52
Head gasket defective
Replace head gasket
1-S22
Cylinder block or cylinder head flawed
Replace cylinder
block or cylinder
head
1-S22
–
W1088099
1-S3
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Symptom
Low Oil Pressure
High Oil Pressure
Engine Overheated
Solution
Reference
Page
Engine oil insufficient
Replenish engine oil
G-21
Oil strainer clogged
Clean oil strainer
G-35
Engine oil filter cartridge clogged
Change engine oil
filter cartridge
G-21
Relief valve stuck with dirt
Replace relief valve
1-S47
Relief valve spring weaken or broken
spring
–
Excessive oil clearance of crankshaft bearing
Replace main
bearings, metals or
crankshaft
1-S44
Excessive oil clearance of crankpin bearing
Replace crankpin
bearings
1-S43
Excessive oil clearance of rocker arm
Replace rocker arms,
rocker arm brackets
or rocker arm shaft
1-S36
Oil passage clogged
Clean oil passage
–
Different type of oil
Use specified type of
oil
–
Oil pump defective
Repair or replace oil
pump
1-S47
Different type of oil
Use specified type of
oil
–
Relief valve defective
1-S47
Replenish engine oil
G-21
Fan belt broken or tensioned improperly
Replace fan belt or
adjust fan belt
tension
G-24
Cooling water insufficient
Replenish cooling
water
–
Radiator net and radiator fin clogged with dust
Clean radiator net
and radiator fin
–
Inside of radiator corroded
Clean inside of
radiator or replace
radiator
G-37
Cooling water flow route corroded
Clean or replace
cooling water flow
route
G-37
Radiator cap defective
Replace radiator cap
1-S50
Overload running
Loosen load
Head gasket defective
Replace head gasket
1-S22
Adjust injection
timing
1-S52
Unsuitable fuel used
Use specified fuel
Probable Cause
–
–
W1090661
1-S4
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
2. SERVICING SPECIFICATIONS
[1] ENGINE BODY
Cylinder Head
Item
Factory Specifications
Allowable Limit
–
0.05 mm
0.0020 in.
Top Clearance
0.50 to 0.70 mm
0.0197 to 0.0276 in.
–
Compression Pressure
2.84 to 3.24 MPa
29.0 to 33.0 kgf/cm2
412 to 469 psi
2.26 MPa
23.0 kgf/cm2
327 psi
–
10 % or less
Cylinder Head Surface Flatness
Variance Among Cylinders
W1013874
Valves
Valve Clearance (Cold)
0.145 to 0.185 mm
0.00571 to 0.00728 in.
–
Valve Seat Width
2.12 mm
0.0835 in.
–
Valve Seat Angle
0.79 rad
45°
–
Valve Face Angle
0.79 rad
45°
–
Valve Recessing
−0.10 to 0.10 mm
−0.0039 to 0.0039 in.
0.3 mm
0.0118 in.
Clearance between Valve Stem and Valve Guide
0.030 to 0.057 mm
0.00118 to 0.00224 in.
0.10 mm
0.0039 in.
Valve Stem O.D.
5.968 to 5.980 mm
0.23496 to 0.23543 in.
–
Valve Guide I.D.
6.010 to 6.025 mm
0.23661 to 0.23720 in.
–
W1014656
Valve Spring
Free Length
Setting Load / Setting Length
Tilt
31.3 to 31.8 mm
1.232 to 1.252 in.
28.4 mm
1.118 in.
64.7 N / 27.0 mm
6.6 kgf / 27.0 mm
14.6 lbs / 1.063 in.
54.9 N / 27.0 mm
5.6 kgf / 27.0 mm
12.3 lbs / 1.063 in.
–
1.2 mm
0.047 in.
W1014987
1-S5
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Rocker Arm
Item
Clearance between Rocker Arm Shaft and Rocker Arm
Allowable Limit
0.016 to 0.045 mm
0.00063 to 0.00177 in.
0.15 mm
0.0059 in.
Rocker Arm Shaft O.D.
10.473 to 10.484 mm
0.41232 to 0.41276 in.
–
Rocker Arm I.D.
10.500 to 10.518 mm
0.41339 to 0.41410 in.
–
W1015094
Push Rod
Push Rod Alignment
–
0.25 mm
0.0098 in.
W1015197
Tappet
Clearance between Tappet and Guide Bore
0.016 to 0.052 mm
0.00063 to 0.00205 in.
0.10 mm
0.0039 in.
Tappet O.D.
17.966 to 17.984 mm
0.70732 to 0.70803 in.
–
Tappet Guide I.D.
18.000 to 18.018 mm
0.70866 to 0.70937 in.
–
W1013874
Camshaft
Camshaft Side Clearance
0.15 to 0.31 mm
0.0059 to 0.0122 in.
0.50 mm
0.0197 in.
–
0.01 mm
0.0004 in.
26.88 mm
1.0583 in.
26.83 mm
1.0563 in.
0.050 to 0.091 mm
0.00197 to 0.00358 in.
0.15 mm
0.0059 in.
Camshaft Journal O.D.
32.934 to 32.950 mm
1.29661 to 1.29724 in.
–
Cylinder Block Bore I.D.
33.000 to 33.025 mm
1.29921 to 1.30020 in.
–
Camshaft Alignment
Cam Height of Intake and Exhaust
Oil Clearance between Camshaft Journal and Cylinder Block
Bore
W1016577
1-S6
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Timing Gear
Item
Allowable Limit
0.043 to 0.124 mm
0.00169 to 0.00488 in.
0.15 mm
0.0059 in.
Idle Gear-Cam Gear
0.047 to 0.123 mm
0.00185 to 0.00484 in.
0.15 mm
0.0059 in.
Idle Gear-Injection Pump Gear
0.046 to 0.124 mm
0.00181 to 0.00488 in.
0.15 mm
0.0059 in.
Crank Gear-Oil Pump Drive Gear
0.041 to 0.123 mm
0.00161 to 0.00484 in.
0.15 mm
0.0059 in.
0.020 to 0.084 mm
0.00079 to 0.00331 in.
0.10 mm
0.0039 in.
Idle Gear Shaft O.D.
19.967 to 19.980 mm
0.78610 to 0.78661 in.
–
Idle Gear Bushing I.D.
20.000 to 20.051 mm
0.78740 to 0.78941 in.
–
0.20 to 0.51 mm
0.0079 to 0.0201 in.
0.80 mm
0.0315 in.
Timing Gear Backlash
Crank Gear- Idle Gear
Clearance between Idle Gear Shaft and Idle Gear Bushing
Idle Gear Side Clearance
W1013874
Piston • Piston Ring
Piston Pin Bore I.D.
Clearance between Piston Ring and Piston
Ring Groove
Piston Ring Gap
20.000 to 20.013 mm
0.78740 to 0.78791 in.
20.05 mm
0.7894 in.
0.090 to 0.120 mm
0.00354 to 0.00472 in.
0.15 mm
0.0059 in.
Oil Ring
0.04 to 0.08 mm
0.0016 to 0.0031 in.
0.15 mm
0.0059 in.
Top Ring
0.15 to 0.30 mm
0.0059 to 0.0118 in.
1.20 mm
0.0472 in.
Second Ring
0.30 to 0.45 mm
0.0118 to 0.0177 in.
1.20 mm
0.0472 in.
Oil Ring
0.15 to 0.30 mm
0.0059 to 0.0118 in.
1.20 mm
0.0472 in.
Second Ring
W1016812
Connecting Rod
Connecting Rod Alignment
–
0.05 mm
0.0020 in.
0.014 to 0.038 mm
0.00055 to 0.00150 in.
0.10 mm
0.0039 in.
Piston Pin O.D.
20.002 to 20.011 mm
0.78748 to 0.78783 in.
–
Small End Bushing I.D.
20.025 to 20.040 mm
0.78839 to 0.78897 in.
–
Clearance between Piston Pin and Small End Bushing
W1016985
1-S7
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Crankshaft
Item
Allowable Limit
–
0.02 mm
0.0008 in.
0.15 to 0.31 mm
0.0059 to 0.0122 in.
0.50 mm
0.0197 in.
0.034 to 0.106 mm
0.00134 to 0.00417 in.
0.20 mm
0.0079 in.
Crankshaft Journal O.D.
39.934 to 39.950 mm
1.57221 to 1.57284 in.
–
Crankshaft Bearing 1 I.D.
39.984 to 40.040 mm
1.57417 to 1.57638 in.
–
0.028 to 0.059 mm
0.00110 to 0.00232 in.
0.20 mm
0.0079 in.
43.934 to 43.950 mm
1.72969 to 1.73032 in.
–
43.978 to 43.993 mm
1.73142 to 1.73201 in.
–
0.028 to 0.059 mm
0.00110 to 0.00232 in.
0.20 mm
0.0079 in.
39.934 to 39.950 mm
1.57221 to 1.57284 in.
–
Crank bearing 3 I.D.
39.978 to 39.993 mm
1.57394 to 1.57453 in.
–
0.020 to 0.051 mm
0.00079 to 0.00201 in.
0.15 mm
0.0059 in.
Crankpin O.D.
33.959 to 33.975 mm
1.33697 to 1.33760 in.
–
Crankpin Bearing I.D.
33.995 to 34.010 mm
1.33839 to 1.33898 in.
–
Crankshaft Alignment
Crankshaft Side Clearance
Oil Clearance between Crankshaft Journal and Crankshaft
Bearing 1
Bearing 2 (Flywheel Side)
Crankshaft Bearing 2 I.D.
Bearing 3 (Intermediate)
Oil Clearance between Crankpin and Crankpin Bearing
W1017094
Cylinder Liner
Cylinder Liner I.D.
[Standard]
Oversized Cylinder Liner I.D.
[Oversize : 0.25 mm (0.0098 in.)]
67.000 to 67.019 mm
2.63779 to 2.63854 in.
67.169 mm
2.64445 in.
67.250 to 67.269 mm
2.64764 to 2.64839 in.
67.419 mm
2.65429 in.
W1017278
1-S8
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
[2] LUBRICATING SYSTEM
Oil Pump
Item
Allowable Limit
49 kPa
0.5 kgf/cm2
7 psi
–
196 to 441 kPa
2.0 to 4.5 kgf/cm2
28 to 64 psi
147 kPa
1.5 kgf/cm2
21 psi
Clearance between Inner Rotor and Outer Rotor
0.03 to 0.14 mm
0.0012 to 0.0055 in.
–
Clearance between Outer Rotor and Pump Body
0.07 to 0.15 mm
0.0028 to 0.0059 in.
–
0.075 to 0.135 mm
0.00295 to 0.00531 in.
–
Engine Oil Pressure
At Idle Speed
At Rated Speed
End Clearance between Inner Rotor and Cover
W1017384
[3] COOLING SYSTEM
Thermostat
Thermostat's Valve Opening Temperature
Temperature at which Thermostat Completely Opens
69.5 to 72.5 °C
157.1 to 162.5 °F
–
85 °C
185 °F
–
W1017547
Radiator
Radiator Water Tightness
Radiator Cap Air Leakage
Fan Belt Tension
Water tightness at
specified pressure
157 kPa
1.6 kgf/cm2, 23 psi
–
10 seconds or more
88 → 59 kPa
0.9 → 0.6 kgf/cm2
13 → 9 psi
–
7.0 to 9.0 mm / 98 N
0.28 to 0.35 in. / 98 N
(10 kgf, 22 lbs)
–
W1013874
1-S9
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
[4] FUEL SYSTEM
Injection Pump
Item
Allowable Limit
0.28 to 0.31 rad (16° to
18°) Before T.D.C.
–
Fuel Tightness of Pump Element
–
13.73 MPa
140 kgf/cm2
1991 psi
Fuel Tightness of Delivery Valve
10 seconds
13.73 → 12.75 MPa
140 →130 kgf/cm2
1991 → 1849 psi
5 seconds
13.73 → 12.75
MPa
140 →130 kgf/cm2
1991 → 1849 psi
Injection Timing
W1013874
Injection Nozzle
Fuel Injection Pressure
Fuel Tightness of Nozzle Valve Seat
13.73 to 14.71 MPa
140 to 150 kgf/cm2
1991 to 2134 psi
–
When the pressure is
12.75 MPa
(130 kgf/cm2, 1849 psi),
the valve seat must be
fueltight
–
W1013973
1-S10
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Tightening torques of screws, bolts and nuts on the table below are especially specified.
(For general use screws, bolts and nuts : See page G-8.)
Item
Size x Pitch
N·m
kgf·m
ft-lbs
Starter M terminal nut
M6 × 1.0
9.8 to 13.7
1.0 to 1.4
7.2 to 10.1
Alternator B terminal nut
M6 × 1.0
7.8 to 9.3
0.80 to 0.95
5.8 to 6.9
1.0 to 1.8
0.10 to 0.18
0.74 to 1.33
Glow plug terminal mounting nut
Universal joint mounting screw
M8 × 1.25
23.5 to 27.5
2.4 to 2.8
17.4 to 20.3
Engine mounting nut
M8 × 1.25
23.5 to 27.5
2.4 to 2.8
17.4 to 20.3
Cylinder head screw
M8 × 1.25
37.3 to 42.2
3.8 to 4.3
27.5 to 31.1
* Cylinder head cover cap nut
M6 × 1.0
3.9 to 5.9
0.4 to 0.6
2.9 to 4.3
Injection pipe retaining nut
M12 × 1.5
24.5 to 34.3
2.5 to 3.5
18.1 to 25.3
Nozzle holder assembly
M20 × 1.5
49.0 to 68.6
5.0 to 7.0
36.2 to 50.6
Overflow pipe assembly retaining nut
M12 × 1.5
19.6 to 24.5
2.0 to 2.5
14.5 to 18.1
Glow plug
M8 × 1.0
7.85 to 14.7
0.8 to 1.5
5.8 to 10.8
* Rocker arm bracket nut
M6 × 1.0
9.8 to 11.3
1.00 to 1.15
7.2 to 8.3
* Fan drive pulley retaining screw
M12 × 1.5
117.7 to 127.5
12.0 to 13.0
86.8 to 94.0
* Idle gear shaft mounting screw
M6 × 1.0
9.8 to 11.3
1.00 to 1.15
7.2 to 8.3
* Connecting rod screw
M7 × 0.75
26.5 to 30.4
2.7 to 3.1
19.5 to 22.4
* Flywheel bolt
M10 × 1.25
53.9 to 58.8
5.5 to 6.0
39.8 to 43.4
* Main bearing case screw 2
M7 × 1.0
26.5 to 30.4
2.7 to 3.1
19.5 to 22.4
* Main bearing case screw 1
M6 × 1.0
12.7 to 15.7
1.3 to 1.6
9.4 to 11.6
PT 1/8
14.7 to 19.6
1.5 to 2.0
10.8 to 14.5
34.3 to 39.2
3.5 to 4.0
25.3 to 28.9
Oil pressure switch
Nozzle holder
n NOTE
• For * marked screws, bolts and nuts on the table, apply engine oil to their threads and seats before
tightening.
• The letter “M” in Size x Pitch means that the screw, bolt or nut dimension stands for metric. The size is
the nominal outside diameter in mm of the threads. The pitch is the nominal distance in mm between two
threads.
W1013236
1-S11
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
4. CHECKING, DISASSEMBLING AND SERVICING
[1] SEPARATING ENGINE
(1) Disassembling and Assembling
Dismount Mower
1. See “MOWER” section.
W1019171
Draining Engine Oil
1. Park the machine on level ground.
2. Start and warm up the engine for approx. 5 minutes.
3. Place an oil pan underneath the engine.
4. Remove the drain plug (1) to drain oil.
5. After draining, screw in the drain plug (1).
(When refilling)
• Fill the engine oil up to the upper line on the dipstick (3).
Engine oil
Capacity
2.8 L
2.95 U.S.qts.
2.4 lmp.qts.
n IMPORTANT
• Never mix two different type of oil.
• Use the proper SAE Engine Oil according to ambient
temperatures.
Refer to "LUBRICANTS, FUEL AND COOLING WATER".(See
page G-7.)
(1) Drain Plug
(2) Oil Inlet Plug
(3) Dipstick
(A) Upper Level
(B) Lower Level
W1019220
1-S12
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Draining Coolant
•
1.
2.
3.
4.
CAUTION
Never open the radiator cap while operating or immediately
after stopping. Otherwise, hot water will spout out from the
radiator. Wait for more than ten minutes to cool the radiator,
before opening the cap.
Stop the engine and let cool down.
Remove the radiator coolant drain plug (3) and engine coolant
drain plug (4) to drain the coolant.
Remove the radiator cap (1) to completely drain the coolant.
After all coolant is drained, close the drain plugs.
Coolant
(1) Radiator Cap
(2) Recovery Tank
Radiator
2.1 L
2.2 U.S.qts.
1.8 lmp.qts.
Recovery tank
0.25 L
0.26 U.S.qts.
0.22 lmp.qts
Capacity
(3) Radiator Coolant Drain Plug
(4) Engine Coolant Drain Plug
W1019510
Battery
CAUTION
• When disconnecting the battery cables, disconnect the
negative cable from the battery first. When connecting,
connect the positive cable to the battery first.
1. Disconnect the negative cable (1) from the battery.
2. Disconnect the positive cable (2) from the battery.
(1) Negative Cable
(2) Positive Cable
W1019788
Bonnet and Air Cleaner
1. Disconnect the 1P connectors (3) from the head light (2).
2. Remove the wiring (4) from the bonnet.
3. Remove the bonnet stay mounting screws (6).
4. Remove the bonnet with the bonnet bracket (5) from the frame.
5. Loosen the air cleaner hose clamp.
6. Remove the air cleaner (1) with air cleaner hose.
(1) Air Cleaner
(2) Head Light
(3) 1P Connectors
(4) Wiring
(5) Bonnet Bracket
(6) Bonnet Stay Mounting Screws
W1019921
1-S13
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Wiring
1. Disconnect the tie (1) from the alternator, and remove the PTO
cable (3) and wiring (2).
2. Disconnect 2P connector (5) and wiring (4) from the alternator.
3. Disconnect 1P connector (8) from the oil pressure switch.
4. Disconnect 1P connector (10) and wiring (9) from the starter.
5. Disconnect the tie (6) from the rear end plate.
6. Disconnect the ground cable (7).
Starter M terminal nut
9.8 to 13.7 N·m
1.0 to 1.4 Kgf·m
7.2 to 10.1 ft-lbs
Alternator B terminal nut
7.8 to 9.3 N·m
0.80 to 0.95 Kgf·m
5.8 to 6.9 ft-lbs
Tightening torque
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Tie
Wiring
PTO Cable
Wiring
2P Connector
(6) Tie
(7) Ground Cable
(8) 1P Connector
(9) Wiring
(10) 1P Connector
W1020275
Front Cover and PTO Assembly
1. Remove the front PTO cover.
2. Remove the PTO clutch spring (4), brake spring (7) and return
spring (6).
3. Remove the belt stay (9).
4. Remove the pulley (10).
5. Remove the front PTO belts (8).
6. Remove the cotter pin and flange bolt (3).
7. Pull out the PTO brake assembly (5) and tension arm (2) with
tension pulley.
(When reassembling)
• Apply grease to the tension arm bushings and the PTO brake
bushing.
• After reassembling the PTO clutch spring, be sure to adjust the
front PTO belt tension. (See page 7-S3)
• After reassembling the belt stay, be sure to adjust the clearance
between the belt stay and front PTO belt. (See page 7-S3)
Clearance (L) :1.0 to 2.5 mm (0.04 to 0.10 in.)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Cotter Pin
Tension Arm
Flange Bolt
PTO Clutch Spring
PTO Brake Assembly
(6) Return Spring
(7) Brake Spring
(8) Front PTO Belts
(9) Belt Stay
(10) Pulley
W1020759
1-S14
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Muffler, Wiring, Accelerator and Hose
1. Remove the muffler mounting screws (1), (7).
2. Remove the muffler (2).
3. Disconnect 1P connector (5) from the coolant temperature
sensor.
4. Disconnect the wiring (3) from the glow plug.
5. Disconnect 1P connector (4) from the engine stop solenoid.
6. Disconnect the accelerator wire (6).
7. Loosen the hose clamps.
8. Remove the return hose 1 (8) and fuel hose 1 (9).
9. Disconnect the ground cables (10), (11).
n IMPORTANT
• When disconnecting the fuel hose 1 and return hose 1, be
careful not to let the fuel spill out of the hoses.
(When reassembling)
Tightening torque
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Glow plug terminal
mounting nut
Muffler Mounting Screws
Muffler
Wiring
1P Connector
1P Connector
Accelerator Wire
1.0 to 1.8 N·m
0.10 to 0.18 Kgf·m
0.74 to 1.33 ft-lbs
(7) Muffler Mounting Screw
(8) Return Hose 1
(9) Fuel Hose 1
(10) Ground Cable
(11) Ground Cable
W1021263
Universal Joint*****
1. Remove the universal joint mounting screws (1).
2. Disconnect the universal joint (2) from the fun drive pulley.
(When reassembling)
• Apply grease to the all splines on the drive shaft.
Tightening torque
Universal joint
mounting screw
(1) Universal Joint Mounting Screw
23.5 to 27.5 N·m
2.4 to 2.8 Kgf·m
17.4 to 20.3 ft-lbs
(2) Universal Joint
W1021776
1-S15
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Separating Engine
1. Pull out the hairpin cotters from the radiator.
2. Remove the engine mounting nuts, and support the engine with
an engine lift hook and hoist.
3. Separate the engine with the radiator from the frame, taking care
not to damage the radiator.
(When reassembling)
• Fit the radiator to the frame, adjusting the clearance between the
radiator and the fan as shown in the figure.
Tightening torque
Engine mounting nut
23.5 to 27.5 N·m
2.4 to 2.8 Kgf·m
17.4 to 20.3 ft-lbs
(Reference)
Clearance between fan
and radiator
(1) Fan
(2) Radiator
Factory
spec.
L
9.0 mm
0.35 in.
H
2.0 mm
0.08 in.
L : Circumferential clearance
between fan and radiator
H : Longitudinal clearance between
fan and radiator
W1021955
1-S16
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
[2] ENGINE BODY
(1) Checking and Adjusting
Compression Pressure
1. Run the engine until it is warmed up.
2. Stop the engine.
3. Disconnect the 2P connector from the fuel pump.
4. Remove the air cleaner, the muffler and all injection nozzles.
5. Disconnect the accelerator wire.
6. Remove the air cleaner stay.
7. Remove the glow plugs and return hose 1.
8. Engage the parking brake.
9. Set a compression tester (Code No. 07909-30208) with the
adaptor (Adaptor H, Code No. 07909-31231) to the nozzle hole.
10.While cranking the engine with the starter, measure the
compression pressure.
11.Repeat steps 9 and 10 for each cylinder.
12.If the measurement is below the allowable limit, apply a small
amount of oil to the cylinder wall through the nozzle hole and
measure the compression pressure again.
13.If the compression pressure is still less than the allowable limit,
check the top clearance, valve and cylinder head.
14.If the compression pressure increases after applying oil, check
the cylinder wall and piston rings.
n NOTE
• Check the compression pressure with the specified valve
clearance.
• Always use a fully charged battery for performing this test.
• Variances in cylinder compression values should be under
10 %.
Factory spec.
2.84 to 3.24 MPa
29.0 to 33.0 kgf/cm2
412 to 469 psi
Allowable limit
2.26 MPa
23.0 kgf/cm2
327 psi
Compression pressure
W1022478
1-S17
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Top Clearance
1. Remove the cylinder head (Do not attempt to remove the cylinder
head gasket completely).
2. Bring the piston to its top dead center fasten 1.5 mm dia. 5 to 7
mm long fuse wires to 3 to 4 spots on the piston top with grease
so as to avoid the intake and exhaust valves and the combustion
chamber ports.
3. Bring the piston to its middle position, install the cylinder head,
and tighten the cylinder head screws to specification. (Head
gasket must be changed to new one.)
4. Turn the crank shaft until the piston exceeds its top dead center.
5. Remove the cylinder head, and measure the thickness of the
squeezed fuses.
6. If the measurement is not within the factory specifications, check
the oil clearance of between the crankpin and crankpin bearing
and between the piston pin and small end bushing.
n NOTE
• After checking the top clearance, be sure to assemble the
cylinder head with a new cylinder head gasket.
Top clearance
Factory spec.
0.50 to 0.70 mm
0.0197 to 0.0276 in.
Tightening torque
Cylinder head screw
37.3 to 42.2 N·m
3.8 to 4.3 kgf·m
27.5 to 31.1 ft-lbs
(1) Fuse
W10107670
1-S18
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Valve Clearance
n IMPORTANT
• The valve clearance must be checked and adjusted when
engine is cold.
1. Remove the cylinder head cover and the glow plugs.
2. Align the “1TC” mark (1) on the flywheel and alignment mark (2)
on the rear end plate so that the No. 1 piston comes to the
compression top dead center.
3. Check the following valve clearance marked with “I” using a
feeler gauge.
[When No. 1 piston comes to the compression top dead center]
Cylinder No.
No.1
Intake valve
H
Exhaust valve
H
No.2
No.3
H
H
4. If the clearance is not within the factory specifications, adjust with
the adjusting screw.
5. Then turn the flywheel 6.28 rad (360°), and align the “1TC” mark
(1) on the flywheel and alignment mark (2) on the rear end plate
so that the No.1 piston comes to the overlap position.
6. Check the following valve clearance marked with “I” using a
feeler gauge.
[When No. 1 piston comes to the overlap position]
Cylinder No.
No.1
Intake valve
No.2
No.3
I
Exhaust valve
I
7. If the clearance is not within the factory specifications, adjust with
the adjusting screw.
Intake and exhaust
valve clearance (Cold)
Factory spec.
0.145 to 0.185 mm
0.00571 to 0.00728 in.
n NOTE
• The sequence of cylinder numbers is given as No.1, No.2
and No.3 starting from the gear case side.
• After adjusting the valve clearance, secure the adjusting
screw with the lock nut.
(1) “1TC” Mark
(2) Alignment Mark
A : Gear Case Side
W10113200
1-S19
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
(A) Cylinder Head and Valves
External Components
1. Remove the air cleaner stay (5).
2. Remove the water pipe 1 (2), water pipe 2 (7) and radiator (8)
with the recovery tank.
3. Remove the alternator (9) and fan belt (10).
4. Remove the cooling fan (4) and fan pulley.
5. Remove the starter (11).
6. Remove the engine stop solenoid (1).
7. Remove the engine mounting stays (6).
8. Remove the PTO pulley.
(When reassembling)
• Connect the water pipe 1 with the white marking facing upward.
• Connect the water pipe 2 with the yellow marking facing upward.
• Install the engine stop solenoid so that the plunger moves
smoothly.
n IMPORTANT
• After reassembling the fan belt, be sure to adjust the fan belt
tension. (See page 1-S49)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Engine Stop Solenoid
Water Pipe 1
PTO Pulley
Cooling Fan
Air Cleaner Stay
Engine Mounting Stay
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
Water Pipe 2
Radiator
Alternator
Fan Belt
Starter
W1024919
Cylinder Head Cover
1. Remove the head cover cap nuts.
2. Remove the cylinder head cover.
(When reassembling)
• Check to see if the cylinder head cover gasket is not defective.
• Apply engine oil to the cylinder head cover cap nuts.
And tighten them.
Tightening torque
Cylinder head cover cap
nut
3.9 to 5.9 N·m
0.4 to 0.6 kgf·m
2.9 to 4.3 ft-lbs
W10147380
Injection Pipes
1. Loosen the screws on the pipe clamps (1).
2. Detach the injection pipes (2).
(When reassembling)
• Blow out dust from the pipes with compressed air.
Then reassemble the pipes in the reverse order..
Tightening torque
(1) Pipe Clamp
Injection pipe retaining
nut
24.5 to 34.3 N·m
2.5 to 3.5 kgf·m
18.1 to 25.3 ft-lbs
(2) Injection Pipe
W10150780
1-S20
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Nozzle Holder Assembly and Glow Plug
1. Remove the overflow pipe assembly (5).
2. Remove the nozzle holder assemblies (2) using a 21 mm deep
socket wrench.
3. Remove the copper gasket and heat seal (3).
4. Remove the lead (4) from the glow plugs.
5. Remove the glow plugs (1).
(When reassembling)
• Replace the copper gasket and heat seal with new one.
Tightening torque
49.0 to 68.6 N·m
5.0 to 7.0 kgf·m
36.2 to 50.6 ft-lbs
Overflow pipe assembly
retaining nut
19.6 to 24.5 N·m
2.0 to 2.5 kgf·m
14.5 to 18.1 ft-lbs
Glow plug
7.85 to 14.7 N·m
0.8 to 1.5 kgf·m
5.8 to 10.8 ft-lbs
(1) Glow Plug
(2) Nozzle Holder Assembly
(3) Heat Seal
(4) Lead
(5) Overflow Pipe Assembly
W10259700
Removal Procedure for Nozzle Heat Seal Service
n IMPORTANT
• Use a plus (phillips head) screw driver (1) that has a Dia.
bigger than the heat seal hole (Approx. 6 mm) 1/4 in..
1. Drive a screw driver (1) lightly into the heat seal hole.
2. Turn a screw driver three or four times each way.
3. While turning the screw driver, slowly pull the heat seal (4) out
together with the copper gasket (3).
4. If the heat seal drops, repeat the above procedure.
(1) Screw driver (Plus)
(2) Nozzle Holder
(3) Copper Gasket
(4) Heat Seal
W10154410
Rocker Arm and Push Rod
1. Remove the rocker arm bracket nuts.
2. Detach the rocker arm assembly (1).
3. Remove the push rods (2).
(When reassembling)
• When putting the push rods (2) onto the tappets (3), check to see
if their ends are properly engaged with the grooves.
n IMPORTANT
• After installing the rocker arm, be sure to adjust the valve
clearance.
• Apply engine oil to the rocker arm bracket nuts.
And tighten them.
Tightening torque
Rocker arm bracket nut
(1) Rocker Arm Assembly
(2) Push Rod
9.8 to 11.3 N·m
1.00 to 1.15 kgf·m
7.2 to 8.3 ft-lbs
(3) Tappet
W10155810
1-S21
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Cylinder Head
1. Loosen the pipe clamp, and remove the water return pipe.
2. Remove the cylinder head bolt in the order of (14) to (1).
3. Lift up the cylinder head to detach.
4. Remove the cylinder head gasket and O-ring.
(When reassembling)
• Replace the cylinder head gasket with a new one.
• Securely fit the O-ring to the pipe pin.
• Tighten the cylinder head bolts after applying sufficient oil.
• Tighten the cylinder head bolts in diagonal sequence starting
from the center. (Refer to figure left.)
• Tighen them uniformly, or the cylinder head may deform in the
long run.
• Retighten the cylinder head bolts after running the engine for 30
minutes.
n NOTE
• To Loosen : 14 to 1
• To Tighten : 1 to 14
Tightening torque
Cylinder head screw
37.3 to 42.2 N·m
3.8 to 4.3 kgf·m
28.0 to 31.1 ft-lbs
W10159710
Tappets
1. Remove the tappets (1) from the crankcase.
(When reassembling)
• Before installing the tappets, apply engine oil thinly around them.
n IMPORTANT
• Mark the cylinder number to the tappets to prevent
interchanging.
(1) Tappet
W1027457
Valves
1. Remove the valve caps (2).
2. Remove the valve spring collet (3), pushing the valve spring
retainer (4) by valve spring replacer (1).
3. Remove the valve spring retainer (4), valve spring (5) and valve
stem seal (6).
4. Remove the valve (7).
(When reassembling)
• Wash the valve stem and valve guide hole, and apply engine oil
sufficiently.
• After installing the valve spring collets, lightly tap the stem to
assure proper fit with a plastic hammer.
n IMPORTANT
• Don’t change the combination of valve and valve guide.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Valve Spring Replacer
Valve Cap
Valve Spring Collet
Valve Spring Retainer
(5) Valve Spring
(6) Valve Stem Seal
(7) Valve
W10162820
1-S22
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
(B) Timing Gears and Camshaft
Injection Pump and Speed Control Plate
1. Remove the socket head screws and nuts, and remove the
injection pump (3).
2. Remove the screws and separate the speed control plate (2),
taking care not to damage the spring (4).
3. Disconnect the spring (4) and remove the speed control plate (2).
(When reassembling)
• Hook the spring (4) to the lever (5) first and install the speed
control plate (2).
• Be sure to place the copper washers underneath two screws (1)
(as shown in the figure).
• Position the slot (9) on the fork lever just under the slot (8) on the
crankcase.
• Insert the injection pump (3) so that the control rod (7) should be
pushed by the spring (6) at its end and the pin (10) on the rod
engages with the slot (9) on the fork lever (as shown in the
figure).
n NOTE
• The sealant is applied to both sides of the soft metal gasket
shim. The liquid gasket is not required for assembling.
• Addition or reduction of shim (0.05 mm, 0.0020 in.) delays or
advances the injection timing by approx. 0.0087 rad (0.5°).
• In disassembling and replacing, be sure to use the same
number of new gasket shims with the same thickness.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Screws and Copper Washers
Speed Control Plate
Injection Pump
Spring
Lever
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
Spring
Control Rod
Slot (Crankcase Side)
Slot (Fork Lever Side)
Pin
W10167080
Fan Drive Pulley
1. Set the stopper to the flywheel.
2. Remove the fan drive pulley retaining screw.
3. Draw out the fan drive pulley with a puller.
(When reassembling)
• Install the pulley to the crankshaft, aligning the mark (1) on them.
• Apply engine oil to the fan drive pulley retaining screws, and
tighten them.
Tightening torque
Fan drive pulley retaining
screw
117.7 to 127.5 N·m
12.0 to 13.0 kgf·m
86.8 to 94.0 ft-lbs
(1) Aligning Mark
W10172470
1-S23
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Gear Case
1. Remove the screw (1).
2. Disconnect the start spring (2) in the speed control plate
mounting hole.
3. Remove the gear case (3).
(When reassembling)
• Apply a liquid gasket (Three Bond 1215 or equivalent) to both
sides of the gear case gasket (4).
• Be sure to set three O-rings (5) inside the gear case.
(1) Screw
(2) Start Spring
(3) Gear Case
(4) Gear Case Gasket
(5) O-rings
W10174840
Idle Gear
1. Remove the external snap ring (3), the collar (2) and the idle gear
(1).
2. Remove the idle gear shaft mounting screws.
3. Remove the idle gear shaft.
(When reassembling)
• Install the idle gear, aligning the mark on the gears referring to
the figure.
• Apply engine oil to the idle gear shaft mounting screws.
And tighten them.
Tightening torque
(1) Idle Gear
(2) Idle Gear Collar
Idle gear shaft mounting
screw
9.8 to 11.3 N·m
1.00 to 1.15 kgf·m
7.2 to 8.3 ft-lbs
(3) External Snap Ring
W1028418
1-S24
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Fuel Camshaft
1. Remove the retaining plate (1).
2. Remove the fork lever holder mounting screws (8), then draw out
the injection pump gear (3) and fuel camshaft (2) with the
governor fork assembly.
(When reassembling)
• Hook the gevernor spring (7) to the fork lever 2 (6) as shown in
the figure before installing the fork lever assembly to the
crankcase.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Retaining Plate
Fuel Camshaft
Injection Pump Gear
Governor Sleeve
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Fork Lever 1
Fork Lever 2
Governor Spring
Fork Lever Holder Mounting Screw
W10178820
Oil Pump and Crankshaft Gear
1. Remove the oil pump gear (6).
2. Remove the oil pump (5).
3. Remove the collar (4), O-ring (3) and oil slinger (2).
4. Remove the crankshaft gear (1) with a puller.
(When reassembling)
• Install the collar after aligning the marks on the gears. (See the
figure at “Idle Gear”.)
(1) Crankshaft Gear
(2) Crankshaft Oil Slinger
(3) O-ring
(4) Crankshaft Collar
(5) Oil Pump
(6) Oil Pump Gear
W10180290
1-S25
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
(C) Connecting Rod and Piston
Oil Pan and Oil Strainer
1. Remove the oil pan (4).
2. Remove the oil strainer (3).
(When reassembling)
• Install the oil strainer, using care not to damage the O-ring (1).
• Using the hole (6) numbered “3”, install the oil strainer by
mounting screw.
• Apply liquid gasket (Three Bond 1270D or 1270C) to the oil pan
as shown in the figure.
n IMPORTANT
• Scrape off the old adhesive completely. Wipe the sealing
surface clean using waste cloth soaked with gasoline.
Now apply new adhesive 3 to 5 mm (0.12 to 0.20 in.) thick all
over the contact surface. Apply the adhesive also on the
center of the flange as well as on the inner wall of each bolt
hole.
• Cut the nozzle of the “fluid sealant” container at its second
notch. Apply “fluid sealant” about 5 mm (0.20 in.) thick.
Within 20 minutes after the application of fluid sealant,
reassemble the components. Wait then for about 30
minutes, and pour oil in the crankcase.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
O-ring
Screw
Oil Strainer
Oil Pan
(5) Oil Pan Mounting Screws
(6) Hole
(7) Fluid Sealant
W10265670
Connecting Rod Cap
1. Remove the connecting rod screws from connecting rod cap.
2. Remove the connecting rod caps.
(When reassembling)
• Align the marks (a) with each other. (Face the marks toward the
injection pump.)
• Apply engine oil to the connecting rod screws and lightly screw it
in by hand, then tighten it to the specified torque.
If the connecting rod screw won’t be screwed in smoothly, clean
the threads.
If the connecting rod screw is still hard to screw in, replace it.
• Do not change the combination of crankpin bearing and
connecting rod.
Tightening torque
Connecting rod screw
26.5 to 30.4 N·m
2.7 to 3.1 kgf·m
19.5 to 22.4 ft-lbs
(a) Mark
W10275480
1-S26
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Piston
1. Turn the flywheel and bring the piston to top dead center.
2. Draw out the piston upward by lightly tapping it from the bottom
of the crankcase with the grip of a hammer.
3. Draw out the other pistons after the same method as above.
(When reassembling)
• Before inserting the piston into the cylinder, apply enough engine
oil to the cylinder.
• When inserting the piston into the cylinder, face the mark on the
connecting rod to the injection pump.
n IMPORTANT
• Do not change the combination of cylinder and piston. Make
sure of the position of each piston by marking. For example,
mark “1” for piston No. 1.
• When installing the piston into the cylinder, place the gaps
of all of the piston rings as shown in the figure.
• Carefully insert the piston using a piston ring compressor.
Otherwise, their chrome-plated section may be scratched,
causing trouble inside the cylinder.
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
Top Ring Gap
Second Ring Gap
Oil Ring Gap
Piston Pin Hole
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
0.785 rad (45°)
0.785 rad (45°)
0.785 rad (45°)
Mark
W10277450
1-S27
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Piston Ring and Connecting Rod
1. Remove the piston rings using a piston ring tool (Code No.
07909-32121).
2. Remove the piston pin (7), and separate the connecting rod (6)
from the piston (5).
(When reassembling)
• When installing the rings, assemble the rings so that the
manufacturer’s mark (12) near the gap faces the top of the piston.
• When installing the oil ring onto the piston, place the expander
joint (10) on the opposite side of the oil ring gap (11).
• Apply engine oil to the piston pin.
• When installing the connecting rod to the piston, immerse the
piston in 80 °C (176°F) oil for 10 to 15 minutes and insert the
piston pin to the piston.
• When installing the connecting rod to the piston, align the mark
(8) on the connecting rod to the fan-shaped concave (9).
n IMPORTANT
• Mark the same number on the connecting rod and the piston
so as not to change the combination.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Top Ring
Second Ring
Oil Ring
Piston Pin Snap Ring
Piston
Connecting Rod
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
Piston Pin
Mark
Fan-Shaped Concave
Expander Joint
Oil Ring Gap
Manufacturer’s Mark
W10281670
1-S28
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
(D) Crankshaft
Flywheel
1. Lock the flywheel not to turn using flywheel stopper.
2. Remove the flywheel screws, except for two which must be
loosened and left as they are.
3. Set a flywheel puller (Code No: 07916-32011), and remove the
flywheel.
(When reassembling)
• Apply engine oil to the flywheel screws. And tighten them.
Tightening torque
53.9 to 58.8 N·m
5.5 to 6.0 kgf·m
39.8 to 43.4 ft-lbs
Flywheel bolt
W1030810
Bearing Case Cover
1. Remove the bearing case cover mounting screws. First, remove
inside screws and then outside screws.
(When reassembling)
• Fit the bearing case gasket (3) and the bearing case cover gasket
(4) with correct directions.
• Apply liquid-type gasket (Three Bond 1215 or its equivalent) to
both sides of a new bearing case cover gasket.
• Install the bearing case cover to position the casting mark “↑” (1)
on it upward.
• Apply engine oil to the oil seal lip and take care that it is not rolled
when installing.
• Tighten the bearing case cover mounting screws with even force
on the diagonal line.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Mark
Mark Bearing Case Cover
Bearing Case Gasket
Bearing Case Cover Gasket
Oil Seal
Bearing Case Cover
(A) Upside
W1031168
1-S29
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Crankshaft Assembly
1. Remove the main bearing case screw 2 (1).
2. Pull out the crankshaft assembly.
(When reassembling)
• Install the crankshaft sub assembly, aligning the screw hole of
main bearing case 2 with the screw hole of cylinder block.
• Apply engine oil to the main bearing case screw 2. And tighten it.
Tightening torque
Main bearing case screw 2
26.5 to 30.4 N·m
2.7 to 3.1 kgf·m
19.5 to 22.4 ft-lbs
(1) Main Bearing Case Screw 2
W1031360
1-S30
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Main Bearing Case Assembly
1. Remove the two main bearing case screws 1 (7), and remove the
main bearing case assembly 1 (1), being careful with crankshaft
bearing 3 (4).
2. Remove the main bearing case assembly 2 (2) and the main
bearing case assembly 3 (3) as above. Keep in mind, however,
that the thrust bearing (6) is installed in the main bearing case
assembly 3 (3).
(When reassembling)
• Clean the oil passage in the main bearing cases.
• Apply clean engine oil to the bearings and to the main bearing
case screw 1(7).
• Install the main bearing case assemblies in original positions.
Since diameters of main bearing cases vary, install them in order
of marking (b) from the gear case side. (Refer to the figure.).
• Match the alignment numbers (a) on the main bearing case
assembly 1 (1).
• Do the same for the main bearing case assembly 2 (2) and the
main bearing case assembly 3 (3) too.
• When installing the main bearing case 1 and 2, face the mark
"FLYWHEEL" to the flywheel.
• Install the thrust bearing (6) with its oil groove facing outward.
• Confirm that the main bearing cases move smoothly after
tightening the main bearing case screw 1 (7) to the specified
torque.
Tightening torque
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Main bearing case screw 1
Main Bearing Case Assembly 1
Crankshaft Bearing 3
Crankshaft Bearing 2
Thrust Bearing
Main Bearing Case Screw 1
12.7 to 15.7 N·m
1.3 to 1.6 kgf·m
9.4 to 11.6 ft-lbs
(a) Alignment Number
(b) Marking (1 or 2)
W1031597
1-S31
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
(3) Servicing
(A) Cylinder Head and Valve
Cylinder Head Surface Flatness
1. Clean the cylinder head surface.
2. Place a straightedge on the cylinder head’s four sides and two
diagonal as shown in the figure.
3. Measure the clearance with a feeler gauge.
4. If the measurement exceeds the allowable limit, correct it with a
surface grinder.
n IMPORTANT
• Do not place the straightedge on the combustion chamber.
• Be sure to check the valve recessing after correcting.
Cylinder head surface
flatness
Allowable limit
0.05 mm
0.0020 in.
W10301620
Cylinder Head Flaw
1. Prepare an air spray red check (Code No. 07909-31371).
2. Clean the surface of the cylinder head with detergent (2).
3. Spray the cylinder head surface with the red permeative liquid
(1). Leave it five to ten minutes after spraying.
4. Wash away the red permeative liquid on the cylinder head
surface with the detergent (2).
5. Spray the cylinder head surface with white developer (3).
6. If flawed, it can be identified as red marks.
(1) Red Permeative Liquid
(2) Detergent
(3) White Developer
W10303200
1-S32
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Valve Recessing
1. Clean the cylinder head surface, valve face and valve seat.
2. Insert the valve into the valve guide.
3. Measure the valve recessing with a depth gauge.
4. If the measurement exceeds the allowable limit, replace the
valve.
5. If it still exceeds the allowable limit after replacing the valve,
correct the valve seat face of the cylinder head with a valve seat
cutter (Code No. 07909-33102) or valve seat grinder.
6. Then, correct the cylinder head surface with a surface grinder, or
replace the cylinder head.
Factory spec.
0.10 (protrusion) to
0.10 (recessing) mm
0.0039 (protrusion) to
0.0039 (recessing) in.
Allowable limit
0.30 (recessing) mm
0.0118 (recessing) in.
Valve recessing
(1) Cylinder Head Surface
(A) Recessing
(B) Protrusion
W10305870
Clearance between Valve Stem and Valve Guide
1. Remove carbon from the valve guide section.
2. Measure the valve stem O.D. with an outside micrometer.
3. Measure the valve guide I.D. with a small hole gauge, and
calculate the clearance.
4. If the clearance exceeds the allowable limit, replace the valves.
If it still exceeds the allowable limit, replace the valve guide.
Clearance between
valve stem and valve
guide
Factory spec.
0.030 to 0.057 mm
0.00118 to 0.00224 in.
Allowable limit
0.10 mm
0.0039 in.
Valve stem O.D.
Factory spec.
5.968 to 5.980 mm
0.23496 to 0.23543 in.
Valve guide I.D.
Factory spec.
6.010 to 6.025 mm
0.23661 to 0.23720 in.
W10311740
1-S33
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Replacing Valve Guide
(When removing)
1. Press out the used valve guide using a valve guide replacing tool.
(When installing)
1. Clean a new valve guide and valve guide bore, and apply engine
oil to them.
2. Press in a new valve guide using a valve guide replacing tool.
3. Ream precisely the I.D. of the valve guide to the specified
dimension.
Valve guide I.D.
(Intake and exhaust)
Factory spec.
6.010 to 6.025 mm
0.23661 to 0.23720 in.
n IMPORTANT
• Do not hit the valve guide with a hammer during
replacement.
(1) Intake Valve Guide
(2) Exhaust Valve Guide
(A) When Removing
(B) When Installing
W10314690
Valve Seating
1. Coat the valve face lightly with prussian blue and put the valve on
its seat to check the contact.
2. If the valve does not seat all the way around the valve seat or the
valve contact is less than 70 %, correct the valve seating as
follows.
3. If the valve contact does not comply with the reference valve,
replace the valve or correct the contact of valve seating.
(1) Correct
(2) Incorrect
(3) Incorrect
W1033143
1-S34
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Correcting Valve and Valve Seat
n NOTE
• Before correcting the valve and seat, check the valve stem
and the I.D. of valve guide section, and repair them if
necessary.
• After correcting the valve seat, be sure to check the valve
recessing.
1) Correcting Valve
1. Correct the valve with a valve refacer.
Valve face angle
Factory spec.
0.785 rad
45 °
2) Correcting Valve Seat
1. Slightly correct the seat surface with a 0.785 rad (45° ) valve seat
cutter (Code No. 07909-33102).
2. Fitting the valve, check the contact position of the valve face and
seat surface with prussian blue. (Visual check) [ If the valve has
been used for a long period, the seat tends to come in contact
with the upper side of the valve face.]
3. Grind the upper surface of the seat with a 0.262 rad (15°) valve
seat cutter until the valve seat touches to the center of the valve
face (so that (a) equals (b) as shown in the figure).
4. Grind the seat with a 0.785 rad (45°) valve seat cutter again, and
visually recheck the contact between the valve and seat.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until the correct contact is achieved.
6. Continue lapping until the seated rate becomes more than 70 %
of the total contact area.
Valve seat angle
(1)
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
Valve Seat Cutter
Check Contact
Correct Seat Width
Check Contact
Check Contact
Factory spec.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
0.785 rad
45 °
Identical Dimensions
Valve Seat Width
0.26 rad (15°)
0.26 rad (15°)
0.785 rad (45°)
W10319540
Valve Lapping
1. Apply compound evenly to the valve lapping surface.
2. Insert the valve into the valve guide. Lap the valve onto its seat
with a valve flapper or screwdriver.
3. After lapping the valve, wash the compound away and apply oil,
then repeat valve lapping with oil.
4. Apply prussian blue to the contact surface to check the seated
rate. If it is less than 70%, repeat valve lapping again.
n IMPORTANT
• When valve lapping is performed, be sure to check the valve
recessing and adjust the valve clearance after assembling
the valve.
W10309820
1-S35
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Free Length and Tilt of Valve Spring
1. Measure the free length (A) of valve spring with vernier calipers.
If the measurement is less than the allowable limit, replace it.
2. Put the valve spring on a surface plate, place a square on the
side of the valve spring.
3. Check to see if the entire side is in contact with the square.
Rotate the valve spring and measure the maximum tilt (B).
If the measurement exceeds the allowable limit, replace it.
4. Check the entire surface of the valve spring for scratches.
If there is any defect, replace it.
Factory spec.
31.3 to 31.8 mm
1.232 to 1.252 in.
Allowable limit
28.4 mm
1.118 in.
Allowable limit
1.2 mm
0.047 in.
Free length (A)
Tilt (B)
A : Free Length
B : Tilt
W11157830
Valve Spring Setting Load
1. Place the valve spring on a tester and compress it to the same
length it is actually compressed the engine.
2. Read the compression load on the gauge.
3. If the measurement is less than the allowable limit, replace it.
Factory spec.
64.7 N / 27.0 mm
6.6 kgf / 27.0 mm
14.6 lbs / 1.063 in.
Allowable limit
54.9 N / 27.0 mm
5.6 kgf / 27.0 mm
12.3 lbs / 1.063 in.
Setting load /
Setting length
W11177330
Oil Clearance between Rocker Arm and Rocker Arm Shaft
1. Measure the rocker arm shaft O.D. with an outside micrometer.
2. Measure the rocker arm I.D. with an inside micrometer, and then
calculate the oil clearance.
3. If the oil clearance exceeds the allowable limit, replace the rocker
arm and measure the oil clearance again. If it still exceeds the
allowable limit, replace also the rocker arm shaft.
Oil clearance between
rocker arm and rocker
arm shaft
Factory spec.
0.016 to 0.045 mm
0.00063 to 0.00177 in.
Allowable limit
0.15 mm
0.0059 in.
Rocker arm shaft O.D.
Factory spec.
10.473 to 10.484 mm
0.41232 to 0.41276 in.
Rocker arm I.D.
Factory spec.
10.500 to 10.518 mm
0.41339 to 0.41410 in.
W11199710
1-S36
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Push Rod Alignment
1. Place the push rod on V blocks.
2. Measure the push rod alignment.
3. If the measurement exceeds the allowable limit, replace the push
rod.
Push rod runout
Allowable limit
0.25 mm
0.0098 in.
W11220210
Oil Clearance between Tappet and Tappet Guide Bore
1. Measure the tappet O.D. with an outside micrometer.
2. Measure the I.D. of the tappet guide bore with a cylinder gauge,
and calculate the oil clearance.
3. If the oil clearance exceeds the allowable limit or the tappet is
damaged, replace the tappet.
tappet and tappet guide
bore
Factory spec.
0.016 to 0.052 mm
0.00063 to 0.00205 in.
Allowable limit
0.10 mm
0.0039 in.
Tappet O.D.
Factory spec.
17.966 to 17.984 mm
0.70732 to 0.70803 in.
Tappet guide bore I.D.
Factory spec.
18.000 to 18.018 mm
0.70866 to 0.70937 in.
W11231410
(B) Timing Gears, Camshaft and Fuel Camshaft
Timing Gear Backlash
1. Set a dial indicator (lever type) with its tip on the gear tooth.
2. Move the gear to measure the backlash, holding its mating gear.
3. If the backlash exceeds the allowable limit, check the oil
clearance of the shaft and the gear.
4. If the oil clearance is not proper, replace the gear.
Factory spec.
0.043 to 0.124 mm
0.00169 to 0.00488 in.
Allowable limit
0.15 mm
0.0059 in.
Factory spec.
0.047 to 0.123 mm
0.00185 to 0.00484 in.
Allowable limit
0.15 mm
0.0059 in.
Backlash between idle
gear and injection pump
gear
Factory spec.
0.046 to 0.124 mm
0.00181 to 0.00488 in.
Allowable limit
0.15 mm
0.0059 in.
Backlash between oil
pump drive gear and
crank gear
Factory spec.
0.041 to 0.123 mm
0.00161 to 0.00484 in.
Allowable limit
0.15 mm
0.0059 in.
gear and crank gear
gear and cam gear
W11264830
1-S37
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Idle Gear Side Clearance
1. Set a dial indicator with its tip on the idle gear.
2. Measure the side clearance by moving the idle gear to the front
and rear.
3. If the measurement exceeds the allowable limit, replace the idle
gear collar.
Factory spec.
0.20 to 0.51 mm
0.0079 to 0.0201 in.
Allowable limit
0.80 mm
0.0315 in.
Idle gear side clearance
W11286770
Camshaft Side Clearance
1. Set a dial indicator with its tip on the camshaft.
2. Measure the side clearance by moving the cam gear to the font
and rear.
camshaft stopper.
Camshaft side
clearance
Factory spec.
0.15 to 0.31 mm
0.0059 to 0.0122 in.
Allowable limit
0.50 mm
0.0197 in.
W11299720
Camshaft Alignment
1. Support the camshaft with V blocks on the surface plate at both
end journals.
2. Set a dial indicator with its tip on the intermediate journal.
3. Measure the camshaft alignment.
camshaft.
Camshaft runout
Allowable limit
0.01 mm
0.0004 in.
W11312720
Cam Height
1. Measure the height of the cam at its highest point with an outside
micrometer.
2. If the measurement is less than the allowable limit, replace the
camshaft.
Cam height of intake
and exhaust
Factory spec.
26.88 mm
1.0583 in.
Allowable limit
26.83 mm
1.0563 in.
W11324040
1-S38
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Oil Clearance of Camshaft Journal
1. Measure the camshaft journal O.D. with an outside micrometer.
2. Measure the cylinder block bore I.D. for camshaft with a inside
micrometer, and calculate the oil clearance.
3. If the oil clearance exceeds the allowable limit, replace the
camshaft.
Factory spec.
0.050 to 0.091 mm
0.00197 to 0.00358 in.
Allowable limit
0.15 mm
0.0059 in.
Camshaft journal O.D.
Factory spec.
32.934 to 32.950 mm
1.29661 to 1.29724 in.
Camshaft Bearing I.D.
(Cylinder block bore
I.D.)
Factory spec.
33.000 to 33.025 mm
1.29921 to 1.30020 in.
Oil clearance of
camshaft journal
W11335580
Oil Clearance between Idle Gear Shaft and Idle Gear Bushing
1. Measure the idle gear shaft O.D. with an outside micrometer.
2. Measure the idle gear bushing I.D. with an inside micrometer,
bushing.
If it still exceeds the allowable limit, replace the idle gear shaft.
idle gear shaft and idle
gear bushing
Factory spec.
0.020 to 0.084 mm
0.00079 to 0.00331 in.
Allowable limit
0.10 mm
0.0039 in.
Idle gear shaft O.D.
Factory spec.
19.967 to 19.980 mm
0.78610 to 0.78661 in.
Idle gear bushing I.D.
Factory spec.
20.000 to 20.051 mm
0.78740 to 0.78941 in.
W11356150
Replacing Idle Gear Bushing
(When removing)
1. Press out the used idle gear bushing using an idle gear bushing
replacing tool. (Refer to “SPECIAL TOOLS”.)
(When installing)
1. Clean a new idle gear bushing and idle gear bore, and apply
engine oil to them.
2. Press in a new brushing using an idle gear bushing replacing
tool, until it is flush with the end of the idle gear.
(A) When Removing
(B) When Installing
W11373220
1-S39
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
(C) Piston and Connecting Rod
Piston Pin Bore I.D.
1. Measure the piston pin bore I.D. in both the horizontal and
vertical directions with a cylinder gauge.
piston.
Factory spec.
20.000 to 20.013 mm
0.78740 to 0.78791 in.
Allowable limit
20.05 mm
0.7894 in.
Piston pin bore I.D.
W11406200
Oil Clearance between Piton Pin and Small End Bushing
1. Measure the piston pin O.D. where it contacts the bushing with
an outside micrometer.
2. Measure the small end bushing I.D. with an inside micrometer,
bushing. If it still exceeds the allowable limit, replace the piston
pin.
piston pin and small end
bushing
Factory spec.
0.014 to 0.038 mm
0.00055 to 0.00150 in.
Allowable limit
0.10 mm
0.0039 in.
Piston pin O.D.
Factory spec.
20.002 to 20.011 mm
0.78748 to 0.78783 in.
Small end bushing I.D.
Factory spec.
20.025 to 20.040 mm
0.78839 to 0.78897 in.
W11420110
Replacing Small End Bushing
(When removing)
1. Press out the used bushing using a small end bushing replacing
tool. (Refer to “SPECIAL TOOLS”)
(When installing)
1. Clean a new small end bushing and small end hole, and apply
and engine oil to them.
2. Using a small end bushig replacing tool, press in a new bushing
(service parts) taking due care to see that the connecting rod hole
matches the bushing hole.
[Servicing parts dimension]
piston pin and small end
bushing (Spare parts)
Small end bushing I.D.
(Spare parts)
(1) Seam
(2) Oil Hole
Factory spec.
0.015 to 0.075 mm
0.00059 to 0.00295 in.
Allowable limit
0.15 mm
0.0059 in.
Factory spec.
20.026 to 20.077 mm
0.78843 to 0.79043 in.
(A) When Removing
(B) When Installing
(a) 0.785 rad (45°)
W11437590
1-S40
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Piston Ring Gap
1. Insert the piston ring into the lower part of the cylinder (the least
worn out part) with a piston ring compressor and piston.
2. Measure the ring gap with a feeler gauge.
piston ring.
Top ring
Piston ring gap
Second ring
Oil ring
Factory
spec.
0.15 to 0.30 mm
0.0059 to 0.0118 in.
Allowable
limit
1.20 mm
0.0472 in.
Factory
spec.
0.30 to 0.45 mm
0.0118 to 0.0177 in.
Allowable
limit
1.20 mm
0.0472 in.
Factory
spec.
0.15 to 0.30 mm
0.0059 to 0.0118 in.
Allowable
limit
1.20 mm
0.0472 in.
W11466710
Clearance between Piston Ring and Piston Ring Groove
1. Clean the rings and the ring grooves, and install each ring in its
groove.
2. Measure the clearance between the ring and the groove with a
feeler gauge.
3. If the clearance exceeds the allowable limit, replace the piston
ring.
4. If the clearance still exceeds the allowable limit after replacing the
ring, replace the piston.
Second ring
Clearance between
piston ring and
piston ring groove
Oil ring
Factory
spec.
0.090 to 0.120 mm
0.00354 to 0.00472 in.
Allowable
limit
0.15 mm
0.0059 in.
Factory
spec.
0.04 to 0.08 mm
0.0016 to 0.0031 in.
Allowable
limit
0.15 mm
0.0059 in.
W11485500
Connecting Rod Alignment
n NOTE
• Since the I.D. of the connecting rod small end bushing is the
basis of this check, check the bushing for wear beforehand.
1. Remove the crankpin bearing, and install the connecting rod cap.
2. Install the piston pin in the connecting rod.
3. Install the connecting rod on the connecting rod alignment tool
(Code No. 07909-31661).
4. Put a gauge over the piston pin, and move it against the face
plate.
5. If the gauge does not fit squarely against the face plate, measure
the space between the pin of the gauge and the face plate.
connecting rod.
Space between gauge
pin and face plate
Allowable limit
0.05 mm
0.0020 in.
W11499650
1-S41
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Crankshaft Side Clearance
1. Set a dial indicator with its tip on the end of the crankshaft.
2. Measure the side clearance by moving the crankshaft to the front
and rear.
thrust bearings.
4. If the same size bearing is useless because of the crankshaft
journal wear, replace it with an oversize one referring to the table
and figure.
Crankshaft side
clearance
Factory spec.
0.15 to 0.31 mm
0.0059 to 0.0122 in.
Allowable limit
0.50 mm
0.0197 in.
(Reference)
• Oversize main bearing case assembly
Oversize
Bearing
Code Number
Marking
0.2 mm
0.008 in.
Thrust bearing 1 02
15261-23950
020 OS
Thrust bearing 2 02
15261-23970
020 OS
0.4 mm
0.016 in.
Thrust bearing 1 04
15261-23960
040 OS
Thrust bearing 2 04
15261-23980
040 OS
• Oversize dimensions of crankshaft journal
Oversize
0.2 mm
0.008 in.
0.4 mm
0.016 in.
Dimension A
23.40 to 23.45 mm
0.9213 to 0.9232 in.
23.80 to 23.85 mm
0.9370 to 0.9390 in.
Dimension B
46.1 to 46.3 mm
1.815 to 1.823 in.
46.3 to 46.5 mm
1.823 to 1.831 in.
Dimension C
1.8 to 2.2 mm radius
0.071 to 0.087 in. radius
0.071 to 0.087 in. radius
(0.8-S)
The crankshaft journal must be fine-finished to higher than ∇∇∇∇
W11586190
Crankshaft Alignment
1. Support the crankshaft with V blocks on the surface plate at both
end journals.
2. Set a dial indicator with its tip on the intermediate journal.
3. Measure the crankshaft alignment.
crankshaft.
Crankshaft alignment
Allowable limit
0.02 mm
0.0008 in.
W11613530
1-S42
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Oil Clearance between Crankpin and Crankpin Bearing
1. Clean the crankpin and crankpin bearing.
2. Put a strip of plastigage (Code No.: 07909-30241) on the center
of the crankpin.
3. Install the connecting rod cap and tighten the connecting rod
screws to the specified torque, and remove the cap again.
4. Measure the amount of the flattening with the scale, and get the
oil clearance.
crankpin bearing.
6. If the same size bearing is useless because of the crankpin wear,
replace it with an undersize one referring to the table and figure.
n NOTE
• Never insert the plastigage into the crankpin oil hole.
• Be sure not to move the crankshaft while the connecting rod
screws are tightened.
crankpin and crankpin
bearing
Factory spec.
0.020 to 0.051mm
0.00079 to 0.00201 in.
Allowable limit
0.15 mm
0.0059 in.
Crankpin O.D.
Factory spec.
33.959 to 33.975 mm
1.33697 to 1.33760 in.
Crankpin bearing I.D.
Factory spec.
33.995 to 34.010 mm
1.33840 to 1.33898 in.
(Reference)
• Undersize crankpin crankpin
Undersize
Bearing
Code Number
Marking
0.2 mm
0.008 in.
Crankpin bearing 02
15861-22970
020 US
0.4 mm
0.016 in.
Crankpin bearing 04
15861-20980
040 US
• Undersize dimensions of crankpin
0.2 mm
0.008 in.
0.4 mm
0.016 in.
Dimension A
0.091 to 0.106 in.radius
Dimension B
4.0 mm dia.
0.16 in. dia.
4.0 mm dia.
0.16 in. dia
Dimension C
39.759 to 39.775 mm dia.
1.32910 to 1.32973 in. dia.
33.559 to 33.575 mm dia.
1.32122 to 1.32185 in. dia.
Undersize
(0.8-S)
W11625390
1-S43
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Bearing 1
1. Measure the O.D. of the crankshaft front journal with an outside
micrometer.
2. Measure the I.D. of the crankshaft bearing 1 with an inside
micrometer, and calculate the oil clearance.
crankshaft bearing 1.
journal wear, replace it with an undersize one referring to the
table and the figure.
Oil Clearance between
crankshaft journal and
crankshaft bearing 1
Factory spec.
0.034 to 0.106 mm
0.00134 to 0.00417 in.
Allowable limit
0.20 mm
0.0079 in.
Crankshaft journal O.D.
Factory spec.
39.934 to 39.950 mm
1.57221 to 1.57284 in.
Crankshaft bearing 1 I.D.
Factory spec.
39.984 to 40.040 mm
1.57417 to 1.57638 in.
(Reference)
• Undersize crankshaft bearing 1
Undersize
Bearing
Code Number
Marking
0.2 mm
0.008 in.
Crankshaft bearing 1 02
15861-23911
020 US
0.4 mm
0.016 in.
15861-23921
040 US
• Undersize dimensions of crankshaft journal
0.2 mm
0.008 in.
0.4 mm
0.016 in.
Dimension A
Dimension B
5.0 mm dia.
0.20 in. dia.
5.0 mm dia.
0.20 in. dia
Dimension C
39.734 to 39.750 mm dia.
1.56433 to 1.56496 in. dia.
39.534 to 39.550 mm dia.
1.55646 to 1.55709 in. dia.
Undersize
(0.8-S)
W10323470
Replacing Crankshaft Bearing 1
(When removing)
1. Press out the used crankshaft bearing 1 using a crankshaft
bearing 1 replacing tool. (Refer to “SPECIAL TOOLS”.)
(When installing)
1. Clean a new crankshaft bearing 1 and crankshaft journal bore,
and apply engine oil to them.
2. Using a crankshaft bearing 1 replacing tool, press in a new
bearing 1 (2) so that its seam (1) directs toward the exhaust
manifold side. (See figure)
Dimension (A)
(1) Seam
(2) Crankshaft Bearing 1
Factory spec.
0.0 to 0.3 mm
0.0 to 0.0118 in.
(3) Cylinder Block
W10342000
1-S44
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Bearing 2 and Crankshaft Bearing 3
1. Put a strip of plastigage (Code No. 07909-30241) on the center
of the journal.
2. Install the bearing case and tighten the bearing case screws 1 to
the specified torque, and remove the bearing case again.
3. Measure the amount of the flattening with the scale, and get the
oil clearance.
crankshaft bearing 2 or 3.
journal wear, replace it with an undersize one referring to the
table and figure.
n NOTE
• Be sure not to move the crankshaft while the bearing case
screws are tightened.
Factory spec.
0.028 to 0.059 mm
0.0011 to 0.0023 in.
Allowable limit
0.20 mm
0.0079 in.
(Intermediate)
Factory spec.
39.934 to 39.950 mm
1.57221 to 1.57284 in.
Factory spec.
39.978 to 39.993 mm
1.57394 to 1.57453 in.
(Flywheel side)
Factory spec.
43.934 to 43.950 mm
1.72968 to 1.73031 in.
Factory spec.
43.978 to 43.993 mm
1.73142 to 1.73201 in.
crankshaft journal and
crankshaft bearing 2 and
crankshaft bearing 3
(Reference)
• Undersize crankshaft bearing 2 and 3
Undersize
Bearing
Code Number
Marking
15694-23931
020 US
0.2 mm
0.008 in.
15861-23861
020 US
0.4 mm
0.016 in.
15694-23941
040 US
15861-23871
040 US
• Undersize dimensions of crankshaft journal
0.2 mm
0.008 in.
0.4 mm
0.016 in.
Dimension A
Dimension B
3.0 mm dia.
0.12 in. dia.
3.0 mm dia.
0.12 in. dia.
Dimension C
39.734 to 39.750 mm
1.56433 to 1.56496 in.
39.534 to 39.550 mm
1.55646 to 1.55709 in.
Dimension D
43.734 to 43.750 mm
1.72181 to 1.72244 in.
43.534 to 43.550 mm
1.71394 to 1.71457 in.
Undersize
(0.8-S)
W10344030
1-S45
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Cylinder Wear
1. Measure the cylinder liner I.D. at the six positions (see figure)
with a cylinder gauge to find the maximum and minimum I.D.’s.
2. Get the difference (Maximum wear) between the maximum and
the minimum I.D.’s.
3. If the wear exceeds the allowable limit, bore and hone to the
oversize dimension. (Refer to “Correcting Cylinder”.)
4. Visually check the cylinder wall for scratches. If deep scratches
are found, the cylinder should be bored. (Refer to “Correcting
Cylinder”.)
Cylinder liner I.D.
Factory spec.
67.000 to 67.019 mm
2.63779 to 2.63854 in.
Maximum wear
Allowable limit
67.169 mm
2.64445 in.
(A) Top
(B) Middle
(C) Bottom (Skirt)
(a) Right-angled to Piston Pin
(b) Piston Pin Direction
W10360060
Correcting Cylinder
1. When the cylinder is worn beyond the allowable limit, bore and
hone it to the specified dimension.
Cylinder liner I.D.
Factory spec.
67.250 to 67.269 mm
2.64764 to 2.64839 in.
Maximum wear
Allowable limit
67.419 mm
2.65429 in.
Hone to 1.2 to 2.0 mR max.
Finishing
(0.000047 to 0.0079 in.R max.)
2. Replace the piston and piston rings with oversize ones.
Oversize
0.25 mm
0.0098 in.
Part Name
Code Number
Marking
Piston
1E051-21901
025 OS
Piston ring assembly
16853-21091
025 OS
n NOTE
• When the oversize cylinder is worn beyond the allowable
limit, replace the cylinder block with a new one.
(1) Cylinder I.D. (Before Correction)
(2) Oversized Cylinder I.D.
W10367470
1-S46
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
[3] LUBRICATING SYSTEM
(1) Checking
Engine Oil Pressure
1. Remove the engine oil pressure switch, and set a oil pressure
tester (Code No. 07916-32032). (Adapter screw size : PT 1/8)
2. Start the engine. After warming up, measure the oil pressure of
both idling and rated speeds.
3. If the oil pressure is less than the allowable limit, check the
following.
• Engine oil insufficient
• Oil pump defective
• Oil strainer clogged
• Oil filter cartridge clogged
• Oil gallery clogged
• Excessive oil clearance
• Foreign matter in the relief valve
At idle
speed
Engine oil
pressure
Factory spec.
More than 98 kPa
1.0 kgf/cm2
14 psi
Factory spec.
196 to 441 kPa
2.0 to 4.5 kgf/cm2
28 to 64 psi
Allowable limit
147 kPa
1.5 kgf/cm2
21 psi
At rated
speed
(When reassembling)
• After checking the engine oil pressure, tighten the engine oil
pressure switch to the specified torque.
Tightening torque
Oil switch
14.7 to 19.6 N·m
1.5 to 2.0 kgf·m
10.8 to 14.5 ft-lbs
W10373890
(2) Servicing
Rotor Lobe Clearance
1. Measure the clearance between lobes of the inner rotor and the
outer rotor with a feeler gauge.
2. If the clearance exceeds the factory specifications, replace the oil
pump rotor assembly.
Rotor lobe clearance
Factory spec.
0.03 to 0.14 mm
0.0012 to 0.0055 in.
W10378950
Clearance between Outer Rotor and Pump Body
1. Measure the clearance between the outer rotor and the pump
body with a feeler gauge.
2. If the clearance exceeds the factory specifications, replace the oil
Clearance between
outer rotor and pump
body
Factory spec.
0.07 to 0.15 mm
0.0028 to 0.0059 in.
W10381420
1-S47
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Clearance between Rotor and Cover
1. Put a strip of plastigage (Code No. 07909-30241) onto the rotor
face with grease.
2. Install the cover and tighten the screws.
3. Remove the cover carefully, and measure the amount of the
flattening with the scale and get the clearance.
4. If the clearance exceeds the factory specifications, replace oil
Clearance between rotor
and cover
Factory spec.
0.075 to 0.135 mm
0.00295 to 0.00531 in.
W10382660
1-S48
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
[4] COOLING SYSTEM
(A) Fan Belt
Fan Belt Tension
1. Measure the deflection (A), depressing the belt halfway between
the fan drive pulley and alternator pulley at specified force (98 N,
10 kgf, 22 lbs).
2. If the measurement is not within the factory specifications, loosen
the alternator mounting screws and relocate the alternator to
adjust.
Deflection (A)
Factory spec.
Appox. 10 mm
0.4 in.
(A) Deflection
W10384280
Fan Belt Damage and Wear
1. Check the fan belt for damage.
2. If the fan belt is damaged, replace it.
3. Check if the fan belt is worn and sunk in the pulley groove.
4. If the fan belt is nearly worn out and deeply sunk in the pulley
groove, replace it.
(A) Good
(B) Bad
W10385490
1-S49
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
(B) Radiator
CAUTION
• When removing the radiator cap, wait at least ten minutes after the engine has stopped and cooled down.
Otherwise, hot water may gush out, scalding nearby people.
Radiator Water Leakage
1. Pour a specified amount of water into the radiator.
2. Set a radiator tester (1) (Code No. 07909-31551) and an adapter
(2) (BANZAI Code No.RCT-2A-30S) and raise the water
pressure to the specified pressure.
3. Check the radiator for water leaks.
4. For water leak from the pinhole, repair with the radiator cement.
When water leak is excessive, replace the radiator.
Radiator water leakage
test pressure
(1) Radiator Tester
Factory spec.
132 kPa
1.3 kgf/cm2
19 psi
(2) Adaptor
W10387530
Radiator Cap Air Leakage
1. Set a radiator tester (Code No. 07909-31551) and adaptor (2)
(BANZAI Code No.RCT-2A-30S) on the radiator cap.
2. Apply the specified pressure (88 kPA, 0.9 kgf/cm2, 13 psi), and
measure the time for the pressure to fall to 59 kPa (0.6 kgf/cm2,
9 psi).
3. If the measurement is less than the factory specification, replace
the radiator cap.
Pressure falling time
(1) Radiator Tester
Factory spec.
More than 10 seconds
for pressure fall from
88 to 59 kPa
(from 0.9 to 0.6 kgf/cm2,
from 13 to 9 psi)
(2) Adaptor
W1054156
(C) Thermostat
Thermostat Valve Opening Temperature
1. Suspend the thermostat in the water by a string with its end
inserted between the valve and seat.
2. Heating the water gradually, read the temperature when the
valve opens and leaves the string.
3. Continue heating and read the temperature when the valve
opens approx. 8 mm (0.315 in.).
4. If the measurement is not within the factory specifications,
replace the thermostat.
Thermostat’s valve
opening temperature
Factory spec.
69.5 to 72.5 °C
157.1 to 162.5 °F
Temperature at which
thermostat completely
opens
Factory spec.
85 °C
185 °F
W10390350
1-S50
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Thermostat Assembly
1. Remove the thermostat cover mounting screws (1), and remove
the thermostat cover (2).
2. Remove the thermostat assembly (4).
(When reassembling)
• Apply a liquid gasket (Three Bond 1215 or equivalent) to both
side of the gasket (3).
(1) Thermostat Cover Mounting Screw
(2) Thermostat Cover
(3) Thermostat Cover Gasket
(4) Thermostat Assembly
W10393690
Water Pump Assembly
1. Loosen the alternator mounting bolts, and remove the fan belt.
2. Remove the fan and fan pulley.
3. Remove the water pump assembly from the gear case cover.
4. Remove the water pump flange (1).
5. Press out the water pump shaft (2) with the impeller (5) on it.
6. Remove the impeller from the water pump shaft (2).
7. Remove the mechanical seal (4).
(When reassembling)
• Apply a liquid gasket (Three Bond 1215 or equivalent) to the both
sides of gasket.
• Replace the mechanical seal with new one.
(1) Water Pump Flange
(2) Water Pump Shaft
(3) Water Pump Body
(4) Mechanical Seal
(5) Impeller
W10395040
1-S51
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
[5] FUEL SYSTEM
(A) Injection Pump
Injection Timing
1. Remove the bonnet and air cleaner.
2. Remove the muffler.
3. Remove the injection pipes and glow plugs.
4. Engage the parking brake.
5. Set the throttle lever to the maximum engine speed.
6. Turn on the key switch.
7. Turn the flywheel counterclockwise (facing the flywheel) until fuel
flows from the delivery valve holder (3).
8. Continue to turn the flywheel slowly, and stop it as soon as the
fuel level at the tip of the delivery valve holder begins to increase.
9. Check to see if the timing angle lines on the flywheel is aligned
with the alignment mark (2).
10.If the injection timing is out of adjustment, readjust the timing with
shims (4).
Injection timing
Factory spec.
0.28 to 0.31 rad
(16° to 18°) before T.D.C.
n NOTE
• The sealant is applied to both sides of the shim (soft metal
gasket shim).
The liquid gasket is not required for
assembling.
• Shims are available in thickness of 0.20 mm (0.0079 in.), 0.25
mm (0.0098 in.) and 0.30 mm (0.0118 in.). Combine these
shims for adjustments.
• Addition or reduction of shim (0.05 mm, 0.0020 in.) delays or
advances the injection timing by approx. 0.0087 rad (0.5 °).
• In disassembling and replacing the injection pump, be sure
to use the same number of new shims with the same
thickness.
• Refer to figure left to check the thickness of the shims.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Timing Line
(5) Shim with Two-holes : 0.20 mm
Alignment Mark (on Rear End Plate)
(0.0079 in.)
Delivery Valve Holder
(6) Shim with One-hole : 0.25 mm
Shim
(0.0098 in.)
(7) Shim with No hole : 0.30 mm
(0.0118 in.)
(8) Rear End Plate
W10397720
1-S52
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Fuel Tightness of Pump Element
3. Disconnect the accelerator wire.
4. Remove the air cleaner stay.
6. Install the air cleaner stay.
7. Connect the accelerator wire.
8. Install the injection pump pressure tester to the fuel injection
pump.
9. Set the speed control lever to the maximum speed position.
10.Turn the flywheel ten times or more to increase the pressure.
11.If the pressure can not reach the allowable limit, replace the
pump element or injection pump assembly.
Fuel tightness of pump
element
Allowable limit
13.73 MPa
140 kgf/cm2
1991 psi
n NOTE
• Apply a liquid gasket (Three Bond 1215 or equivalent) to
both sides of the solenoid cover gasket.
W10401760
Fuel Tightness of Delivery Valve
4. Install the injection pump pressure tester to the fuel injection
pump.
5. Set the throttle lever to the maximum engine speed.
6. Turn the flywheel and raise the pressure to approx. 13.73 MPa
(140 kgf/cm2, 1991 psi).
7. Now turn the flywheel back about half a turn (to keep the plunger
free). Maintain the flywheel at this position.
8. Clock the time needed to decrease the pressure from 13.73 to
12.75 MPa (from 140 to 130 kgf/cm2, from 2130 to 1990 psi).
9. If the measurement is less than allowable limit, replace the
delivery valve.
Factory spec.
10 seconds
13.73 → 12.75 MPa
140 → 130 kgf/cm2
1991 → 1849 psi
Allowable limit
5 seconds
13.73 → 12.75 MPa
140 → 130 kgf/cm2
1991 → 1849 psi
Fuel tightness of
delivery valve
W10403300
1-S53
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
(B) Injection Nozzle
CAUTION
• Check the injection pressure and condition after confirming that there is nobody standing in the direction
the fume goes.
If the fume from the nozzle directly contacts the human body, cells may be destroyed and blood poisoning
may be caused.
Nozzle Spraying Condition
1. Set the injection nozzle to a nozzle tester (Code No. 0790931361), and check the nozzle spraying condition.
2. If the spraying condition is defective, replace the nozzle piece.
(a) Good
(b) Bad
W10411400
Fuel Injection Pressure
1. Set the injection nozzle to a nozzle tester (Code No. 0790931361).
2. Slowly move the tester handle to measure the pressure at which
fuel begins to jet out from the nozzle.
replace the adjusting washer (1) in the nozzle holder to adjust it.
Fuel injection pressure
Factory spec.
13.73 to 14.71 MPa
140 to 150 kgf/cm2
1990 to 2130 psi
(Reference)
• Pressure varies approx. 235 kPa (2.4 kgf/cm2, 34 psi) with 0.01
mm (0.004 in.) difference of adjusting washer thickness.
(1) Adjusting Washer
W10408820
Valve Seat Tightness
1. Set the injection nozzle to a nozzle tester (Code No. 0790931361).
2. Raise the fuel pressure, and keep at 12.75 MPa (130 kgf/cm2,
1849 psi) for 10 seconds.
3. If any fuel leak is found, replace the nozzle piece.
Valve seat tightness
Factory spec.
No fuel leak at
12.75 MPa
130 kgf/cm2
1849 psi
W10412730
1-S54
ENGINE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
(A) Injection Nozzle
Nozzle Holder
1. Secure the nozzle retaining nut (7) with a vise.
2. Remove the nozzle holder (1), and take out parts inside.
(When reassembling)
• Assemble the nozzle in clean fuel oil.
• Install the push rod (4), noting its direction.
• After assembling the nozzle, be sure to adjust the fuel injection
pressure.
Tightening torque
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Nozzle Holder
Adjusting Washer
Nozzle Spring
Push Rod
Nozzle holder
34.3 to 39.2 N·m
3.5 to 4.0 kgf·m
25.3 to 28.9 ft-lbs
Overflow pipe nut
19.6 to 24.5 N·m
2.0 to 2.5 kgf·m
14.5 to 18.1 ft-lbs
49.0 to 68.6 N·m
5.0 to 7.0 kgf·m
36.2 to 50.6 ft-lbs
(5) Distance Piece
(6) Nozzle Piece
(7) Nozzle Retaining Nut
W10415210
1-S55
2
TRANSMISSION AND REAR AXLE
MECHANISM
CONTENTS
1. STRUCTURE ................................................................................................. 2-M1
2. HYDROSTATIC TRANSMISSION ................................................................ 2-M2
[1] STRUCTURE ........................................................................................... 2-M2
[2] OIL FLOW ............................................................................................... 2-M3
[3] BY-PASS VALVE ..................................................................................... 2-M4
[4] CHARGE PUMP ..................................................................................... 2-M5
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
1. STRUCTURE
(1) Hydrostatic Transmission
Section
(2) Gear Section
(3) Rear Axle Section
(4) Differential Gear Section
W1013364
2-M1
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
2. HYDROSTATIC TRANSMISSION
[1] STRUCTURE
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Charge Relief Valve
Charge Pump Housing
Charge Pump Spacer
Gerotor
Check Valve
Center Section
Needle Bearing
(8) Cylinder Block (Pump)
(9) Piston Assembly
(10) Thrust Plate
(11) Thrust Roller Bearing
(12) Thrust Washer
(13) Swashplate
(14) Cradle Bearing
(15) Housing
(16) Needle Bearing
(17) By-pass Valve
(18) Needle Bearing
(19) Check Valve
(20) Cylinder Block (Motor)
(21) Piston Assembly
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
Motor Shaft
Needle Bearing
Thrust Ball Bearing
Slot Guide
Trunnion Arm
Journal Bearing
Pump Shaft
The hydrostatic transmission consists of a variable displacement piston pump and a fixed displacement piston
motor.
A fan is used to cool the hydrostatic transmission, eliminating the need for an oil cooler.
Convenient single lever control permits simple operation of the machine, starting, stopping, increasing or
decreasing speeds, changing direction of travel, and even going up or down hills.
As for operation of the hydrostatic transmission, refer to Workshop Manual for G1700 · G1800 · G1900 · G2000
(Code No.97897-10835).
W1013294
2-M2
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
[2] OIL FLOW
(1) Drain Hose
(2) Rear Axle Case
(3) Control Valve
(4) Oil Filter Cartridge
(5) Control Valve Adaptor
(6) Drain Hose
(7) Rear Axle Case
(8) Suction Pipe
(9) Drain Pipe
1. When the engine is started, the charge pump is rotated to suck oil from the transmission case through the suction
pipe (8).
2. When the oil is sucked, it is filtered by the oil strainer.
3. Filtered oil is forced out by the charge pump to the control valve through the control valve adaptor (5).
4. With the control valve (3) in neutral position, the oil is delivered to the hydrostatic transmission through the control
valve adaptor (5) and oil filter cartridge (4).
5. The oil used to charge a leak of the closed circuit in the hydrostatic transmission.
6. A portion of oil is drained into the rear axle cases (2), (7) through drain pipe (9) and drain hoses (1), (6) after flushing
and cooling the cylinder blocks.
W1013278
2-M3
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
[3] BY-PASS VALVE
(1) Center Section
(2) Pump Shaft
(3) Check Valve
(4) Motor Shaft
(5) By-Pass Valve
(6) Check Valve
(7) Orifice
(8) Orifice
The by-pass valve (5) is used to connect the two sides of the closed loop in the center section (1).
The motor shaft (4) does not rotate when the engine is stopped or pump is not driven. This means the machine
usually can not be moved by pushing.
If moving the machine by pushing is desired, depress the by pass valve to connect the two sides of the loop and
defeat the dynamic braking feature.
However, this hydrostatic transmission is equipped with a means of slightly by-passing higher and lower pressures
all the time from the orifice (7), (8) of the check valve (3), (6).
Without having to open the by-pass valve (5), therefore, the machine can be moved by pushing.
W1013630
2-M4
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
[4] CHARGE PUMP
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Charge Relief Valve
Charge Pump Housing
O-ring
Charge Pump Spacer
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
O-ring
Gerotor
Dowel Pin
Center Section
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
Needle Bearing
Internal Snap Ring
Oil Seal
Needle Bearing
(13) Dowel Pin
(14) Drive Pin
(15) Pump Shaft
The charge pump is necessary to make up for leakage from the pump and motor, preventing cavitation.
This charge pump always revolves in combination with the pump shaft to draw oil from the transmission case, and
feeds oil to the implement lifting circuit and charge circuit.
[Charge Pump Displacement]
Displacement
Engine speed
Oil pressure
Oil temperature
Approx. 50 °C
3.43 MPa
2.8 to 5.0 L/min.
122 °F
35 kgf/cm2
3.0 to 5.4 U.S.qts./min.
1800 min-1 (rpm)
498 psi
2.4 to 4.49 lmp.qts./min.
As for charge circuit of the charge pump, refer to Workshop Manual for G1700 · G1800 · G1900 · G2000 (code No.
97897-10834).
[Charge Relief Valve]
Engine speed
Oil temperature
1800 min-1 (rpm)
Approx. 50 °C
122 °F
Valve operating
pressure
0.32 to 0.4 MPa
3.3 to 4.2 kgf/cm2
47 to 60 psi
W1014384
2-M5
SERVICING
CONTENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................................................................2-S1
SERVICING SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................................2-S2
TIGHTENING TORQUES ..............................................................................2-S3
CHECKING, DISASSEMBLING AND SERVICING......................................2-S4
[1] CHECKING AND ADJUSTING ...............................................................2-S4
[2] DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING..................................................2-S6
(1) Separating Transmission ...................................................................2-S6
(2) Separating Hydrostatic Transmission .............................................2-S13
(3) Separating Transmission ..................................................................2-S14
(4) Disassembling Transmission ............................................................2-S15
(5) Disassembling Rear Axle ..................................................................2-S20
(6) Disassembling Differential Gear Case ..............................................2-S21
[3] SERVICING ............................................................................................2-S22
(1) Hydostatic Transmission ...................................................................2-S22
(2) Transmission.....................................................................................2-S24
(3) Differential Gear ................................................................................2-S24
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
1. TROUBLESHOOTING
HYDROSTATIC TRANSMISSION
Solution
Reference
Page
Insufficient transmission fluid
Fill oil to proper level
G-7, G-34
Defective control linkage
Repair or replace
Improper brake setting
Readjust
3-S4
Defective hydrostatic transmission
Replace
2-S13
Repair or replace
Readjust
3-S4
Clean
G-35
Transmission oil filter clogged
Replace
G-22
Air entering from suction pipe
Retighten
2-S13
Replace
2-S13
Defective cooling fan
Replace
–
Readjust
3-S4
Oil strainer cloggedClean
Clean
G-35
Transmission oil filter clogged
Replace
G-22
Defective charge pump
Replace
2-S15
Replace
2-S13
Machine Will Not
Stop in Neutral
Position
Repair or replace
Improper speed change rod adjustment
Readjust
2-S4
Improper “NEUTRAL” adjustment
Readjust
2-S4
Noise From
Transmission
Defective gear or bearing
Replace
2-S14
Improper backlash between 11T bevel gear and
20T bevel gear
Readjust
2-S25
Improper backlash between differential pinion
and differential side gear
Readjust
2-S25
Symptom
Machine Will Not
Operate in Either
Direction
Hydrostatic
Transmission is
Jerky when starting
Transmission
Overheats or Loses
Power
Probable Cause
–
G-7, G-34
–
G-7, G-34
–
G-7, G-34
W1014322
2-S1
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Item
Allowable Limit
0.32 to 0.41 MPa
3.3 to 4.2 kgf/cm2
47 to 60 psi
–
4.5 L
4.75 U.S.qts.
3.86 lmp.qts.
–
Charge Relief Valve
Setting pressure
Transmission Fluid
(Including HST and Cylinder)
Capacity
Differential Case to Differential Side Gear
Clearance
0.040 to 0.082 mm
0.00157 to 0.00323 in.
0.17 mm
0.0067 in.
Differential Case
I.D.
26.000 to 26.021 mm
1.02362 to 1.02445 in.
–
Differential Side Gear
O.D.
25.939 to 25.960 mm
1.02122 to 1.02205 in.
–
Clearance
0.025 to 0.055 mm
0.00098 to 0.00216 in.
0.10 mm
0.0039 in.
Differential Pinion Shaft
O.D.
9.960 to 9.975 mm
0.39213 to 0.39272 in.
–
Differential Pinion Gear
I.D.
10.000 to 10.015 mm
0.39370 to 0.39429 in.
–
Differential Pinion Shaft to Differential
Pinion
Differential Pinion to Differential Side Gear
Backlash
0.10 to 0.20 mm
0.004 to 0.008 in.
–
11T Shaft Bevel Gear to 20T Bevel Gear
Backlash
0.10 to 0.30 mm
0.004 to 0.012 in.
–
W1011151
2-S2
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Item
N·m
kgf·m
ft-lbs
39.2 to 45.1
4.0 to 4.6
28.9 to 33.3
107.8 to 130.3
11.0 to 13.3
79.6 to 96.2
14.7
1.5
10.8
23.5 to 27.4
2.4 to 2.8
17.4 to 20.3
M12 7T Aluminum
62.7 to 72.5
6.4 to 7.4
46.3 to 53.5
M10 7T Aluminum
39.2 to 44.1
4.0 to 4.5
28.9 to 32.5
M12 7T
77.4 to 90.2
7.9 to 9.2
57.1 to 66.5
M10 7T
48.0 to 55.9
4.9 to 5.7
35.4 to 41.2
27.4
2.8
20.3
Speed control arm set screw
17.6 to 20.6
1.8 to 2.1
13.0 to 15.2
Neutral arm assembly mounting screw
17.6 to 20.6
1.8 to 2.1
13.0 to 15.2
Drain plug
36.3
3.7
26.8
Adapter bolt (PS3/8)
80.4
8.2
59.3
Charge pump housing mounting hex. socket head
screw
24.5 to 29.4
2.5 to 3.0
18.1 to 21.7
Center section mounting hex. socket head screw
22.5 to 24.5
2.3 to 2.5
16.6 to 18.
Cam mounting nut
Rear wheel mounting nut
Mower lift cylinder hose
Universal joint mounting screw
Rear axle case mounting screw
Drain pipe retaining bolt (9/16-18 UNF)
W1012736
2-S3
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
[1] CHECKING AND ADJUSTING
Adjusting Neutral
1. Block the front wheels with stoppers, and lift up the rear of
machine with a jack.
2. Remove the left rear wheel.
3. Start the engine, and set at approx. 1500 to 3000 min-1 (rpm).
4. Loosen the holder shaft mounting screw (3).
5. Rotate the holder shaft (2) counterclockwise so the rear wheels
turn forward.
6. Then rotate it clockwise until the rear wheels stop completely.
7. Put a mark on the neutral arm (1). (Position B)
8. Rotate the holder shaft (2) clockwise so the rear wheels turn in
reverse.
9. Then rotate it counterclockwise until the rear wheels stop
completely.
10.Put a mark on the neutral arm (1). (Position A)
11.Set the holder shaft (2) where it is right in the center between
position A and B and tighten the holder shaft mounting screw (3)
firmly.
This means the hydrostatic transaxle is fully in neutral. (Position
C)
WARNING
• Use buddy system in adjusting the neutral position.
• One of you should sit on the operator’s seat, adjust the
engine rpm and step on the speed change pedal. The other
should adjust the neutral position.
(1) Neutral Arm
(2) Holder Shaft
(3) Holder Shaft Mounting Screw
W1011896
Checking Speed Change Pedal Restriction
■ NOTE
• This adjustment should be performed after completing the
adjustment of neutral.
1. Set the speed change pedal (2) to “NEUTRAL” position, and
apply the parking brake (1).
2. Check that the pin (4) of speed change arm locks with the brake
pedal arm (3).
3. If it is improper, adjust with the adjusting nuts (6) on speed
change rod (7).
■ NOTE
• After adjustment, be sure to check that the speed change
rod (7) doesn’t touch the frame.
(Reference)
• L: 300mm (11.8 in.)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Parking Brake
Speed Change Pedal
Brake Pedal Arm
Pin
(5) Speed Change Plate 2
(6) Adjusting Nuts
(7) Speed Change Rod
W1012200
2-S4
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Pedal Stopper (Adjusting Maximum Forward and Reverse
Traveling Speed)
■ NOTE
• This adjustment should be performed after completing the
adjustment of neutral.
[Forward Operation]
1. Loosen the lock nut (3) and screw back the adjusting screw (2).
2. Lightly depress the speed change pedal (1) forward to the stroke
end.
3. Screw the adjusting screw (2) until it touches the pedal.
4. Then further screw the adjusting screw (2) 1/2 turn, and tighten
the lock nut (3).
(Reference)
• Clearance “C1” (when the pedal is in neutral) : 5.0 mm (0.20 in.)
• Traveling speed : 0.0 to 15.0 km/h (0.0 to 9.3 mph)
[Reverse Operation]
(Reference)
• Clearance “C2” (when the pedal is in neutral) : 11.5 mm (0.456
in.)
• Traveling speed : 0.0 to 6.0 km/h (0.0 to 3.7 mph)
(1) Speed Change Pedal
(2) Adjusting Screw
(3) Lock Nut
(4) Lock Nut
(5) Adjusting Screw
(6) Fulcrum
W1012533
Charge Relief Pressure
CAUTION
• When checking, park the machine on level ground, apply the
parking brake.
1. Remove the adaptor bolt (return port) from the control valve
adaptor.
2. Set the adaptor bolt for HST (See page G-52), thread joint (Code
No. 07916-50341), cable (Code No. 07916-50331), thread joint
(Code No. 07916-50401) and pressure gauge (Code No. 0791651301).
3. Start the engine and run the engine speed at rated speed.
4. Read the pressure gauge to measure the charge relief pressure.
5. If the pressure is not within the factory specification, adjust the
pressure with the adjusting shims.
Relief valve setting
pressure
Factory spec.
0.32 to 0.41 MPa
3.3 to 4.2 kgf/cm2
47 to 60 psi
Condition
• Engine Speed........Rated Speed
• Oil Temperature........50 °C (122 °F)
■ IMPORTANT
• Measure quickly so that the relief valve may not be in
operation more than 10 seconds.
• Replace the adaptor bolt of the charge pump return port with
the measuring adaptor bolt for HST.
(Rererence)
• Thickness of adjusting shims:
0.1 mm (0.004 in.) (Part No.: 66101-36950)
0.2 mm (0.008 in.)
0.4 mm (0.016 in.)
0.5 mm (0.020 in.)
W1013238
2-S5
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
[2] DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING
(1) Separating Transmission
(A) Dismounting Grass Collector and Mower
Dismounting Grass Collector [G21LD]
1. Pull and turn the L-pin (1) so that the spring pin can lock on the
cut-out.
2. Do the same on the opposite.
3. Remove the hopper (2).
(1) L-pin
(2) Hopper
(A) Lock
(B) Unlock
W1010943
Dismounting Grass Collector [G21HD]
1. Refer to "HIGH DUMP GRASS COLLECTOR" section.
W1034619
Discharging Plate and Discharge Duct
1. Remove the discharging plate (1).
2. Remove the discharge duct (3) from the platform (5).
(1) Discharging Plate
(2) M6 Bolt
(3) Discharge Duct
(4) M8 Bolt
(5) Platform
W1011082
Dismounting Mower
1. Refer to "MOWER" section.
W1013684
2-S6
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
(B) Draining Transmission Fluid
Draining Transmission Fluid
1. Place an oil pan underneath the drain plug (1).
2. Remove the drain plug (1).
3. Remove the oil inlet plug (2) to completely drain the transmission
fluid.
4. After draining, screw in the drain plug (1) and the oil inlet plug (2).
(When refilling)
• Refer to “LUBRICANTS, FUEL AND COOLANT” (See Page G7).
• Never work the machine immediately after changing the
transmission fluid. Keep the engine at medium speed for a few
minutes to prevent damage to the transmission.
Transmission fluid
(Including HST and
cylinder)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Drain Plug
Oil Inlet Plug
Oil Level Dipstick
Cover
4.5 L
4.75 U.S.qts.
3.86 lmp.qts.
Capacity
(A)
(B)
[a]
[b]
Upper Level
Lower Level
G21LD
G21HD
W1040303
2-S7
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
(C) Separating Fender
Seat
1. Disconnect the 2P connector (3) from the seat switch and fuse
(4).
2. Remove the seat support mounting lock nut (1).
3. Remove the screws (5).
4. Remove the seat with seat support.
5. Remove the seat bracket (2).
(When reassembling)
• Turn the seat support mounting lock nuts all the way until it seats
lightly.
Then, turn seat support mounting lock nuts counterclockwise by
a half turn.
• Apply oil to the seat support.
• Face smooth side the plain washers (6) to the seat support.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Seat Support Mounting Lock Nuts
Seat Bracket
2P Connector
Fuse
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Screws
Seat Support
Plain Washers
Fender
W1014173
Cutting Height Adjusting Dial
1. Lift the mower to the highest position.
2. Remove the cam mounting nut (1).
3. Remove the cutting height adjusting dial, plain washer and cam
(2).
(When reassembling)
• Apply grease to the outside of cam.
Tightening torque
(1) Cam Mounting Nut
Cam mounting nut
39.2 to 45.1 N·m
4.0 to 4.6 kgf·m
28.9 to 33.3 ft-lbs
(2) Cam
W1014754
2-S8
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Separating Fender
1. Remove the speed change pedal.
2. Peel the step sheet (1) halfway.
3. Remove the step support mounting screws (2).
4. Remove the step support (5) and rubber bushing (6).
5. Remove the fuel cap (4).
6. Separate the fender from the frame.
(When reassembling)
• Apply grease to the inside of rubber bushing.
• Clean up the step sheet and the step. Apply instantaneous
adhesive on the step sheet as shown in the figure.
• Position the step sheet so that the clearance between the step
sheet and the panel is less than 2.0 mm (0.079 in.) as shown in
the figure.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Step Sheet
Step Support Mounting Screws
Fuel Cap
Step Support
Rubber Bushing
A : Less than 2.0mm (0.079 in.)
B : Panel
W1018335
2-S9
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
(D) Separating Platform
Connector, PTO Clutch Return Cable and Cylinder Hose
1. Disconnect the 2P connector (3) from the grass collector switch.
2. Remove the wiring (2) from the platform.
3. Disconnect the PTO clutch return cable (4).
4. Remove the PTO clutch return cable (4) from the platform.
5. Remove the grass collector cylinder hoses (1) from the grass
collector cylinder.
(When reassembling)
• After assembling the PTO clutch return cable, be sure to adjust
the PTO clutch return cable (See page 7-S6).
• Attach the center hydraulic hose of the control valve to the upper
adapter of the grass collector cylinder.
• Attach the outer hydraulic hose of the control valve to the lower
adaptor of the grass collector cylinder.
Tightening torque
Grass collector cylinder
hose
(1) Grass Collector Cylinder Hoses
(2) Wiring
21.6 N·m
2.2 kgf·m
15.9 ft-lbs
(3) 2P Connector
(4) PTO Clutch Return Cable
W1011677
Separating Platform
1. Remove the platform mounting nuts and bolts (1).
2. Remove the platform the frame.
Tightening torque
Platform mounting nut and
bolt
48.0 to 55.9 N·m
4.9 to 5.7 kgf·m
35.4 to 41.2 ft-lbs
(1) Platform Mounting Nuts and Bolts
W1011920
(E) Separating Transmission
Upper Lift Link and Link Assembly
1. Pull out the rue ring cotters (3) and plain washers.
2. Remove the upper lift links (4).
3. Pull out the cotter pin (1) and plain washer.
4. Remove the L.H. rear link assembly (2).
5. Remove the R.H. rear link assembly retaining lock nut and bolt.
6. Remove the R.H. rear link assembly.
(When reassembling)
• Apply the grease to the rotary sliding surface.
• Adjust the upper lift link and lower lift link referring to the
“MOWER” section.
■ IMPORTANT
• Tighten the R.H. rear link assembly lock nut and bolt, leaving
as little gap as possible between the frame and the lock nut.
Also be sure that the rear link assembly turns smoothly.
(Reference)
• L : 350mm (13.8 in.)
(1) Cotter Pin
(2) L.H. Rear Link Assembly
(3) Rue Ring Cotter
(4) Upper Lift Link
(5) Lower Lift Link
W1015243
2-S10
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Brake spring, Brake Rod and Speed Change Plate
1. Remove the lock nut (5), plain washers (3), and brake spring (4).
2. Remove the brake rod (2).
3. Remove the speed change plate (1) from the speed control arm.
■ IMPORTANT
• After assembling the brake rod and brake spring, be sure to
adjust the brake pedal play (See page G-23).
(1) Speed Change Plate
(2) Brake Rod
(3) Plain Washer
(4) Brake Spring
(5) Lock Nut
W1015689
Rear Wheel, Levers and Mower Lift Cylinder Hose
1. Block the front wheels with stoppers, and lift up the frame.
2. Remove the rear wheel mounting nuts.
3. Remove the rear wheels
4. Remove the mower lift lever (1) from the control valve.
5. Disconnect the mower lift cylinder hose (2) from the control valve.
■ NOTE
• Jack up the machine by applying jacks on spots forward
from the rear axle (toeard the nachine center) of the machine
frame.
(When reassembling)
• Tighten the lever lock nut and bolt, leaving gap between the
control valve adaptor and lock nut as little as possible.
Also be sure that the lever moves smoothly.
• Once removed, the rear wheel mounting nuts and spring washers
are not reusable. Replace them with new ones.
Rear wheel mounting nuts
107.8 to 130.3 N·m
11.0 to 13.3 kgf·m
79.6 to 96.2 ft-lbs
Mower cylinder hose
14.7 N·m
1.5 kgf·m
10.8 ft-lbs
Tightening torque
(1) Mower Lift Lever
W1015952
2-S11
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Separating Transmission
1. Remove the universal joint mounting screws.
2. Disconnect the universal joint.
3. Remove the rear axle case mounting screws.
4. Separating the transmission from the frame.
(When reassembling)
• Apply grease to the splines of universal joint.
• Fit the rear axle case onto the frame with the rear axle case top
in tight contact all over the plate.
Tightening torque
(1) Plate
Universal joint mounting
screw
23.5 to 27.4 N·m
2.4 to 2.8 kgf·m
17.4 to 20.3 ft-lbs
Rear axle case mounting
screw (M12 7T Aluminum)
62.7 to 72.5 N·m
6.4 to 7.4 kgf·m
46.3 to 53.5 ft-lbs
screw (M10 7T Aluminum)
39.2 to 44.1 N·m
4.0 to 4.5 kgf·m
28.9 to 32.5 ft-lbs
screw (M12 7T)
77.4 to 90.2 N·m
7.9 to 9.2 kgf·m
57.1 to 66.5 ft-lbs
screw (M10 7T)
48.0 t5o 55.9 N·m
4.9 to 5.7 kgf·m
35.4 to 41.2 ft-lbs
(2) Rear Axle Case
W1016209
2-S12
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
(2)
Separating Hydrostatic Transmission
Neutral Arm, Speed Control Arm and Hydraulic Pipes
1. Remove the neutral spring (10).
2. Remove the neutral arm assembly mounting screws (11).
3. Remove the neutral arm assembly (9).
4. Remove the speed control arm set screw (4).
5. Remove the speed control arm (5).
6. Remove the stopper plate (8).
7. Remove the suction pipe (1) with the oil strainer.
8. Remove the adaptor plates (3).
9. Remove the drain pipe retaining bolt (2).
10.Remove the drain pipe (7) with the hydraulic hoses.
11.Remove the drain plug (6).
(When reassembling)
• Take care not to damage the O-ring.
Drain pipe retaining bolt
(9/16-18 UNF)
27.4 N·m
2.8 kgf·m
20.3 ft-lbs
Speed control arm set
screw
17.6 to 20.6 N·m
1.8 to 2.1 kgf·m
13.0 to 15.2 ft-lbs
Neutral arm assembly
mounting screw
17.6 to 20.6 N·m
1.8 to 2.1 kgf·m
13.0 to 15.2 ft-lbs
Drain plug
36.3 N·m
3.7 kgf·m
26.8 ft-lbs
Tightening torque
■ IMPORTANT
• Once removed, the speed change arm set screw is not
reusable.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Suction Pipe
Drain Pipe Retaing Bolt
Adaptor Plates
Speed Control Arm Set Screw
Speed Control Arm
Drain Plug
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
Drain Pipe
Stopper Plates
Neutral Arm Assembly
Neutral Spring
Neutral Arm Assembly Mounting
Screw
W1026369
Separating Hydrostatic Transmission
1. Remove the adaptor bolts (1) with the gaskets.
2. Remove the hydrostatic transmission mounting screws (2), (3).
3. Separate the hydrostatic transmission from the front cover.
(When reassembling)
• First tighten the adapter bolts into the control valve assembly.
Then tighten up control valve assembly stay mounting screw.
Tightening torque
Adapter bolt (PS3/8)
(1) Adaptor Bolts
(2) Hydrostatic Transmission Mounting
Screw
80.4 N·m
8.2 kgf·m
59.3 ft-lbs
(3) Hydrostatic Transmission Mounting
Screw
W1026829
2-S13
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
(3) Separating Transmission
Separating Control Valve Assembly
1. Remove the control valve assembly stay mounting screw (4).
2. Separating the control valve assembly (1) from the transmission.
3. Remove the collar (3) and O-ring (2) on the front cover.
(When reassembling)
• Temporarily tighten the control valve assembly stay mounting
screw.
• First tighten the adapter bolts into the control valve assembly.
Then tighten up the control valve assembly stay mounting screw.
(1) Control Valve Assembly
(2) O-ring
(3) Collar
(4) Control Valve Assembly Stay
Mounting Screw
W1027118
Separating Transmission
1. Separating the left rear axle case (3) from the transmission case.
2. Take out the differential assembly (1), noting the number of left
and right shims (2).
3. Separate the rear axle support (5) and the right rear axle case (4)
from the transmission.
4. Take out the yoke shaft (7) and spline boss (6).
(When reassembling)
• Install the adjusting shims to their original position.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Differential Assembly
Shims
Left Rear Axle Case
Right Rear Axle Case
(5) Rear Axle Support
(6) Spline Boss
(7) Yoke Shaft
W1027308
2-S14
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
(4) Disassembling Transmission
(A) Hydrostatic Transmission
■
•
•
•
•
NOTE
Work in a clean area.
Replace any damaged parts that could cause internal leakage.
Do not use grit paper, files or grinders on finished surface.
Use only clean, recommended fluid on the finished surface in reassembling.
Charge Relief Valve
1. Remove the relief plug (3).
2. Remove the spring (2) and charge relief cone (1).
■ NOTE
• If shims are placed at the bottom of the relief plug bore, keep
them.
(1) Charge Relief Cone
(2) Spring
(3) Relief Plug
W1027643
Charge Pump Housing and Charge Pump Spacer
1. Remove the charge pump housing mounting hex. socket head
screws (4).
2. Remove the charge pump housing (5).
3. Remove the O-ring (6) from the housing.
4. Remove the charge pump spacer (7).
5. Remove the O-ring (8) from the spacer.
6. Remove the internal snap ring (1), and pry the oil seal (2) off with
a screw driver.
■ NOTE
• When removing the oil seal (2), take care not to damage the
housing.
• Take care not to damage the O-rings.
(When reassembling)
• When installing the charge pump spacer, place the flat portion (9)
of the spacer on the opposite side of the trunnion arm (10).
Tightening torque
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Charge pump housing
mounting hex, socket head
screw
Internal Snap Ring
Oil Seal
Needle Bearing
Hex. Socket Head Screw
Charge Pump Housing
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
24.5 to 29.4 N·m
2.5 to 3.0 kgf·m
18.1 to 21.7 ft-lbs
O-ring
Charge Pump Space
O-ring
Flat Portion
Trunnion Arm
W1027788
2-S15
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Gerotor
1. Remove the gerotors (2).
2. Draw out the drive pin (3) on the pump shaft (4).
3. Draw out the dowel pins (1).
(When reassembling)
• Apply clean fluid to the both sides of the gerotor.
(1) Dowel Pins
(2) Gerotors
(3) Drive Pin
(4) Pump Shaft
W1028457
Center Section
1. Remove the center section mounting hex. socket head screws.
2. Lift the center section off the housing.
3. Remove the gasket.
4. Draw out the dowel pins.
■ NOTE
• Take care not to damage the surface of the center section
and cylinder blocks.
(When reassembling)
• Replace the gasket with a new one.
• Replace the seal with a new one.
Tightening torque
Center section mounting
hex. socket head screw
22.5 to 24.5 N·m
2.3 to 2.5 kgf·m
16.6 to 18.1 ft-lbs
W1028699
Check Valve
1. Remove the plugs (1), (8).
2. Remove the check valve (4), (5) and springs (3), (6).
■ NOTE
• Take care not to damage the O-ring on the plug.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Plug
O-ring
Spring
Check Valve
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Check Valve
Spring
O-ring
Plug
W1028889
By-pass Valve
1. Remove the plug (1).
2. Remove the by-pass valve (4).
■ NOTE
• Take care not to damage the O-ring on the by-pass valve.
• Take care not to damage the O-ring on the plug.
(1) Plug
(2) O-ring
(3) O-ring
(4) By-pass Valve
W1029069
2-S16
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Oil Seal and Needle Bearing
1. Pry the oil seal (1) off with a screwdriver.
2. Remove the needle bearings (2), (3).
■ NOTE
• Take care not to damage the center section.
(When reassembling)
• Replace the oil seal with a new one.
(1) Oil Seal
(2) Needle Bearing
(3) Needle Bearing
W1029240
Cylinder Block Assembly and Thrust Ball Bearing
1. Lay the housing on its side.
2. Slide out the cylinder bloke assembly (pump) (1).
3. Slide out the cylinder block assembly (motor) (3) with the motor
shaft (2).
4. Remove the thrust ball bearing.
■ NOTE
• Take care not to damage the surface of the cylinder blocks.
(When reassembling)
• Apply clean fluid to the surface of cylinder block.
• After installing the cylinder block assembly, check it to rotate
lightly.
(1) Cylinder Block Assembly (Pump)
(2) Motor Shaft
(3) Cylinder Block Assembly (Motor)
(4) Thrust Ball Bearing
W1030609
2-S17
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Swashplate
1. Remove the swashplate (1) from the housing.
2. Remove the thrust plate (4), thrust roller bearing (3) and thrust
washer (2) from the Swashplate.
(When reassembling)
• Apply clean fluid to the thrust washer and thrust plate.
• Install the swashplate, keeping the slot guide from moving with a
screwdriver.
(1) Swashplate
(2) Thrust Washer
(3) Thrust Roller Bearing
(4) Thrust Plate
W1030852
Slot Guide and Cradle Bearing
1. Remove the slot guide (2) from the trunnion arm (3).
2. Remove the cradle bearing (1) from the housing.
(1) Cradle Bearing
(2) Slot Guide
(3) Trunnion Arm
W1031110
Pump Shaft
1. Remove the internal snap ring (1).
2. Tap the pump shaft (4) with a plastic hammer slightly to side out
it from the housing with the oil seal (2) and spacer.
(When reassembling)
• Wrap the pump shaft with a thin plastic or cellophane tape to
prevent damage to new seal lip during installation.
(1) Internal Snap Ring
(2) Oil Seal
(3) Spacer
(4) Pump Shaft
W1031231
2-S18
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Trunnion Arm and Journal Bearing
1. Remove the trunnion arm (1).
2. Pry the oil seal (3) off with a screwdriver.
3. Press out the journal bearing (2).
(When reassembling)
• Apply clean field to the journal bearing.
■ NOTE
• Take care not to damage the housing.
(1) Trunnion Arm
(2) Journal Bearing
(3) Oil Seal
W1031388
(B) Transmission
Brake Assembly
1. Remove the brake assembly mounting screws (3).
2. Remove the brake assembly (2) with the fulcrum support
assembly (1).
3. Remove the external snap ring (4).
4. Pull out the brake drum (5).
(When reassembling)
• Apply liquid gasket (Three Bond 1208D or its equivalent) to face
of the flange.
• Pushing the brake lever (6) as shown in the figure, tighten the
brake assembly mounting screws.
■ NOTE
• After assembling the brake assembly, be sure to adjust the
brake pedal play (See page G-23).
(1) Fulcrum Support Assembly
(2) Brake Assembly
(3) Brake Assembly Mounting Screws
(5) Brake Drum
(6) Brake Lever
W1031669
2-S19
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Brake Shaft, Idle Gear Shaft and Bevel Pinion Shaft
1. Separate the front cover (1) from the transmission case (5).
2. Remove the brake shaft assembly.
3. Remove the idle gear shaft assembly.
5. Remove the bevel gear shaft assembly, noting the number of
front and rear shims (15).
(When reassembling)
• Be sure to check the backlash between the 11T bevel gear shaft
(19) and 20T bevel gear.
• Apply grease to the oil seal lip, and take care that it is not rolled
when installing the front cover.
• Apply liquid gasket (Three Bond 1208D or its equivalent) to the
front cover.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
Front Cover
Ball Bearing
Brake Shaft (15T)
Ball Bearing
Transmission Case
Oil Seal
Ball Bearing
Collar
24T Gear
Idle Shaft
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
Ball Bearing
External Snap Ring
39T Gear
Internal Snap Ring
Shim
Ball Bearing
Collar
Ball Bearing
11T Bevel Gear Shaft
W1031901
(5) Disassembling Rear Axle
Rear Axle
1. Remove the rear axle cover (9).
2. Remove the 49T gear (7).
4. Draw out the rear axle (1).
5. Remove the 12T gear shaft (11).
(When reassembling)
• The gauge hole is located in the left-hand rear axle cover.
• Replace the oil seals with new ones.
rear axle cover.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Rear Axle
Wheel Bolt
Oil Seal
Rear Axle Case
Ball Bearing
External Snap Rings
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
49T Gear
Ball Bearing
Rear Axle Cover
Ball Bearing
12T Gear Shaft
W1032296
2-S20
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
(6) Disassembling Differential Gear Case
Differential Gear
1. Remove the 20T spiral bevel gear (5) with ball bearing (6) and
ball bearing (9) by puller.
2. Tap out the spring pin (10) from 20T bevel gear side.
3. Remove the differential pinion shaft (8).
4. Remove the differential pinions (2), differential side gears (4) and
shims (1), (3).
■ NOTE
• Arrange the parts to know their original position.
(When reassembling)
• Apply molybdenum disulfide (Three Bond 1901 or equivalent) to
the inner circumferential surface of the differential side gears,
differential pinions and shims.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Shim
Differential Pinion
Shim
Differential Side Gear
20T Spiral Bevel Gear
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
Ball Bearing
Differential Gear Case
Differential Pinion Shaft
Ball Bearing
Spring Pin
W1032615
2-S21
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
[3] SERVICING
(1) Hydostatic Transmission
Auxiliary Pump
1. Check the charge pump housing (2) and the gerotor assembly (1)
for scratches and wear.
2. If scratch or worn, replace the charge pump complete assembly.
(1) Gerotor Assembly
(2) Charge Pump Housing
W1047558
Pump Shaft and Motor Shaft
1. Check the seal surface (1), the bearing surface (2) and the ball
bearing (3).
2. If the shaft is rough or groove, replace it.
3. If the ball bearing is worn, replace it.
(1) Seal Surface
(2) Bearing Surface
(3) Ball Bearing
W1033016
Cylinder Block Assembly
1. Check the cylinder blocks (1) and piston (5) for scratches and
wear.
2. If scratch or worm, replace the cylinder block assembly.
3. Check that the piston (5), spring (2) spring seat (3) and ball (4)
are in each cylinder bore.
4. Check the pistons for their free movement in the cylinder block
bores.
5. If the piston or the cylinder block is scored, replace the cylinder
block assembly.
6. Check the polished face of cylinder block for scording.
7. If scored, replace the cylinder block assembly.
■ IMPORTANT
• Do not interchange pistons between pump and motor
cylinder block. Pistons and cylinder blocks are matched.
(1) Cylinder Block
(2) Spring
(3) Spring Seat
(4) Ball
(5) Piston
W1033158
2-S22
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Center Section
1. Check the surface of center section (1) for scratches and wear.
2. If scratch or wear, replace the HST assembly.
3. Check the needle bearing (2) for wear.
4. If worn, replace the needle bearing.
■ NOTE
• After checking, coat them with hydrostatic transmission
fluid.
(1) Surface of Center Section
(2) Needle Bearing
W1033416
Thrust plate, Swashplate and Cradle Bearing
1. Check the thrust plate (2) for scratches and excessive wear.
2. If worn or scored, replace the thrust plate.
3. Check the piston contact face of the swashplate (1) for scratches
and excessive wear.
4. If worn or scored, replace the swashplate.
5. Check the surface of the cradle bearings (3) for scratches and
excessive wear.
6. If worn or scored, replace the cradle bearings.
■ NOTE
• After checking, coat them with hydrostatic transmission
fluid.
(1) Swashplate
(2) Thrust Plate
(3) Cradle Bearing
W1033654
Check Valve
1. Check the check valves (4), (5) and the seat in the center section
for damage.
2. Check the O-rings (2), (7) for scratches and damage.
3. Check the springs (3), (6) for breakage and wear.
4. If anything unusual, replace them.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Plug
O-ring
Spring
Check Valve
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Check Valve
Spring
O-ring
Plug
W1033851
2-S23
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Charge Relief Valve
1. Check the charge relief cone and the seat in the auxiliary pump
housing for damage.
2. Check the spring for breakage and wear.
3. If anything unusual, replace them.
(1) Charge Relief Cone
(2) Spring
(3) Relief Plug
W1034033
(2) Transmission
Checking Bearing
1. Hold the inner race, and push and pull the outer race in all
directions to check for wear and roughness.
2. Apply transmission fluid to the bearing, and hold the inner race.
Then, turn the outer race to check rotation.
3. If there is any defect, replace it.
W1048891
(3) Differential Gear
Clearance between Differential Case and Differential Side Gear
1. Measure the differential side gear boss O.D..
2. Measure the differential case bore I.D., and calculate the
clearance.
3. If the clearance exceeds the allowable limit, replace faulty parts.
Factory spec.
0.040 to 0.082 mm
0.00157 to 0.00323 in.
Allowable limit
0.17 mm
0.0067 in.
Differential case bore
I.D.
Factory spec.
26.000 to 26.021 mm
1.02362 to 1.02445 in.
Differential side gear
O.D.
Allowable limit
25.939 to 25.960 mm
1.02122 to 1.02205 in.
Clearance between
differential case and
differential side gear
W1034423
Clearance between Differential Pinion Shaft and Differential
Pinion
1. Measure the differential pinion shaft O.D..
2. Measure the differential pinion I.D., and calculate the clearance.
3. If the clearance exceeds the allowable limit, replace faulty parts.
Factory spec.
0.025 to 0.055 mm
0.00098 to 0.00216 in.
Allowable limit
0.10 mm
0.0039 in.
Differential pinion shaft
O.D.
Factory spec.
9.960 to 9.975 mm
0.39213 to 0.39272 in.
Differential pinion gear
I.D.
Allowable limit
10.000 to 10.015 mm
0.39370 to 0.39429 in.
Clearance between
differential pinion shaft
and differential pinion
W1034586
2-S24
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Backlash between Differential Pinion and Differential Side Gear
1. Set a dial gauge (lever type) on a tooth of the differential pinion.
2. Fix the differential side gear, and move the differential pinion to
measure the backlash.
3. If the measurement exceeds the factory specification, adjust with
the differential side gears shims.
Backlash between
differential pinion and
differential side gear
Factory spec.
0.10 to 0.20 mm
0.004 to 0.008 in.
(Reference)
• Thickness of differential side shims :
0.8 mm (0.031 in.), (Part No. : 37410-56920)
1.0 mm (0.039 in.), (Part No. : 37410-56930)
1.2 mm (0.047 in.), (Part No. : 37410-56940)
• Thickness of differential Pinion shims:
3.3 mm (0.130 in.), (Part No.: K2561-16060)
3.5 mm (0.138 in.), (Part No.: K2561-16050)
3.7 mm (0.146 in.), (Part No.: K2561-16070)
3.9 mm (0.154 in.), (Part No.: K2561-16080)
• Tooth contact : More than 35%
W1034854
Backlash between 11T Shaft Bevel Gear and 20T Bevel Gear
1. Remove the rear axle case, and place fuses between 11T shaft
bevel gear and 20T bevel gear. (Several points on the
circumferential)
2. Assemble the rear axle case, and turn the brake shaft.
3. Remove the rear axle case again, and take out the fuses.
4. Measure the thickness of fuses with an outside micrometer.
5. If the backlash is not with in the factory specification, change the
adjusting shims (1), (2).
Backlash between 11T
shaft Bevel gear and
20T bevel gear
Factory spec.
0.10 to 0.30 mm
0.004 to 0.012 in.
(Reference)
• Thickness of adjusting shims (1) :
0.2 mm(0.008 in.),(Part No. : 66621-15240)
0.3 mm(0.012 in.),(Part No. : 67211-14990)
0.5 mm(0.020 in.),(Part No. : 66621-15250)
• Tooth contact : More than 35%
• Thickness of adjusting shims (2) :
0.8 mm(0.031 in.),(Part No. : 31353-43770)
1.0 mm(0.039 in.),(Part No. : 31353-43780)
1.2 mm(0.047 in.),(Part No. : 31353-43790)
• Put the thick shim (2) at the rear axle
(1) Shim
(2) Shim
W1035123
2-S25
3
BRAKES
SERVICING
CONTENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
TIGHTENING TORQUES ...............................................................................3-S3
(1) Parking Brake .....................................................................................3-S4
(2) Pedal System Complete .....................................................................3-S6
(3) Brake Assembly ..................................................................................3-S9
[3] SERVICING ............................................................................................3-S10
BRAKES
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
1. TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom
Insufficient Braking
Force
Brake Drags
Heavy brakes
Probable Cause
Solution
Reference
Page
Excessive brake pedal play
Adjust
3-S4
Brake shoe worn
Replace
3-S10
Brake drum worn
Replace
3-S10
Grease or oil on brake shoe
Replace
3-S10
Brake fulcrum shaft worn
Replace
3-S9
Too small brake pedal play
Adjust
3-S4
Weaken or broken brake return spring
Replace
–
Rusted brake pedal arm
Repair or replace
–
Rusted brake actuating arm
Repair or replace
3-S9
Rusted brake fulcrum shaft
Repair or replace
3-S9
W1014322
3-S1
BRAKES
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Item
Allowable Limit
Brake Spring to Plain Washer
Clearance
−1.0 to 0.0 mm
−0.04 to 0.00 in.
–
Brake Lining
Thickness
9.0 mm
0.35 in.
7.5 mm
0.30 in.
Brake Drum
I.D.
81.2 to 81.4 mm
3.197 to 3.205 in.
82.0 mm
3.228 in.
W1010643
3-S2
BRAKES
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Item
N·m
kgf·m
ft-lbs
Steering wheel mounting nut
19.6 to 24.5
2.0 to 2.5
14.5 to 18.1
Cam mounting nut
39.2 to 45.1
4.0 to 4.6
28.9 to 33.3
Pedal system complete mounting screw
23.5 to 27.4
2.4 to 2.8
17.4 to 20.3
W1012736
3-S3
BRAKES
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Brake Pedal Play
1. Keep the brake return spring (1) off position.
2. Keep the brake pedal in return position.
3. Gently press the tip of the transaxle’s brake actuating arm (5)
toward the pedal.
4. Set the brake spring (4) so as to be −1.0 to 0.0 mm (−0.04 to 0.00
in.) shorter than free length.
5. If the measurement is not within the factory specifications, adjust
with the nut (3).
6. Tighten up the lock nut (2).
Clearance between
brake spring and plain
washer (L)
Factory spec.
−1.0 to 0.0 mm
−0.04 to 0.00 in.
(Reference)
• Brake Pedal Play : 15 to 25 mm (0.59 to 0.98 in.)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Brake Return Spring
Lock Nut
Nut
Brake Spring
Transaxle’s Brake Actuating Arm
L : Clearance between brake spring
and plain washer
W1010868
(1) Parking Brake
Dismount Mower
W1011157
Battery and Bonnet
1. Turn the main switch off.
2. Remove the radiator screen (1)
3. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
6. Remove the bonnet stay mounting screws (6), and remove the
bonnet with the bonnet bracket (6) from the frame.
(1) Radiator Screen
(2) Head Light
(3) 1P Connector
(4) Wiring
(5) Bonnet Bracket
(6) Bonnet Stay Mounting Screw
W1011210
Wiring
1. Remove the lamp indicators (4).
2. Disconnect 1P connector (3) from the hour meter.
3. Disconnect 1P connector (1) from the light switch.
4. Disconnect 4P connector (2) from the main switch.
(1) 1P Connector
(2) 4P Connector
(3) 1P Connector
(4) Lamp Indicator
W1011427
3-S4
BRAKES
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Parking Lock Pedal
1. Remove the parking lock pedal mounting nut (2).
2. Remove the parking lock pedal (1) from the brake lock.
(When reassembling)
■ IMPORTANT
• Using the oval hole, make such adjustment that the parking
lock pedal be kept out of contact with the panel over the
entire stroke.
• Step on the brake pedal and parking lock pedal at once, and
make sure that the speed change pedal gets locked.
• If the speed change pedal fails to get locked, set this pedal
to the neutral position and readjust the brake lock (3) so that
the lock pin (5) comes into the notch (4).
(1) Parking Lock Padal
(2) Parking Lock Padal Mounting Nut
(3) Brake Lock
(4) Notch
(5) Lock Pin
W1011595
Steering Wheel
1. Remove the grip of the throttle lever (1).
2. Remove the steering pad and remove the steering wheel
mounting nut.
3. Remove the steering wheel using the steering wheel puller
(Code, No. 07916-51090) and steering wheel puller adaptor (See
page G-51.)
■ IMPORTANT
• When removing steering wheel, use steering wheel puller.
Do not use the hammer to prevent electric power steering
from damaging.
• Remove the steering wheel after setting it to the straightahead position.
(When reassembling)
Tightening torque
Steering wheel mounting
nut
19.6 to 24.5 N·m
2.0 to 2.5 kgf·m
14.5 to 18.1 ft-lbs
(1) Throttle Lever
W1011912
3-S5
BRAKES
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Separating Panel
3. Remove the panel mounting screws (1).
4. Separate the panel (3).
(When reassembling)
the figure.
(1) Panel Mounting Screw
(2) Step Sheet
(3) Panel
A : Less than 2.0 mm (0.079 in.)
W1012197
Brake Lock
1. Remove the parking lock spring (1).
2. Remove the brake lock (2).
(1) Parking Lock Spring
(2) Brake Lock
W1012574
(2) Pedal System Complete
cut-out.
(1) L-pin
(2) Hopper
(A) Lock
(B) Unlock
W1010943
3-S6
BRAKES
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
W1016642
(2) M6 Bolt
(3) Discharge Duct
(4) M8 Bolt
(5) Platform
W1017021
Seat
1. Disconnect the 2P connector (3) from the seat switch.
2. Remove the seat support mounting lock nuts (1).
3. Remove the guide washers, spring washers and screws (4).
4. Remove the seat with seat support (5).
(When reassembling)
lightly.
Then, turn seat support mounting lock nuts counterclockwise
by a half turn.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Seat Bracket
2P Connector
Screws
(5) Seat Support
(6) Plain Washers
(7) Fender
(2).
(When reassembling)
Tightening torque
Cam mounting nut
39.2 to 45.1 N·m
4.0 to 4.6 kgf·m
28.9 to 33.3 ft-lbs
(2) Cam
3-S7
BRAKES
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Separating Fender
(When reassembling)
the figure.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Step Sheet
Fuel Cap
Step Support
Rubber Bushing
B : Panel
Brake Spring and Brake Rod 1
1. Remove the lock nut, nut and plain washers (2), (4).
2. Remove the brake spring (3).
3. Pull out the cotter pin.
4. Remove the brake rod 1 (1).
(When reassembling)
■ IMPORTANT
• After assembling the brake rod and brake spring, be sure to
adjust the brake pedal play. (See page 3-S4).
(1) Brake Rod 1
(2) Plain Washer
(3) Brake Spring
(4) Plain Washer
3-S8
BRAKES
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Separating Pedal System Complete
1. Remove the return spring (3).
2. Pull out the cotter pin (7).
3. Remove the brake rod 2 (6) and plain washer.
4. Disconnect 4P connector (5) from the brake switch (4).
5. Remove the wiring from the pedal system complete.
6. Disconnect the speed change rod (1) from the lever of the pedal
system complete.
7. Remove the pedal system complete mounting screws (2).
8. Remove the pedal system complete.
(When reassembling)
■ IMPORTANT
• Apply grease to the fulcrum of the pedal system complete.
• Adjust the clearance to be between the brake switch and
brake pedal at off position.
PEDAL
BRAKE SWITCH
OFF (FREE)
OFF
ON (DEPRESSED)
ON
• After assembling the speed change rod, be sure to adjust
the length of rod. (See page 2-S4.)
(Reference)
• L : 300 mm (11.8 in.)
Tightening torque
Pedal system complete
mounting screw
(1) Speed Change Rod
(2) Pedal System Complete Mounting
Screws
(3) Return Spring
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
23.5 to 27.4 N·m
2.4 to 2.8 kgf·m
17.4 to 20.3 ft-lbs
Brake Switch
4P Connector
Brake Rod 2
Cotter Pin
W1015250
(3) Brake Assembly
Separating Brake Assembly
1. Pull out the cotter pins (1).
2. Remove the brake rod 3 (5).
3. Remove the brake assembly mounting screws (4).
4. Remove the brake assembly (3) and fulcrum support assembly
(2).
6. Pull out the brake drum (7).
(When reassembling)
• Apply liquid gasket (Three Bond 1208D or its equivalent) to face
of the flange.
• Pushing the brake lever as shown in the figure, tighten the brake
assembly mounting screws.
■ NOTE
• After assembling the brake assembly, be sure adjust the
brake pedal play (See page 3-S4).
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Cotter Pins
Fulcrum Support Assembly
Brake Assembly
Brake Assembly Mounting Screws
(5) Brake Rod 3
(7) Brake Drum
W1014378
3-S9
BRAKES
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
[3] SERVICING
Brake Lining Wear
1. Measure the brake lining thickness with vernier caliper.
brake shoes.
Factory spec.
9.0 mm
0.35 in.
Allowable limit
7.5 mm
0.30 in.
Brake lining thickness
■ NOTE
• If the lining is carbonized or soaked with oil, replace the
shoes.
W1014697
Brake Drum Wear
1. Measure the brake drum I.D. with vernier caliper.
2. If the measurement exceeds the allowable limit, replace it.
Factory spec.
81.2 to 81.4 mm
3.197 to 3.205 in.
Allowable limit
82.0 mm
3.228 in.
Brake drum I.D.
W1014861
3-S10
4
FRONT AXLE
SERVICING
CONTENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
(1) Separating Front Axle Assembly.........................................................4-S5
(2) Disassembling Front Axle ...................................................................4-S6
(3) Disassembling Front Axle Support Assembly .....................................4-S7
[3] SERVICING ..............................................................................................4-S7
FRONT AXLE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
1. TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom
Front Wheels
Wander to Right or
Left
Front Wheels
Shimmy
Probable Cause
Solution
Reference
Page
Improper toe-in adjustment
Adjust
4-S4
Uneven tire pressure
Adjust
G-23
Worn kingpin
Replace front axle
assembly
4-S7
Excessive front axle end play
Adjust
4-S4
Improper toe-in adjustment
Adjust
4-S4
Worn kingpin
Replace front axle
assembly
4-S7
Loosen or worn steering linkage (drag link, tierod
Tighten or replace
4-S7
Excessive front axle end play
Adjust
4-S4
Excessive clearance between front axle and
front axle support
Replace
4-S7
W1014322
4-S1
FRONT AXLE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Item
Allowable Limit
0 to 10 mm
0 to 0.394 in.
–
Front Wheel Alignment
Toe-in
Front Axle
End Play
0.1 to 0.4 mm
0.004 to 0.016 in.
1.0 mm
0.039 in.
Front Axle to Front Axle Support
Clearance
0.025 to 0.089 mm
0.00098 to 0.00350 in.
0.30 mm
0.0118 in.
Front Axle
I.D.
40.000 to 40.039 mm
1.57480 to 1.57634 in.
–
Front Axle Support
O.D.
39.950 to 39.975 mm
1.57283 to 1.57382 in.
–
W1013874
4-S2
FRONT AXLE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Item
N·m
kgf·m
ft-lbs
108.8 to 130.3
11.1 to 13.3
80.3 to 96.2
Front axle support mounting screws
48.0 to 55.9
4.9 to 5.7
35.4 to 41.2
Tie-rod mounting lock nut
45.1 to 55.9
4.6 to 5.7
33.4 to 41.2
Knuckle arm mounting bolt
48.0 to 55.9
4.9 to 5.7
35.4 to 41.2
Rod end mounting nut
W1012736
4-S3
FRONT AXLE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Toe-in
1. Inflate the front tires to the specified pressure.
2. Turn the front wheels straight ahead, and measure the toe-in (BA).
change the tie-rod length to adjust.
Toe-in (B-A)
Factory spec.
0 to 10 mm
0 to 0.394 in.
■ IMPORTANT
• After adjusting the toe-in, secure the tie-rod with the lock
nut.
A : Wheel to Wheel Distance at Front
B : Wheel to Wheel Distance at Rear
W1011030
Front Axle End Play
1. Jack up the front of frame.
2. Measure the clearance between the front axle (1) and adjusting
shims (2).
adjusting shims (2).
Factory spec.
0.1 to 0.4 mm
0.004 to 0.016 in.
Allowable limit
1.0 mm
0.039 in.
Front axle end play
(Reference)
1.5 mm (0.059 in.) (Part No. K1310-1512-0)
1.9 mm (0.075 in.) (Part No. K1310-1513-0)
2.3 mm (0.091 in.) (Part No. K1310-1514-0)
3.0 mm (0.118 in.) (Part No. K1310-1515-0)
(1) Front Axle
(2) Adjusting Shim
W1011222
4-S4
FRONT AXLE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
(1) Separating Front Axle Assembly
Dismount Mower
1. Refer to “MOWER” section.
W1011444
Battery and Bonnet
2. Remove the radiator screen (2)
3. Disconnect the negative cable (1) from the battery.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Negative Cable
Radiator Screen
Head Light
1P Connectors
(5) Wiring
(6) Bonnet Bracket
W1012605
spring (6).
tension pulley.
(When reassembling)
bushing.
front PTO belt tension. (See page 7-S3.)
between the belt stay and front PTO belt. (See page 7-S4.)
Clearance (L): 1.0 to 2.5 mm (0.04 to 0.10 in.)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Cotter Pin
Tension Arm
Flange Bolt
PTO Clutch Spring
PTO Brake Assembly
(6) Return Spring
(7) Brake Spring
(8) Front PTO Belts
(9) Belt Stay
(10) Pulley
W1011729
4-S5
FRONT AXLE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Separating Front Axle Assembly
1. Remove the rod end mounting nut (1).
2. Support the frame with jacks.
3. Remove the front axle support mounting screws (3).
4. Draw out the front axle support assembly (2) forward.
5. Separate the front axle assembly (4), noting the adjusting shims
(5) between the frame and front axle assembly (4).
(When reassembling)
• Be sure to install the adjusting shims.
• After reassembling the front axle assembly, inject grease until it
comes out.
• Replace the rod end mounting nut with a new one.
■ IMPORTANT
• After assembling the front axle assembly, be sure to adjust
the toe-in.
108.8 to 130.3 N·m
11.1 to 13.3 kgf·m
80.3 to 96.2 ft-lbs
Front axle support
mounting screws
48.0 to 55.9 N·m
4.9 to 5.7 kgf·m
35.4 to 41.2 ft-lbs
Tightening torque
(1) Rod End Mounting Nut
(2) Front Axle Support Assembly
(3) Front Axle Support Mounting Screw
(4) Front Axle Assembly
(5) Shim
W1012044
(2) Disassembling Front Axle
Front Wheel and Tie Rod
1. Remove the front wheel cap (1).
2. Remove the external snap ring and plain washer (2).
3. Remove the front wheels.
4. Remove the tie-rod mounting lock nuts (4).
5. Remove the tie-rod (3).
(When reassembling)
• Replace the tie-rod mounting lock nut with a new one.
(Reference)
• L : 584 mm (23.1 in.)
Tightening torque
Tie-rod mounting lock nut
(1) Front Wheel Cap
(2) External Snap Ring and Plain
Washer
45.1 to 55.9 N·m
4.6 to 5.7 kgf·m
33.4 to 41.2 ft-lbs
(3) Tie-rod
(4) Tie-rod Mounting Lock Nut
W1012423
4-S6
FRONT AXLE
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Knuckle Arm and Kingpin
1. Remove the knuckle arm mounting bolt (3), spring washer and
nut (5).
2. Remove the knuckle arm (4) and the kingpin (L.H.) (6).
3. Remove the external snap ring (1) and kingpin (R.H.) (2).
(When reassembling)
• Apply grease to the kingpins.
Tightening torque
Knuckle arm mounting bolt
(2) Kingpin (R.H.)
(3) Knuckle Arm Mounting Bolt
48.0 to 55.9 N·m
4.9 to 5.7 kgf·m
35.4 to 41.2 ft-lbs
(4) Knuckle Arm
(5) Knuckle Arm Mounting Nut
(6) Kingpin (L.H.)
W1012736
(3) Disassembling Front Axle Support Assembly
Front Axle Support Assembly
2. Tap out the PTO shaft (1) forward.
(When reassembling)
• Apply grease to the oil seal lip, and take care that it is not rolled
when installing the PTO shaft.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
PTO Shaft
Internal Snap Ring
Ball Bearing
External Snap Ring
(5) Needle Bearing
(6) Oil Seal
(7) Front Axle Support
W1013054
[3] SERVICING
Clearance between Front Axle and Front Axle Support
1. Measure the front axle I.D. with a cylinder gauge.
2. Measure the front axle support O.D. with an outside micrometer,
and calculate the clearance.
3. If the clearance exceeds the allowable limit, replace them.
Clearance between front
axle and front axle
support
Factory spec.
0.025 to 0.089 mm
0.00098 to 0.00350 in.
Allowable limit
0.30 mm
0.0118 in.
Front axle I.D.
Factory spec.
40.000 to 40.039 mm
1.57480 to 1.57634 in.
Front axle support O.D.
Factory spec.
39.950 to 39.975 mm
1.57283 to 1.57382 in.
W1013254
4-S7
5
STEERING
MECHANISM
CONTENTS
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ........................................................................ 5-M1
2. CONSTRUCTION AND FUNCTION OF MAIN COMPONENTS ............... 5-M2
[1] POWER STEERING ASSEMBLY............................................................ 5-M2
(1) Construction of Power Steering Assembly......................................... 5-M2
(2) Torque Sensor ................................................................................... 5-M3
(3) Motor .................................................................................................. 5-M4
[2] EPS CONTROLLER ............................................................................... 5-M5
(1) Basic Control...................................................................................... 5-M5
(2) Fool Proof .......................................................................................... 5-M5
(3) Failure Diagnosis Function ............................................................... 5-M6
STEERING
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
(1) Power Steering Assembly
(2) Power Steering Gear Case
A : Engine Revolution Signal
(Oil Switch)
B : Warning Lamp
C : Connector for Servicing
D:
E:
F:
G:
Battery
EPS Controller
Steering Torque Signal
Motor Driving Current
The steering system employs an electric power steering (EPS). The EPS system has recently been developed as
an alternative to the hydrostatics power steering system. In this system, an electric motor is used to reduce the power
necessary for steering. As compared with the hydrostatics power steering, the electric power steering has the
following features.
1. Eliminating the need for using a hydraulic pump, it is an electric-power-saving system in which the motor is
energized only when the steering wheel is operated. Therefore it causes no engine power loss, enhancing fuel
economy.
2. Needing no hydraulic pump or tank, it is light and compact.
The three main components of the electric power steering are a power steering assembly, EPS controller and
power steering gear case.
W1013078
5-M1
STEERING
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
2. CONSTRUCTION AND FUNCTION OF
MAIN COMPONENTS
[1] POWER STEERING ASSEMBLY
(1) Construction of Power Steering Assembly
The power steering assembly is mainly composed of
an input shaft (1), output shaft (in the gear case side) (5),
torsion bar (2) for connecting these shafts, torque sensor
(3) for detecting the twisting of the torsion bar, and motor
(4) for generating assisting power. A stopper is provided
for the input shaft (1) and output shaft (5) in order to
prevent twisting beyond setting at the time of steering.
If the torsion bar (2) should be damaged, steering
can be performed with the steering wheel attached as it
is.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Input Shaft
Torsion Bar
Torque sensor
Motor
Output shaft
(a) Torsion bar maximum
twisting angle
W1013131
5-M2
STEERING
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
(2) Torque Sensor
■ Construction
The torque sensor senses the steering power and
rotating direction, convert them into a voltage signal and
outputs the signal to the EPS controller. The torque
sensor section is composed of a slider (3), detecting ring
and detecting coil (4) (slider and detecting ring are
combined). The slider (3) is held by the slider pin (2)
connected to the input shaft (1) and output shaft (5).
A thread groove and longitudinal groove (in the axial
direction) are provided on the inside of the slider. The
relative change of the rotating direction of the input shaft
(1) and output shaft (5) is converted into a movement in
the slider axial direction.
(1) Input shaft
(2) Slider Pin
(3) Slider
(4) Detecting Ring and Detecting
Coil
(5) Output Shaft
W1013290
■Operation
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
A:
B:
C:
D:
Input Shaft
Slider Pin
Slider
Detecting Ring and Detecting
Coil
Output Shaft
Steering wheel turned
counterclockwise
Steering wheel in neutral
position
Steering wheel turned
clockwise
1 mm (0.04 in.)
W1013543
When a torsion torque is generated via the torsion bar
between the input shaft (1) and output shaft (5) as a
result of the steering wheel being turned, the input-shaftside slider pin moves along the thread groove of the
slider and makes the slider shift in the axial direction.
The slider shifting direction and distance are detected as
the amount of electrical change between the detecting
ring and detecting coil and transmitted to the EPS
controller.
A : Torque Sensor Output
B : Output Voltage (V)
C : Voltage
D : Steering Direction
E : Left
F : Right
W1013984
5-M3
STEERING
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
(3) Motor
The motor is installed on the steering column (4). It is
composed of a worm gear (1) and direct current motor
(3). The worm gear (1) is engaged with the helical gear
of the worm wheel (2), reducing and transmitting the
motor revolution to the worm wheel.
(1) Worm Gear
(2) Helical Gear of Worm Wheel
(3) Direct Current Motor
(4) Steering Column
W1014140
5-M4
STEERING
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
[2] EPS CONTROLLER
The EPS controller detects an electric signal from the oil switch, activates the system after the engine starting and
controls the motor according to an input signal from the torque sensor.
The EPS controller has a self-diagnosis function.
(1) Basic Control
1. It receives a voltage signal from the torque sensor and converts the magnitude and direction of torque into data.
2. According to the steering torque and direction date, it determines the current to be applied to the motor based on
the specified assisting power map.
(2) Fool Proof
When the steering wheel is kept fully turned (end
reaching), the maximum current at the time of full
assisting is applied to the motor in spite of the motor not
rotating. As a result, all the energy is converted into heat.
If this state is maintained, the motor or EPS controller
may be heated abnormally and damaged.
In order to prevent such damage, if a large current is
passed for a certain time, the EPS controller gradually
decreases the maximum current applied to the motor.
1. Decreases the current each time a large current is
passed for 2.5 seconds.
2. Increases the current by 0.15 A every 2.5 seconds
after getting out of the end reaching state.
A:
B:
C:
D:
CUR MAX
IM MAX
CURS
CIMF
E:
F:
G:
H:
IM
0.15 A/2.5 Sec.
Motor Current
Time
W1014462
5-M5
STEERING
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
(3)
Failure Diagnosis Function
The EPS controller monitors the input/output data and motor driving current. If an abnormal condition occurs in
the system, the EPS controller stops the system and makes the warning lamp go on. In this case, the normal manual
steering operation is applied and the abnormal condition is coded and stored in the failure diagnosis circuit. The failure
position can be estimated based on flashing times of the warning lamp attached to the EPS controller.
W1015203
5-M6
SERVICING
CONTENTS
1. CAUTIONARY
INSTRUCTIONS
BEFORE STARTING
FAILURE
DIAGNOSIS ....................................................................................................5-S1
2. TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................................................................5-S2
[1] TROUBLESHOOTING BASED ON EACH SYMPTOM ........................5-S2
[2] TROUBLESHOOTING BASED ON ERROR CODE .............................5-S3
4. TIGHTENING TORQUES ..............................................................................5-S7
5. CHECKING, DISASSEMBLING AND SERVICING.........................................5-S8
(1) Warning Lamp.....................................................................................5-S8
(2) Torque Sensor Cable........................................................................5-S10
(3) Torque Sensor 3P Connector ...........................................................5-S11
(4) Torque sensor 3P Connector Terminal .............................................5-S12
(5) Wire Harness ...................................................................................5-S13
(6) Checking Voltage..............................................................................5-S14
(7) Error Codes and Defective Sections .................................................5-S15
(8) Steering Wheel Play .........................................................................5-S16
(9) Throttle Lever Operating Force........................................................5-S16
[2] DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING................................................5-S17
(1) Separating Power Steering Assembly and EPS Controller...............5-S17
(2) Power Steering Gear Case ..............................................................5-S20
[3] SERVICING ............................................................................................5-S21
(1) EPS Check Sheet .............................................................................5-S25
STEERING
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
1. CAUTIONARY INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE
STARTING FAILURE DIAGNOSIS
1. Self-diagnosis function
The EPS controller has a self-diagnosis function. If the EPS controller detects an abnormal condition in the system,
it performs the following.
• Making the warning lamp go on.
• Turning OFF the motor current.
• Storing the error code.
• When the system recovers from the failure, the EPS controller automatically makes the warning lamp go off.
Depending on the position of self-diagnosis, however, there may be cases where resetting cannot be made without
turning OFF the main switch an performing fail-safe history erasing.
2. Warning lamp
• If the system is normal, the warning lamp glows for 5 seconds after the engine starting and goes off.
• The warning lamp has a function to indicate an abnormal condition in the system and to display the error code.
3. Error code
• When an abnormal condition is detected and the warning lamp goes on, the error code is stored.
• The stored code may be lost if the power of the EPS controller is turned off or the coupler is disconnected.
4. Cautions in the EPS system
• If the steering wheel is kept fully turned for a long time with the machine stopped, it may become hard to operate
the steering wheel. It is not a failure: it is caused because the EPS controller decreases the current applied to the
motor in order to protect the EPS system. To restore the normal steering wheel state, wait for about 5 seconds
and start the engine.
• When removing the steering wheel, take care not to shock the power steering assembly.
• When replacing the power steering assembly, replace it as a whole assembly and do not disassemble motor,
torque sensor, etc..
• When replacing the power steering gear case, replace it as a whole assembly.
5. Cautions in servicing
• If two or more error codes are stored, perform failure diagnosis starting from the error code displayed first (whose
flashing time is lowest).
• When performing failure diagnosis based on the error code because the symptom complained of by the customer
has no repeatability, obtain from the customer’s detailed information about the conditions at the time of warning
lamp going on and perform a test under the same conditions as much as possible. If the warning lamp does not
go on in the test running, check for imperfect contact, etc. by shaking the harness or connector while following the
failure diagnosis chart.
• Do not connect or disconnect the connector with main switch turned ON.
5-S1
STEERING
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
2. TROUBLESHOOTING
[1] TROUBLESHOOTING BASED ON EACH SYMPTOM
Symptom
Can not steer
Hard Steering
Difference in
Hardness between
Right and Left
Steering
Idling Speed is
Reduced When
Steering Wheel is
Operated
Probable Cause
Solution
Reference
Page
Wiring harness disconnected or immproperly
connected
Repair or replace
–
Broken power steering assembly
Replace
5-S17
Broken power steering gear case
Replace
5-S20
Broken power steering linkage
Repair or replace
–
Follow the EPS controller failure diagnosis
Check or replace
5-S3
Identify the number of flashing times of the
warning lamp and check according to the failure
diagnosis table
Check or replace
5-S15
Battery discharge or defective
Check or replace
G-31
Insufficient tire pressure
Inflate
G-23
Improper front alignment
Adjust
4-S4
Steering wheel mechanical system defective
Check or replace
5-S17, S20
diagnosis table
Check or replace
5-S15
EPS controller right and left steering power
Adjust
5-S21
Insufficient tire pressure
Inflate
G-23
Improper front alignment
Adjust
4-S4
Steering wheel mechanical system defective
Check or replace
5-S17, S20
diagnosis table
Check or replace
5-S15
Battery or alternator defective
Check or replace
G-31
Wiring harness disconnected or immproperly
connected
Repair or replace
–
W1014322
5-S2
STEERING
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
[2] TROUBLESHOOTING BASED ON ERROR CODE
EPS SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE
Symptom
Error Code 02
Error Code 03
Error Code 05
Error Code 06
Error Code 11
Probable Cause
Reference
Page
Solution
4P connector disconnected
Connect the
connector
5-S13
30A fuse blown
Replace the fuse
5-S24
Harness of 4P connector broken or
disconnected
Replace or repair
5-S13
Resistance of the motor infinite
Replace the column
assembly
5-S17
Pin No.3 of 4P connector grounded
Secure continuity of
the grounding section
5-S23
All of the above are founded not to be the cause
Replace the EPS
controller
5-S17
4P and 16P connectors to the EPS controller
Disconnect both
connectors, wait for
20 seconds then
reconnect them to
the controller.
Repeat turning ON
and OFF the engine
and check if the error
occurs again.
If not, check the
harness and relevant
sections.
5-S13
EPS controller is not normal
Replace
5-S17
Motor harness ground-shorted
Repair or replace
5-S13
Motor harness is normal but error remains
Replace the EPS
controller
5-S17
Repair or replace
5-S13
Short between motor harness pins
Replace the harness
or column assembly
5-S13
Both of the above are found not to be the cause
Replace the EPS
controller
5-S17
Torque sensor harness coupler disconnected
Connect the coupler
5-S13
Torque sensor coupler water-damaged
Clean and dry the
inside of the coupler
5-S13
16P coupler water-damaged
Clean and dry the
5-S13
All of the above are found not to be the cause
Replace the EPS
controller
5-S17
Perform fail-safe history erasing before
checking the following probable causes.
W1014322
5-S3
STEERING
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Symptom
Error Code 12 and 13
Error Code 15
Error Code 17
Error Code 19 and 22
Error Code 23
Probable Cause
Solution
Reference
Page
Perform fail-safe history erasing before
checking the following probable causes.
Torque sensor coupler water-damaged
Clean and dry the
5-S13
16P coupler water-damaged
Clean and dry the
5-S13
Both of the above are found not to be the cause
Replace the EPS
controller
5-S17
Connect the
connector
5-S13
30A fuse blown
Replace the fuse
5-S24
Inside of connector 4P dirty or water-damaged
Clean and dry the
5-S13
Replace the EPS
controller
5-S17
Clean and dry the
5-S13
Repair or replace the
harness
5-S13
5-S23
Replace the EPS
controller
5-S17
Repeat turning ON
and OFF the engine
occurs again. If not,
check the harness
and relevant sections
again.
5-S13
Replace the EPS
controller
5-S17
Connect the
connector
5-S13
30A fuse blown
Replace the fuse
5-S24
5-S23
Battery voltage low
Charge or replace
the battery
G-31
Replace the EPS
controller
5-S17
W1014322
5-S4
STEERING
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Symptom
Error Code 32
Error Code 34
Error Code 35
Probable Cause
Reference
Page
Solution
Set the right and left steering force of EPS
controller, start the engine, then check and
solve
EPS controller is normal but error remains
Repeat turning ON
and OFF the engine
occurs again.
If not, check the
harness and relevant
sections again.
5-S13
Disconnect 4P and
16P connectors, wait
for 20 seconds then
reconnect them to
the controller
5-S13
All of the above solutions are not effective
Replace the EPS
controller
5-S17
EPS controller is normal but error remains
Repeat turning ON
and OFF the engine
occurs again. If not,
check the harness
and relevant sections
5-S13
Replace the EPS
controller
5-S17
Battery voltage low
Charge or replace
the battery
G-31
Battery voltage 16V or more
Repair the regulator
8-S17
Battery voltage is normal but error remains
Replace the EPS
controller
5-S17
Disconnect 4P and 16P connectors, wait for
20 seconds, then reconnect them to the
controller
W1014322
5-S5
STEERING
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Item
Allowable Limit
Less than 15 mm
Less than 0.59 in.
–
30 to 50 N
3.1 to 5.1 kgf
66 to 110 lbs
–
Difference in Steering Force of Steering Wheel between Right
and Left
Less than 25 %
–
Steering Load
Engine stopped
(Without power
assisting)
Less than 150 N
Less than 15 kgf
Less than 33 lbs
–
Engine started
(With power
assisting)
Less than 30 N
Less than 3 kgf
Less than 6.6 lbs
–
Turning Torque
(Steering Mechanical System)
Without power
assisting
Less than 2.0 N·m
Less than 0.20 kgf·m
Less than 1.4 ft-lbs
–
Turning Torque
(Power Steering Gear Case)
Without power
assisting
Less than 3.6 N·m
–
Steering Wheel Play
Throttle Lever Operating Force
W1013874
5-S6
STEERING
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Item
N·m
kgf·m
ft-lbs
19.6 to 24.5
2.0 to 2.5
14.5 to 18.1
108.8 to 130.3
11.1 to 13.3
80.3 to 96.2
Lock nut
62.7 to 72.5
6.4 to 7.4
46.3 to 53.5
Power steering gear case mounting screw
40.2 to 47.0
4.1 to 4.8
29.7 to 34.7
Steering wheel mounting nut
W1012736
5-S7
STEERING
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
(1) Warning Lamp
Checking of EPS System
When the main switch is set to the ON position (B), the EPS
controller detects the voltage signal from the oil switch (1) and
makes the warning lamp (2) glow for 5 seconds.
■ Check Test
1. Start the engine.
2. Check that the warning lamp glows for 5 seconds and then goes
off.
3. If the warning lamp does not go on, check if the harness is
connected properly.
4. If the warning lamp does not stop glowing, replace the EPS
controller and check again.
(1) Oil Switch
(2) Warning Lamp
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
MAIN SWITCH
OIL SWITCH
WARNING LAMP
Going on
Going off
“OFF” position
“ON” position
“PREHEAT” position
“START” position
W1012253
5-S8
STEERING
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Checking of Warning Lamp
• The fail-safe codes recorded in the controller start flashing in the
ascending order.
(There may be just one code.)
• After one cycle of the flashing codes, there is a longer period of
no-flash time.
Example: Fail-safe codes #11, #12 and #13 flashing
List of flashing fail-safe codes (torque sensor in trouble)
White wire
Red wire
Black wire
Wire broken before engine
started
Problem
#11
#11
#13
Wire broken during engine
running
#11, #12
#11
#11, #13
■ IMPORTANT
• Suppose that there is no fail-safe code recorded. Just when
the main switch is set at ON position and the oil switch’s 1P
connector disconnected, the warning lamp lights up and
stays on for 5 seconds, it then goes out. This means there
is no problem with the EPS controller. Check the power
steering assembly, gear case’s turning torque, and the
hydraulic switch performance.
■ Action
If the code #11, #12 or #13 flashes, the torque sensor harness
may have poor contact or broken wire. Carry out “Checking the
power steering assembly” and “Checking the wire harness”, and
erase the codes referring to the instructions. If there is no flashing,
take the steps of “Checking the voltages”.
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
Display
Flashing Displayed
Flashing Time (sec.)
ON
(E)
(F)
(G)
(H)
OFF
Between Codes
After one Cycle
Example : Codes #11 and #13
(1) Low Time Flashing (1 time)
(2) Short Time Flashing (1 time)
(3) Short Time Flashing (1 time)
W1012533
5-S9
STEERING
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
(2) Torque Sensor Cable
Checking Torque Sensor Cable
1. Keep the main switch at ON position (B) and disconnect the 1P
connector (1) from the oil switch. Check to see if the power
steering system works. (Do not start the engine.)
2. Lightly bend the root of the torque sensor cable to see if the
steering wheel turns unexpectedly or unstably.
CAUTION
• Be careful not to get yourself caught by the steering wheel
or tire.
• Do not pull the cable too much.
■ IMPORTANT
• If the steering wheel turns unexpectedly or unstably, detach
the panel and check the connector and power steering
assembly. If they are okay, go to “Checking the wire
harness.
(1) 1P Connector
(2) Torque Sensor Cable
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
“OFF” Position
“ON” Position
“PREHEAT” Position
“START” Position
W1013061
5-S10
STEERING
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
(3) Torque Sensor 3P Connector
Checking Torque Sensor 3P Connector
■ IMPORTANT
• While disassembling, handle the power steering assembly,
controller and wire harness with enough care.
To
disconnect the steering wheel, be sure to use the steering
wheel puller (1) and puller adaptor (2), never any hammer.
Excessive load or impact on the parts may result in trouble.
• To disconnect the connector, press the connector's lock
and hold the connector itself. Never pull the cable.
1. Check the torque sensor 3P connector (3) and related parts for
the following defects.
- Terminal off position
- Terminal deformed or crushed
- Female terminal too open
- Entry of foreign matters, water, etc.
- Rubber sealing missing
- Broken wire or sheath
2. If any of the above problems is found, repair the trouble spot or
replace the power steering assembly with new one. If there is no
problem, go to the following check point.
(1) Steering Wheel Puller
(2) Puller Adaptor
W1013417
5-S11
STEERING
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
(4) Torque sensor 3P Connector Terminal
Checking the Resistance of the Torque Sensor 3 Connector
Terminal
1. Using a circuit tester, measure the terminal resistance between
the red and black wires, as well as that between the white and
black wires of torque sensor 3P connector (1).
2. If out of specification replace the power steering assembly with
new one. If the resistance is okay, go to “checking the wire
harness”.
Resistance
red-black
white-black
13.0 to 15.0 Ω
Factory spec.
■ IMPORTANT
• Before measuring the resistance, lightly bend the root of the
cable and gently pull it for easy, reliable checking. Be
careful to keep the circuit tester probes tight at the
terminals.
■ NOTE
• The steering wheel turns in different directions on the
broken wires.
Problem
Defect
Unexpected turn
clockwise
Red or black wire in poor contact
Black/white wire in poor contact (Harness side)
Unexpected turn
counterclockwise
White wire in poor contact
(2) Cable
(a) White
(b) Black
(c) Red
W1013879
5-S12
STEERING
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
(5)
Wire Harness
Checking the Torque Sensor Connectors for Poor Contact
1. Check the torque sensor 3P connector (1) and related parts for
the following defects.
- Terminal off position
- Terminal deformed or crushed
- Female terminal too open: Improper connection (6)
- Rubber sealing missing
- Broken wire or sheath
■ IMPORTANT
2. Visually check to see if the 3 terminals (8), (9) and (10), as shown
below, are open as specified.
Compare these terminals with the other ones for equal clearance.
If any of them is too open, correct as follows.
3. Correction
Put a precision regular screwdriver (0.9 mm (0.035 in.) or thinner
tip) in the opening. Adjust the clearance to the specified value.
Coupler Pin Inside
Clearance (L)
Factory spec.
0 to 0.1 mm
0 to 0.0039 in.
4. If any of the above problems is found, repair the trouble spot of
replace the wire harness with new one. If there is no problem, go
to “Checking the harness for continuity”
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
Torque Sensor 3 Connector
4P Connector (ECU)
3P Connector (Service)
2P Connector (Motor)
16P Connector (ECU)
Improper Connection
Proper Connection
Black/White Wire (Torque Sensor)
Red Wire (Torque Sensor)
(10) White Wire (Torque Sensor)
(11) Notch
(12) EPS Controller 16P Connector
(As view from the wire-connected
side)
(A) Clearance : L
(B) Clearance : L
(C) Put a Screwdriver
W1014281
5-S13
STEERING
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
(6) Checking Voltage
Checking the Battery Terminal Voltage
1. Measure the voltage between the positive (+) and negative (-)
battery terminals (1), (2).
2. If the voltage is out of factory specification, recharge the battery
and go to the following checking.
Battery voltage
Factory spec.
More than 12V
■ IMPORTANT
• After jump-starting the machine's engine, keep the support
vehicle's engine also running for 5 minutes or longer. Then
disconnect the booster cables (after the battery voltage is
restored).
(1) Positive Terminal
(2) Negative Terminal
W1016318
Checking 16P and 4P Connectors to EPS Controller
1. Disconnect the steering wheel with the steering wheel puller (1)
and puller adaptror (2) carefully. Do not use any hammer.
2. Detach panel and make the following check. with the main switch
at ON position (do not start the engine), measure the voltages
between following terminals.
3. Measuring the voltage at the 16P connector (6) with the main
switch at ON position (do not start the engine), measure the
voltage between the black (3), (4) and red/white (7) terminals.
4. Measuring the voltage at the 4P connector (8) with the main
switch at OFF position, measure the voltage between the green
(11) and black (12) terminals.
■ IMPORTANT
• While disassembling, handle the power steering assembly,
controller and wire harness with enough care.
To
disconnect the steering wheel, be sure to use the steering
wheel puller, never any hammer.
Excessive load or impact on the parts may result in trouble.
Controller 4P Connector
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(11)
Green
Battery (+)
(10)
Blue
Motor (+)
(12)
Black
GND
(9)
Black / white
Motor (-)
Steering Wheel Puller
(7) Red/white Terminal
Puller Adaptor
(8) Controller 4P Connector (view from
Black Terminal (GND)
the wire-connected side)
Black Terminal (GND)
(9) Black/white Terminal
Notch
(10) Blue Terminal
EPS Controller 16P Connector (view (11) Green Terminal
from the wire-connected side)
(12) Black Terminal
W1016611
5-S14
STEERING
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Checking Continuity between the Torque Sensor 3P Connector
and EPS Controller 16P Connector
1. Using a circuit tester, check continuity between the terminals.
Refer to the figure below.
Resistance
(between same color terminal)
Factory spec.
0Ω
Resistance
(between different color terminal)
Factory spec.
∞Ω
2. If the resistance is out of factory specification, repair or replace
the wire harness with new one. If the resistance is okay, replace
the power steering assembly with new one.
■ IMPORTANT
• In checking continuity, also swing the cable behind the
connector.
Be very careful to keep the circuit tester probes tight at the
terminals.
(2) EPS Controller 16P Connector (view
from the wire connected side)
(3) Notch
(4) Black/White Terminal
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
Red Terminal
White Terminal
White Terminal
Black Terminal
Red Terminal
W1017512
(7) Error Codes and Defective Sections
Read the error code on the warning lamp display and refer to the table below to check the defective sections.
System name
Power system
Torque sensor system
EPS controller inside
Error
code
02
03
05
06
15
17
19
22
11
12
13
23
32
34
35
Estimated defective section
Power
source
✩
Fuse 30A
Sensor
✩
Motor
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
EPS Controller
4P
16P
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
Reset
#1
#2
#1
Reference
Page
5-S3
5-S3
5-S3
5-S3
5-S4
5-S4
5-S4
5-S4
5-S3
5-S4
5-S4
5-S4
5-S5
5-S5
5-S5
W1018006
■ NOTE
• Resetting method (Reset after performing checking based on the error code.)
#1: Turn off the main switch and then turn it on.
#2: Perform fail-safe history erasing.
5-S15
STEERING
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
(8) Steering Wheel Play
Steering Wheel Play
1. Turn the front wheels straight ahead.
2. Rotate the steering wheel lightly by hand, and measure the play.
3. If the measurement exceeds the factory specification, replace the
steering shaft and sector gear.
Steering wheel play
Factory spec.
Less than 15 mm
Less than 0.59 in.
W1019944
(9)
1. Set a spring balance at 20 mm (0.79 in.) below the tip of the
throttle lever, and measure the operating force.
2. If the operating force is not within the factory specifications, turn
the flange nut to adjust.
Throttle lever operating
force
Factory spec.
30 to 50 N
3.1 to 5.1 kgf
66 to 110 lbs
W1020146
5-S16
STEERING
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
(1) Separating Power Steering Assembly and EPS Controller
Battery and Bonnet
(1) Radiator Screen
(2) Head Light
(3) 1P Connectors
(4) Wiring
(5) Bonnet Bracket
W1020278
Wiring
1. Remove the indicator lamps (4).
2. Disconnect 1P connector (3) from the hour meter.
3. Disconnect 1P connector (1) from the light switch.
4. Disconnect 4P connector (2) from the main switch.
(1) 1P Connector
(2) 4P Connector
(3) 1P Connector
(4) Indicator Lamp
W1020553
Parking Lock Pedal
1. Remove the parking lock pedal mounting nut (2).
2. Remove the parking lock pedal (1) from the brake lock.
(When reassembling)
■ IMPORTANT
• Using the oval hole, make such adjustment that he parking
lock pedal be kept out of contact with the panel over the
entire stroke.
• Step on the brake pedal and parking lock pedal at once, and
make sure that the speed change pedal gets locked.
• If the speed change pedal fails to get locked, set this pedal
to the neutral position and readjust the brake lock (3) so that
the lock pin (5) comes into the notch (4).
(1) Parking Lock Pedal
(2) Parking Lock Pedal Mounting Nut
(3) Brake Lock
(4) Notch
(5) Lock Pin
W1020703
5-S17
STEERING
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Steering Wheel
1. Remove the grip of the throttle lever (1).
2. Remove the steering pad and remove the steering wheel
mounting nut.
3. Remove the steering wheel using the steering wheel puller
(Code. No. 07916-51090) and steering wheel puller adaptor.
■ IMPORTANT
• When removing steering wheel, to use steering wheel puller.
Not to use the hammer to prevent electric power steering
from damaging.
• Remove the steering wheel after setting it to the straight
ahead position.
(When reassembling)
Tightening torque
Steering wheel mounting
nut
19.6 to 24.5 N·m
2.0 to 2.5 kgf·m
14.5 to 18.1 ft-lbs
(1) Throttle Lever
W1020923
Separating Panel
3. Remove the panel mounting screws (1).
4. Separate the panel.
(When reassembling)
the figure.
(1) Panel Mounting Screw
(2) Step Sheet
(3) Panel
A: Less than 2.0 mm (0.079 in.)
W1022194
Wiring and EPS controller
1. Disconnect 2P connector (4) from the motor.
2. Disconnect 3P connector from the torque sensor.
3. Disconnect 4P connector (1) and 16P connector (2) from the EPS
controller.
4. Remove the EPS controller (3).
(When reassembling)
■ IMPORTANT
• Be sure to perform right and left steering power setting (See
page 5-S21).
■ NOTE
• Take care not to drop the EPS controller.
• When installing the EPS controller, take care not to pinch the
wire or interfere with other parts.
(1) 4P Connector
(2) 16P Connector
(3) EPS Connector
(4) 2P connector
W1022449
5-S18
STEERING
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Throttle Lever Assembly and Power Steering Assembly
1. Remove the throttle lever assembly (1).
2. Remove the fuse plate (2).
3. Remove the universal joint mounting screw.
4. Remove the power steering assembly mounting screws (3).
5. Remove the power steering assembly with universal joint.
(When reassembling)
• There is a yoke at the center of the universal joint. Loosen the
screw to let the center yoke (7) slide itself smoothly.
• Install the power steering assembly with universal joint.
• To reconnect the universal joint, tighten the lower and upper yoke
screws (6), (9) first and then the center yoke screw (8).
■ IMPORTANT
• Apply grease to the sliding parts.
• Apply oil to the throttle cable.
• Pay attention to the combination of the disk springs as
shown in the figure.
(Reference)
• Setting length “L”: 10 mm (0.39 in.)
(1) Throttle Lever Assembly
(2) Fuse Plate
(3) Power Steering Assembly Mounting
Screws
(4) Throttle Lever
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
Disk Springs
Lower Yoke Screw
Center Yoke
Center Yoke Screw
Upper Yoke Screw
W1022705
5-S19
STEERING
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
(2)
Power Steering Gear Case
Power Steering Gear Case
1. Remove the rod end mounting nut.
2. Remove the rod end (1).
3. Remove the power steering gear case mounting screws (4).
4. Remove the power steering gear case (3) with the rod end.
(When reassembling)
• Set the toe-in properly.
• Turn the front wheels straight ahead (neutral).
• As shown in the figure, align the center (A) of the power steering
gear case with the center (B) of the power steering gear case
shaft.
■ IMPORTANT
• After assembling the power steering gear case, be sure to
adjust the toe-in. (See page 4-S4.)
• Replace the rod end mounting nut with a new one.
(Reference)
• Setting length “L”: 382 mm (15.04 in.)
• Stroke center position “M”: 206 mm (8.11 in.)
Tightening torque
(1) Rod End
(2) Lock Nut
108.8 to 130.3 N·m
11.1 to 13.3 kgf·m
80.3 to 96.2 ft-lbs
Lock nut
62.7 to 72.5 N·m
6.4 to 7.4 kgf·m
46.3 to 53.5 ft-lbs
Power steering gear case
mounting screw
40.2 to 47.0 N·m
4.1 to 4.8 kgf·m
29.7 to 34.7 ft-lbs
(4) Power Steering Gear Case Mounting
Screws
W1023119
5-S20
STEERING
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
[3] SERVICING
EPS Controller Right and Left Steering Force Setting at Neutral
Position
■ IMPORTANT
• If this setting procedure is wrongly taken, the neutral
position cannot be programmed in the controller. To take
the procedure over again, be sure to go back to Setting
Method No. 4 (with the main switch at off and the service
connector (1) fit in position).
■ Setting Method
2. Jack up or lift up the front frame.
3. Using a wooden wedge, etc., prevent the front axle assembly
from oscillating.
4. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise onequarter turn each.
5. Turn the front wheels and steering wheel straight ahead (neutral).
6. Turn on the main switch.
7. Disconnect the connector for servicing (1).
8. Turn off the main switch.
9. Connect the connector for servicing (1).
10.Lower the front frame.
■ IMPORTANT
• Do not start the engine while setting.
• Correct setting cannot be made if external force is applied to
the steering wheel during setting.
Therefore take care not to apply external force to the
steering wheel.
■ Check Test
2. Disconnect 1P connector (2) from the oil switch.
3. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to check
for difference in steering force.
4. If difference in steering force is found, make setting again.
5. Connect the connector to the oil switch.
■ IMPORTANT
• When making setting again, turn off the main switch and
wait or 10 seconds or more before doing so.
• If the connector (2) of the oil switch is left disconnected, a
malfunction could be ceased after starting the engine.
Difference in steering
force of steering wheel
between right and left
(1) Connector for Servicing
Factory spec.
Less than 25 %
(2) 1P Connector
W1023981
5-S21
STEERING
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Erasing Fail Safe History
■ IMPORTANT
• Do not start the engine while erasing.
• If the code erasing procedure is wrongly taken, the code
cannot be erased. To take the procedure over again, go
back to Setting Method No. 3 (with the main switch at OFF
and the service connector fit in position).
• In case of the occurrence of error code 11, 12 or 13, be sure
to perform history erasing according to the following
procedure.
■ Setting Method
5. Disconnect 1P connector (2) from the oil switch.
6. Turn off the main switch.
8. Connect 1P connector (2) to the oil switch of the engine.
■ Check Test
1. Comply with the check test for right and left steering force setting.
(2) 1P Connector
W1024460
Measurement of Steering Wheel Operation Load
1. Park the machine on level concrete surface.
3. Attach a spring scale to the steering wheel.
4. Pull the spring scale in the direction tangent to the steering
wheel.
5. Read the operation load on the scale at the time of the tire
starting to move.
6. If the operation load is out of the factory specification, check the
steering mechanical system.
Operation load
(engine stopped)
(without power assisting)
Factory spec.
Less than 150 N
Less than 15 kg
Less than 33 lbs
Operation load
(engine started)
(with power assistiong)
Factory spec.
Less than 30 N
Less than 3 kg
Less than 6.6 lbs
W1025007
5-S22
STEERING
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Checking of Steering Mechanical System
■ Checking of Power Steering Assembly
1. Remove the steering wheel.
2. Remove the power steering assembly.
3. Remove the universal joint.
4. Install the power steering assembly.
5. Attach a torque wrench to the steering shaft.
6. Measure the turning torque of the steering shaft.
7. If the measurement is not within the factory specification, replace
the power steering assembly.
Turning torque (without
power assisting)
■
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Factory spec.
Less than 2.0 N·m
Checking of Power Steering Gear Case
Remove the steering wheel.
Remove the rod end (1).
Attach a torque wrench to the steering shaft.
Measure the turning torque of the steering shaft.
If the measurement is not within the factory specification, replace
the power steering gear case (2).
Turning torque (without
power assisting)
Factory spec.
(1) Rod End
Less than 3.6 N·m
W1025253
Voltage Measurement of 4P Connector of EPS Controller
1. Connect the leads of circuit tester to pins No. 2 (Blue) and No. 4
(Black/White) of EPS controller 4P connector from behind.
3. Disconnect 1P connector from the oil switch.
4. Measure the voltage between pins No. 2 (Blue) and No. 4 (Black/
White) with the steering wheel set to the straight ahead position.
■ IMPORTANT
• Use a digital-type tester.
An analog-type tester could be damaged if used for this
measurement.
PIN No.
WIRING
COLOR
PIN
SYMBOL
PIN NAME
1
Green
VBU
BATTERY VOLTAGE(+)
2
Blue
M+
MOTOR(+)
3
Black
P-GND
POWER GROUND
4
Black / White
M-
MOTOR(-)
W1025709
5-S23
STEERING
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Checking EPS Controller for Trouble
1. To see if the EPS controller is in trouble, disconnect the 4P (2)
and 16P (3) connectors from the controller. Without the
controller, set the main switch to “ON” position (B) and see if the
IG/M fuse (10A) (c) blows out.
2. When the IG/M fuse (c) does not blow out, replace the controller
(4) with new one.
Make sure also that the battery cable terminals are tight enough.
If the IG/M fuse (c) blows out, check the wire harness for defect.
Repair as required.
FUSE NO.
(ID LABEL)
1
CAPACITY
(A)
Electric power steering motor
circuit
(a) EPS MT
30
(b) E/G STOP
15
Engine stop timer relay
10
Fuel pump, head light, power
steering control unit, etc.
(c) IG/M
2
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Protected circuit
–
Fuse
4P Connector
16P Connector
EPS Controller
Slow blow fuse 40
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
Check circuit against wrong
battery connection
“OFF” Position
“ON” Position
W1026098
5-S24
STEERING
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
(1) EPS Check Sheet
Check Sheet 1 : When steering wheel rotates to one direction, check and take measures in order as follows.
Tire Straight
2. Jack up or lift up the front frame.
3. Using a wooden wedge (1) to prevent the front axle assembly
from oscillating.
4. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise onequarter turn each.
(1) Wooden Wedge
Resetting
1. Turn ON (B) the main switch.
3. Turn OFF (A) the main switch.
5. If the condition of steering wheel does not improve, check 16P
connector of the controller. (See page 5-S26.)
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
“OFF” Position
“ON” Position
5-S25
STEERING
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Checking 16P connector
1. Check 16P connector (1).
2. If the condition of steering wheel does not improve, repair the
terminal.
3. If the condition of steering wheel does not improve, check torque
sensor 3P connector terminal resistance. (See below.)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
16P Connector
Black / White Wire
Red Wire
White Wire
Impropper (too Wide) : (Correction
Needed)
(6) Propper
L : 0 to 0.1 mm (0 to 0.0039 in.)
Checking torque sensor 3P connector terminal resistance
1. Check torque sensor 3P connector terminal resistance.
2. If the condition of steering wheel still does not improve, change
the motor, then reset neutral and erase memory (See page 5S28).
Resistance
red-black
white-black
Factory spec.
(2) Cable
13.0 to 15.0 Ω
(a) White
(b) Black
(c) Red
5-S26
STEERING
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Check Sheet 2 : When steering turning force in heavy.
Checking 16P Connector
1. Check 16P connector (1).
2. If the condition of steering wheel does not improve, repair the
terminal.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
16P Connector
Black / White Wire
Red Wire
White Wire
Impropper (too Wide) : (Correction
Needed)
(6) Propper
L : 0 to 0.1 mm (0 to 0.0039 in.)
5-S27
STEERING
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Resetting Neutral and Erasing Memory
1. Turn ON the main switch.
3. Disconnect the oil switch 1P connector (2).
4. Turn OFF the main switch.
6. Connect the oil switch 1P connector (2).
7. If the condition of steering wheel does not improve, check torque
sensor 3P connector terminal resistance. (See page 5-S26.)
(2) Oil Switch 1P Connector
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
“OFF” Position
“ON” Position
5-S28
6
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
MECHANISM
CONTENTS
1. HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT .................................................................................. 6-M1
[1] G21LD (LOW DUMP)............................................................................. 6-M1
[2] G21HD (HIGH DUMP) ............................................................................ 6-M2
2. RELIEF VALVE (G21LD, G21HD) ............................................................... 6-M3
3. MOWER LIFTING CIRCUIT (G21LD, G21HD) ........................................... 6-M3
[1] NEUTRAL ................................................................................................ 6-M3
[2] UP ............................................................................................................ 6-M4
[3] DOWN...................................................................................................... 6-M4
4. GRASS COLLECTOR LIFT CYLINDER CIRCUIT (G21LD)..................... 6-M5
[1] NEUTRAL ................................................................................................ 6-M5
[2] OPEN ....................................................................................................... 6-M5
[3] CLOSE ..................................................................................................... 6-M6
5. GRASS COLLECTOR LIFT CYLINDER WITH AUXILIARY CONTROL
VALVE CIRCUIT (G21HD)........................................................................... 6-M7
[1] NEUTRAL ................................................................................................ 6-M7
[2] UP ............................................................................................................ 6-M7
[3] DOWN...................................................................................................... 6-M8
6. GRASS COLLECTOR ROTATING CYLINDER WITH
AUXILIARY
CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT (G21HD) ....................................................... 6-M9
[1] NEUTRAL ................................................................................................ 6-M9
[2] ROTATE (TILT BACKWARD) .............................................................. 6-M10
[3] RETURN (TILT FORWARD)................................................................ 6-M11
7. GRASS COLLECTOR LIFT CYLINDER (G21LD) ................................... 6-M12
8. GRASS COLLECTOR LIFT CYLINDER AND ROTATING CYLINDER
(G21HD) ....................................................................................................... 6-M13
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
1. HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
[1] G21LD (LOW DUMP)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Transmission Case
(7) Filter Relief Valve
Oil Strainer
(8) Oil Filter Cartridge
Charge Pump
(9) Control Valve
Hydrostatic Transmission
(10) Mower Lift Cylinder
(HST)
(11) Grass Collector Lift Cylinder
(5) Main Relief Valve
(6) Valve (for Mower Lift Cylinder)
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
Port A
Port B
Up
Down
Grass Collector Open
Grass Collector Close
P1 :Pump Port
DR1 :Drain Port
RT1 :Return Port
T1, T2, T3, T4 :Tank Port
N : Neutral Port
IN : Inlet Port
OUT :Outlet Port
CL :Cylinder Port
6-M1
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
[2] G21HD (HIGH DUMP)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
Transmission Case
Oil Strainer
Charge Pump
Hydrostatic Transmission (HST)
Main Relief Valve
Valve (for Mower Lift Cylinder)
Filter Relief Valve
Oil Filter Cartridge
Control Valve
Mower Lift Cylinder
Valve (for High Dump Lift
Cylinder)
Valve (for Rotating Cylinder)
Grass Collector Rotating
Cylinder
Grass Collector Lift Cylinder
Auxiliary Control Valve
(High Dump Control Valve)
A : Port A
B : Port B
C : Up
D : Down
E : Up
F : Down
G : Rotate (Tilt)
H : Return (Tilt)
P1 : Pump Port
DR1, DR2 :Drain Port
RT1, RT2:Return Port
T1, T2, T3, T4: Tank Port
N : Neutral Port
PB1 :Power Beyond Port
PB2 :Power Beyond Port
IN : Inlet Port
OUT:Outlet Port
CL : Cylinder Port
DA :Dump Port A
DB :Dump Port B
SA : Lift Port A
SB : Lift Port B
W1013048
6-M2
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
2. RELIEF VALVE (G21LD, G21HD)
This machine is equipped with two direct-acting relief
valves (11), (12).
The main relief valve (12) serves to control the
pressures of the mower lift cylinder and grass collector
cylinder and to protect the entire hydraulic system
against damage.
The filter relief valve (11) is used to protect the entire
hydraulic system from an excessive pressure that would
be caused by a clogged oil filter.
These relief valves consist of poppet valve, spring,
shims and plug.
When the oil pressure in the circuit is lower than the
setting pressure of the relief valve, the poppet is closed
by the spring.
When the oil pressure rises above the valve setting
pressure and overcomes the spring force, the valve
opens. The oil then flows out to the transmission case,
preventing any further rise in pressure. The relief valve
closes again when enough oil is released to drop
pressure below the valve setting pressure.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Bolt
Washer with Rubber
Shim
Spring
Steal Ball
Poppet
Spring
Shim
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
O-ring
Plug
Filter Relief Valve
Main Relief Valve
P: Pump Port
T1, T2: Tank Port
W1012822
3. MOWER LIFTING CIRCUIT (G21LD, G21HD)
In this hydraulic system, the mower lifting circuit is given priority to the grass collector dumping circuit.
Suppose that the grass collector dumping spool 2 (9) is in the neutral position.
[1] NEUTRAL
The oil coming from port P1 flows to port T1.
The oil then flows through the oil filter and back to the
hydrostatic transmission (HST).
The port CL, which is connected with the mower lift
cylinder, stays closed by the spool 1 (for mower cylinder)
(2). In this way, the mower is held at a certain level.
(1) Packing
(2) Spool 1 (for Mower Cylinder)
(3) Plain Washer
(4) Collar
(5) Return Spring
(6) O-Ring
(7) Snap Ring
(8) Plug
(9) Spool 2
(10) Plug (Oil Passage) (G21HD
only)
A : Port A
B : Port B
CL : Mower Lift Cylinder Port
N : Neutral Port
P1 : Pump Port
T1, T2, T3, T4 : Tank Port
W1012668
6-M3
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
[2] UP
Move the mower lifting lever to the “UP” position, and
the spool 1 (for mower cylinder) (1) is activated in the
direction shown in the figure.
The oil coming from port P1 flows through port CL into
the mower lift cylinder. In this way, the mower is lifted.
(1) Spool (for Mower Cylinder)
A : Port A
B : Port B
N : Neutral Port
P1 : Pump Port
(a) Up
[3] DOWN
Move the mower lifting lever to the “DOWN” position,
and the spool 1 (for mower cylinder) (1) is activated in the
The oil coming from port P1 flows through port T1.
The oil in the mower lift cylinder, on the other hand,
flows through port CL into port T2.
The resultant oil returns directly to the transmission.
In this way, the mower goes down.
The mower lifting spool has a groove (2), which helps
lower the mower slowly. (See the throttle symbol in the
Hydraulic Circuit Diagram.)
(1) Spool (for Mower Cylinder)
(2) Groove
A : Port A
B : Port B
N : Neutral Port
P1 : Pump Port
(b) Down
6-M4
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
4. GRASS
(G21LD)
COLLECTOR
LIFT
CYLINDER
CIRCUIT
Suppose that the mower lifting spool 1 (1) is in the neutral position.
[1] NEUTRAL
The oil coming from port P1 flows to port T1.
Port A and B that are connected with the grass
collector lift cylinder are kept closed by the spool 2 (for
grass collector lift cylinder) (2). In this way, the grass
collector is held at a certain level.
(1) Mower Lifting Spool
A : Lift Port A
(2) Spool 2
B : Lift Port B
(for Grass Collector Cylinder) CL :Mower Lift Cylinder Port
N : Neutral Port
P1 :Pump Port
W1014005
[2] OPEN
Move the grass collector dumping lever to the “LIFT”
position, and the spool 2 (for grass collector lift cylinder)
(1) is activated in the direction shown in the figure.
This cylinder is of double-acting type.
The oil coming from port P1 flows through port B into
the grass collector cylinder.
The oil in the grass collector lift cylinder, on the other
hand, flows through port A into port T1. In this way, the
grass collector is lifted.
(1) Spool 2
A : Lift Port A
(for Grass Collector Cylinder) B : Lift Port B
CL :Mower Lift Cylinder Port
N : Neutral Port
P1 :Pump Port
(a) Open
W1014231
6-M5
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
[3] CLOSE
Move the grass collector dumping lever to the
“DOWN” position, and the spool 2 (for grass collector lift
cylinder) (1) is activated in the direction shown in the
figure.
The oil coming from port P1 flows through port A into
the grass collector lift cylinder.
The oil in the grass collector lift cylinder, on the other
hand, flows through port B into port T1. In this way, the
grass collector goes down.
(1) Spool 2
A : Lift Port A
(for Grass Collector Cylinder) B : Lift Port B
CL :Mower Lift Cylinder Port
N : Neutral Port
P1 :Pump Port
(b) Close
W1014370
6-M6
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
5. GRASS
COLLECTOR
LIFT
CYLINDER
WITH
AUXILIARY CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT (G21HD)
[1] NEUTRAL
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
Spool 1
Packing
Plain Washer
Return Spring
O-Ring
Collar
Plain Washer
External Snap Ring
Plug
Spool 2
DA: Dump Port A
DB: Dump Port B
SA: Lift Port A
SB: Lift Port B
DR2: Drain Port
PB1: Power Beyond Port
RT2: Return Port
W1013427
The oil coming from port PB1 flows to the port PB2, and then to the port T4 of main control valve.
[2] UP
(1) Spool 2 (for Lift Cylinder)
SA : Lift Port A
SB : Lift Port B
PB1 : Power Beyond Port
RT2 : Return Port
(a) UP
W1013662
Move the grass collector control lever to the “UP” position, the spool 2 (1) is activated in the direction shown in the
figure.
The oil coming from the port PB1 flows through the port SA into the lift cylinder to lift.
The oil in the lift cylinder, on the other hand, flows out from the port SB to the port RT2 and then to the port T4 of
main control valve.
6-M7
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
[3] DOWN
(1) Spool 2 (for Lift Cylinder)
SA : Lift Port A
SB : Lift Port B
PB1 : Power Beyond Port
RT2 : Return Port
(b) Down
W1013825
Move the grass container control lever to the “DOWN” position, the spool 2 (1) is activated in the direction shown
in the figure.
The oil coming from the port PB1 flows through the port SB into the lift cylinder to down.
The oil in the lift cylinder, on the other hand, flows out from the port SA to the port RT2 and then to the port T4 of
main control valve.
6-M8
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
6. GRASS COLLECTOR ROTATING CYLINDER WITH
AUXILIARY CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT (G21HD)
[1] NEUTRAL
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
Spool 1
Packing
Plain Washer
Return Spring
O-Ring
Collar
Plain Washer
External Snap Ring
Plug
Spool 2
DA: Dump Port A
DB: Dump Port B
SA: Lift Port A
SB: Lift Port B
DR2: Drain Port
RT2: Return Port
W1017977
The oil coming from port PB1 flows to the port PB2, and then to the port T4 of main control valve.
6-M9
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
[2] ROTATE (TILT BACKWARD)
(1) Spool 2 (for Dump Cylinder)
SA: Dump Port A
SB: Dump Port B
RT2: Return Port
(a) Tilt Backward
W1013999
Move the grass container control lever to the “TILT BACKWARD” position, the spool 1 (1) is activated in the
The oil coming from the port PB1 flows through the port DB into the rotating cylinder to rotate the collector bag.
The oil in the rotating cylinder, on the other hand, flows out from the port DA to the port RT2 and then to the port
T4 of main control valve.
6-M10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
[3] RETURN (TILT FORWARD)
(1) Spool 2 (for Rotating Cylinder)
SA: Dump Port A
SB: Dump Port B
RT2: Return Port
(b) Tilt Forward
W1014125
Move the grass container control lever to the “TILT FORWARD” position, the spool 1 (1) is activated in the
The oil coming from the port PB1 flows through the port DA into the rotating cylinder to return the collector bag.
The oil in the rotating cylinder, on the other hand, flows out from the port DB to the port RT2 and then to the port
T4 of main control valve.
6-M11
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
7. GRASS COLLECTOR LIFT CYLINDER (G21LD)
(1) Nut
(2) Piston
(3) Cylinder Tube
(4) Head
(5) Piston Rod
A : Cylinder I.D.
B : Rod O.D.
C : Stroke
The grass collector cylinder consists of a head (4), cylinder tube (3), piston rod (5), piston (2), and other parts as
shown in the above figure.
This is single rod double acting cylinder in which the reciprocating motion of the piston is controlled by hydraulic
force applied to both of its ends.
Cylinder Specifications
Cylinder I.D. (A)
Grass Collector
Rod O.D. (B)
Cylinder
Stroke (C)
60.0 mm (2.36 in.)
25.0 mm (0.98 in.)
185.0 mm (7.28 in.)
W1013717
6-M12
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
8. GRASS COLLECTOR LIFT CYLINDER AND ROTATING
CYLINDER (G21HD)
(1) Piston Rod
(2) Head
(3) Cylinder Tube
(4) Piston
(5) Nut
A : Cylinder I.D.
B : Rod O.D.
C : Stroke
Both the grass collector lift cylinder and rotating cylinder consist of a head (2), cylinder tube (3), piston rod (1),
piston (4) and other parts as shown in the figure above.
This is single-rod double acting cylinder in which the reciprocating motion of the piston is controlled by hydraulic
force applied to both of its ends.
Cylinder Specifications
Grass Collector Lift Cylinder
Grass Collector Rotating Cylinder
Cylinder tube I.D. (A)
40 mm (1.57 in.)
Rod O.D.
(B)
20 mm (0.79 in.)
Stroke
(C)
486 mm (19.1 in.)
178 mm (7.0 in.)
W1014966
6-M13
SERVICING
CONTENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
[1] CONTROL VALVE (G21LD, G21HD) ......................................................6-S5
(1) Checking and Adjusting ......................................................................6-S5
(2) Disassembling and Assembling ..........................................................6-S7
[2] AUXILIARY CONTROL VALVE (G21HD)............................................6-S14
(1) Preparation for Disassembly.............................................................6-S14
[3] CYLINDER ..............................................................................................6-S16
(1) Mower Lift Cylinder (G21LD, G21HD) ..............................................6-S16
(2) Grass Collector Cylinder (G21LD) ...................................................6-S16
(3) Grass Collector Cylinder (G21HD)...................................................6-S18
(4) Arrangement of Hydraulic Hoses (G21HD).......................................6-S21
[4] MOWER LIFT LINKAGE (G21LD, G21HD) .........................................6-S22
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
1. TROUBLESHOOTING
G21LD
Symptom
Mower Does Not
“RISE”
Probable Cause
Solution
Reference
Page
Main relief valve spring damaged
Replace
Main relief valve setting pressure too low
Adjust
6-S5
Charge pump defective
Replace
2-S15
Mower lift cylinder damaged
Replace
6-S16
Clean or Replace
G-35
Refill
G-13
Lossen or worn hydraulic hoses and adapters
Tighten or replace
Mower Does Not
“LOWER”
Control valve malfunctioning
Replace
6-S11
Mower Drops by
Its Weight
Replace
6-S11
Replace
6-S16
Loosen or worn hydraulic hoses and adapters
Tighten or replace
Replace
Adjust
6-S5
Replace
2-S15
Lift cylinder damaged
Repair or replace
6-S16
Clean or replace
G-35
Refill
G-13
Tighten or replace
Replace
6-S11
Replace
2-S15
Repair or replace
6-S16
Clean or replace
G-35
Refill
G-13
Tighten or replace
Replace
6-S11
Repair or replace
6-S16
Tighten or replace
Grass Collector Does
Not Rise
Not Lower
Grass Collector
Drops By Its Weight
6-S5 ,S12
–
–
6-S5, S11
–
–
–
W1014322
6-S1
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
G21HD
Symptom
Mower Does Not
“RISE”
Probable Cause
Solution
Reference
Page
Replace
Adjust
6-S5
Replace
2-S15
Replace
6-S16
Clean or Replace
G-35
Refill
G-13
Lossen or worn hydraulic hoses and adapters
Tighten or replace
Mower Does Not
“Lower”
Replace
6-S11
Mower Drops by
Its Weight
Replace
6-S11
Replace
6-S16
Tighten or replace
Auxiliary control valve malfunctioning
Replace
6-S14
Replace
6-S5, S11
Adjust
6-S5
Replace
2-S15
Replace
6-S18
Clean or replace
G-35
Refill
G-13
Tighten or replace
Not Lower
Replace
6-S14
Grass Collector
Drops By Its Weight
Replace
6-S14
Repair or replace
6-S18
Tighten or replace
–
Replace
6-S14
Replace
6-S5, S11
Main relief valve spring pressured too low
Replace
6-S5
Replace
2-S15
Grass Collector rotating cylinder damaged
Repair or replace
6-S19
Clean or replace
G-35
Refill
G-13
Tighten or replace
Not Rise
Not Rotate
6-S5, S12
–
–
–
–
W1014322
6-S2
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Item
Allowable Limit
Main Relief Valve
Setting Pressure
2.94 to 3.43 MPa
30.0 to 35.0 kgf/cm2
426 to 497 psi
–
Filter Relief Valve
Setting Pressure
1.96 to 2.45 MPa
20.0 to 25.0 kgf/cm2
284 to 356 psi
–
Transmission Fluid (Including HST &
cylinder)
Capacity
4.5 L
4.75 U.S.qts.
3.86 lmp.qts.
–
Rear Link to Frame Stopper
Clearance
1.0 to 2.0 mm
0.04 to 0.08 in.
–
W1010648
6-S3
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
G21LD
Item
N·m
kgf·m
ft-lbs
39.2 to 45.1
4.0 to 4.6
28.9 to 33.3
21.6
2.2
15.9
48.0 to 55.9
4.9 to 5.7
35.4 to 41.2
Adapter bolt (PS 3/8)
80.4
8.2
59.3
Drain pipe retaining bolt (9/16-18 UNF)
27.4
2.8
20.3
Adapter (on the control valve)
35.
3.6
26.0
14.7
1.5
10.8
Adapter (mower lift cylinder)
35.3
3.6
26.0
Adapter (Grass collector cylinder)
35.3
3.6
26.0
Cylinder head
250 to 300
25.5 to 30.6
184 to 221
Cylinder piston mounting lock nut
300 to 350
30.6 to 35.7
221 to 258
Cam mounting nut
Grass collector cylinder hose
Platform mounting nut and bolt
W1012736
G21HD
Item
N·m
kgf·m
ft-lbs
22.0 to 25.0
2.2 to 2.5
16.2 to 18.4
24.5
2.5
18.1
Cylinder head
98.07 to 117.68
10.0 to 12.0
72.33 to 86.8
Cylinder piston mounting lock nut
78.46 to 98.07
8.0 to 10.0
57.86 to 72.33
Hydraulic hose (9/16) (All hoses)
22.0 to 25.0
2.2 to 2.5
16.2 to 18.4
24 to 28
2.4 to 2.8
17.7 to 20.7
46.2 to 48.8
4.7 to 5.0
34.1 to 36.0
39.2 to 58.8
4.0 to 6.0
28.9 to 43.4
Cylinder hose
Cylinder adaptor (1/4 NPTF)
Hydraulic adapters
adapter for RT2 port 9/16-90
adapter 9/16 with O-ring
Auxiliary control valve spool plug
W1031173
6-S4
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
[1] CONTROL VALVE (G21LD, G21HD)
Main Relief Valve Setting Pressure
•
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
CAUTION
When checking, park the tractor on flat ground, apply the
parking brake.
Disconnect the cylinder hose from the mower lift cylinder.
Set the adaptor for control valve (see page G-53.), thread joint
(Code No.: 07916-50341), cable (Code No.: 07916-50331),
thread joint (Code No.: 07916-50401) and pressure gauge 50
(Code No.: 07916-52961).
Start the engine and run the engine speed at rated speed.
Move the mower control lever to “LIFT” position to operate the
main relief valve.
Read the pressure gauge.
If the pressure is not within the factory specifications, adjust with
the adjusting shims.
Main relief valve setting
pressure
Factory spec.
2.94 to 3.43 MPa
30.0 to 35.0 kgf/cm2
426 to 497 psi
Condition
• Engine Speed.....Rated speed
• Oil Temperature..40 to 50 °C (104 to 122 °F)
■ IMPORTANT
• Measure quickly so that the man relief valve may not be in
(Reference)
0.2 mm (0.008 in.) (Part No.: 48100-36280)
0.3 mm (0.012 in.) (Part No.: 48100-36270)
(1) O-ring
(2) Poppet
(3) Spring
(4) Shims
(5) Plug
(6) Main Relief Valve
W1010979
6-S5
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Filter Relief Valve Setting Pressure
•
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CAUTION
When checking, park the tractor on flat ground, apply the
parking brake.
Remove the oil filter cartridge.
Set the flange for control valve (see page G-54), O-rings, thread
joint (Code No.: 07916-50341), cable (Code No.: 07916-50331),
thread joint (Code No.: 07916-50401) and pressure gauge 50
(Code No.: 07916-52961).
Start the engine and run the engine speed at rated speed.
Read the pressure gauge.
If the pressure is not within the factory specifications, adjust with
the adjusting shims.
Filter relief valve setting
pressure
Factory spec.
1.96 to 2.45 MPa
20.0 to 25.0 kgf/cm2
284 to 356 psi
Condition
• Engine Speed.....Rated speed
• Oil Temperature..40 to 50 °C
104 to 122 °F
■ IMPORTANT
• Measure quickly so that the fitter relief valve may not be in
(Reference)
0.3 mm (0.012 in.) (Parts No.: 66101-36240)
0.5 mm (0.020 in.) (Parts No.: 66101-36230)
(1) Plug
(2) Washer with Rubber
(3) Shim
(4) Spring
(5) Steel Ball
(6) Filter Relief Valve
W1011453
6-S6
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
cut-out.
(1) L-pin
(2) Hopper
(A) Lock
(B) Unlock
W1010943
W1032071
(2) M6 Bolt
(3) Discharge Duct
(4) M8 Bolt
(5) Platform
W1032488
Dismounting Mower
W1013684
6-S7
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Draining Transmission Fluid
1. Place an oil pan underneath the drain plug (1).
2. Remove the drain plug (1).
3. Remove the oil inlet plug (2) to completely drain the transmission
fluid.
4. After draining, screw in the drain plug (1) and the oil inlet plug (2).
(When refilling)
• Refer to “LUBRICANTS, FUEL AND COOLANT” (See Page G7).
• Never work the machine immediately after changing the
transmission fluid. Keep the engine at medium speed for a few
minutes to prevent damage to the transmission.
Transmission fluid
(Including HST and
cylinder)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Drain Plug
Oil Inlet Plug
Oil Level Dipstick
Cover
4.5 L
4.75 U.S.qts.
3.86 lmp.qts.
Capacity
(A)
(B)
[a]
[b]
Upper Level
Lower Level
G21LD
G21HD
W1024501
6-S8
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Seat
1. Disconnect the 2P connector (3) from the seat switch and fuse
(4).
2. Remove the seat support mounting lock nut (1).
3. Remove the screws (5).
4. Remove the seat with seat support.
(When reassembling)
lightly.
Then, turn seat support mounting lock nuts counterclockwise by
a half turn.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Seat Bracket
2P Connector
Fuse
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Screws
Seat Support
Plain Washers
Fender
W1014173
(2).
(When reassembling)
Tightening torque
Cam mounting nut
39.2 to 45.1 N·m
4.0 to 4.6 kgf·m
28.9 to 33.3 ft-lbs
(2) Cam
W1014754
6-S9
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Separating Fender
(When reassembling)
the figure.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Step Sheet
Fuel Cap
Step Support
Rubber Bushing
B : Panel
W1016411
Connector, PTO Clutch Return Cable and Cylinder Hose
1. Disconnect the 2P connector (3) from the grass collector switch.
2. Remove the wiring (2) from the platform.
3. Disconnect the PTO clutch return cable (4).
4. Remove the PTO clutch return cable (4) from the platform.
5. Remove the grass collector cylinder hoses (1) from the grass
collector cylinder.
(When reassembling)
• After assembling the PTO clutch return cable, be sure to adjust
the PTO clutch return cable (See page 7-S6).
• Attach the center hydraulic hose of the control valve to the upper
adapter of the grass collector cylinder.
• Attach the outer hydraulic hose of the control valve to the lower
adaptor of the grass collector cylinder.
Tightening torque
Grass collector cylinder
hose
(2) Wiring
21.6 N·m
2.2 kgf·m
15.9 ft-lbs
(3) 2P Connector
(4) PTO Clutch Return Cable
W1011677
6-S10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Separating Platform
1. Remove the platform mounting nuts and bolts (1).
2. Remove the platform the frame.
Tightening torque
Platform mounting nut and
bolt
48.0 to 55.9 N·m
4.9 to 5.7 kgf·m
35.4 to 41.2 ft-lbs
(1) Platform Mounting Nut and Bolt
W1011920
Separating Control Valve Assembly
1. Remove the Mower lift lever from the control valve assembly.
2. Remove the stopper plate (5).
3. Remove the suction pipe (4) with the oil strainer.
4. Disconnect the hydraulic hoses (2), (6) from the drain pipe (7).
5. Remove the drain pipe retaining bolt (3).
6. Remove the drain pipe (7).
7. Remove the control valve assembly stay mounting screw.
8. Remove the adaptor bolts (1) with the gaskets.
9. Remove the control valve assembly with the filter from the
transmission.
(When reassembling)
• First tighten the adaptor bolts into the control valve assembly.
Then tighten up the control valve assembly stay mounting screw.
Adaptor bolt
80.4 N·m
8.2 kgf·m
59.3 ft-lbs
Drain pipe retaining bolt
27.4 N·m
2.8 kgf·m
20.3 ft-lbs
Tightening torque
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Adaptor Bolts
Hydraulic Hose
Drain Pipe Retaining Bolt
Suction Pipe
(5) Stopper Plate
(6) Hydraulic Hose
(7) Drain Pipe
W1013013
Separating Control Valve
1. Remove the grass collector cylinder hoses (1).
2. Separate the control valve (2) with the adapters from the control
valve adapter (3).
(When reassembling)
(2) Control Valve
(3) Control Valve Adapter
W1010721
6-S11
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Adapter, Plug and Spool
1. Remove adaptors.
2. Remove the plug.
3. Draw out the spool assembly.
(When reassembling)
• Install the adapters as shown in the figure.
Tightening torque
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Spool
Gasket
O-ring
Plain Washer
Collar
Spring
35.3 N·m
3.6 kgf·m
26.0 ft-lbs
Adapter
(7)
(8)
(9)
[a]
[b]
A:
B:
C:
Plain Washer
Snap Ring
Plug
G21LD
G21HD
0.17 rad (10 °)
0.52 rad (30 °)
0.52 rad (30 °)
W1010838
6-S12
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Relief Valve
1. Remove the bolt (1).
2. Remove the shims (3), washer with rubber (2), spring (4) and
steel ball (5).
3. Remove the plug (10).
4. Remove the shims (9), O-ring (6), spring (8) and poppet (7).
(When reassembling)
• Install the relief valve, noting the number of shims.
■ IMPORTANT
• After reassembling the relief valve, be sure to adjust its
setting pressure. (See page 6-S3.)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Bolt
Washer with Rubber
Shim
Spring
Steel Ball
(6) O-ring
(7) Poppet
(8) Spring
(9) Shim
(10) Plug
W1013734
Control Valve G21LD and G21HD (for Reference)
1. G21LD and G21HD are equipped with the same control valve.
However, the position of plugs are different as follows :
Port
G18
G18HD
Port A (3)
Open
Close
Port B (2)
Open
Close
Port T4 (4)
Close
Open
Port N (5)
Close
Open
Oil Passage
plug (6)
Open
(Remove plug)
Close
(Insert plug)
Plug
Code No.: K1310-36292
(NPTF 1/4)
Code No.: K1313-63160
(M6 × 0.75)
Plug
(NPTF 1/4)
23.6 to 27.4 N·m
2.4 to 2.8 kgf·m
17.4 to 20.2 ft-lbs
Plug (M6 × P0.75)
4.0 to 7.0 N·m
0.4 to 0.71 kgf·m
2.95 to 5.16 ft-lbs
Tightening torque
■ NOTE
• Be sure to assemble the adaptor in the correct direction as
shown in figure. See page 6-S12.
(1) Port C
(2) Port B
(3) Port A
(4) Port T4
(5) Port N
(6) Oil Passage Plug
W1012228
6-S13
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
[2] AUXILIARY CONTROL VALVE (G21HD)
(1) Preparation for Disassembly
Preparation for Disassembly
1. Remove the rear-left wheel and support the machine.
2. Lift and support the grass collector (1) as shown in figure.
3. Apply parking break and chock the front wheels.
WARNING
• Be sure to support the grass bag, so that the grass bag does
not lower during servicing the auxiliary control valve.
• Be sure to keep yourself out of the bag's way.
(1) Grass Collector
W1012941
Auxiliary Control Valve Cover
1. Remove the valve cover (1).
(1) Valve Cover
W1013058
Spool Guide
1. Unhook the spring (1).
2. Unscrew the operating lever mounting nut (2).
3. Remove the spool guide mounting pin.
4. Remove the spool guide (3) and (4).
(When reassembling)
• Tighten the lever mounting bolt and nut so that the operating
lever move smoothly.
(1) Spring
(2) Operation Lever Mounting Nut
(3) Spool Guide
(4) Spool Guide
W1013118
Hydraulic Hoses
1. Disconnect the valve hose 1 (2) and hose PB1 (1).
2. Disconnect the cylinder hose 2 (4) and cylinder hose 1 (3).
3. Disconnect the valve hose 2 (6) and drain hose (5).
4. Disconnect the cylinder hose 3 (8) and cylinder hose 4 (7).
(When reassembling)
• Be sure to assemble the hoses to the original position refer with
colored indication.
Tightening torque
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Hose PB1
Hose 1
Cylinder Hose 1
Cylinder Hose 2
Drain Hose
Valve Hose 2
Cylinder Hose 4
Cylinder Hose 3
Hydraulic hose
(All hoses)
22.0 to 25.0 N·m
2.2 to 2.5 kgf·m
16.2 to 18.4 ft-lbs
RT2 : Valve Hose 1 with black color
mark
PB1 : Hose PB1 without color mark
SA : Cylinder Hose 2 with yellow mark
SB : Cylinder Hose 1 with red mark
PB2 : Valve Hose 2 without color mark
DR2 : Drain Hose
DA : Cylinder Hose 3 with blue mark
DB : Cylinder Hose 4 with white mark
W1013239
6-S14
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Auxiliary Control Valve (High Dump Control Valve)
1. Unscrew the auxiliary control valve mounting screw (2) and (3).
2. Remove the auxiliary control valve (1).
3. Remove the adaptors.
(When reassembling)
• Assemble the auxiliary control valve in parallel to valve stay (4).
• Apply seal tape to the threaded portion of adaptor (RT2 Port) (6).
• Apply oil to the O-ring of adaptors (5), (6), (7), (8), (9) and (10).
• Install the adaptor (PB1 Port) (5) as shown in figure.
RT2 port adaptor 9/16-90
(with seal tape)
24.0 to 28.0 N·m
2.4 to 2.8 kgf·m
17.7 to 20.7 ft-lbs
Hydraulic hose adaptors
9/16 (with O-ring)
46.2 to 48.8 N·m
4.7 to 5.0 kgf·m
34.1 to 36.0 ft-lbs
Tightening torque
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Auxiliary Control Mounting Screw
Auxiliary Control Mounting Screw
Valve Stay
PB1 Port Adaptor
SB Port Adaptor
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
A:
SA Port Adaptor
DA Port Adaptor
DB Port Adaptor
PB2 Port Adaptor
RT2 Port Adaptor
0.52 rad (30 °)
W1013420
Plug and Spool
1. Unscrew the plug (1).
2. Draw out the spool assembly.
(When reassembling)
• Take care not to damage the O-rings (2).
Tightening torque
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Plug
O-ring
Snap Ring
Plain Washer
Spring
39.2 to 58.8 N·m
4.0 to 6.0 kgf·m
28.9 to 43.4 ft-lbs
Plug
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
Collar
Plain Washer
Spool
Gasket
Drain Plug
W1013600
6-S15
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
[3] CYLINDER
(1) Mower Lift Cylinder (G21LD, G21HD)
Separating Mower Lift Cylinder
1. Disconnect the mower lift cylinder hose (2).
2. Pull out the cotter pins (4).
3. Separate the mower lift cylinder (3) from the frame.
4. Remove the adaptor (1).
(When reassembling)
• Install the adaptor as shown in the figure.
• Keep the clearance between the mower lift cylinder hose and
other parts.
14.7 N·m
1.5 kgf·m
10.8 ft-lbs
Adaptor (Mower lift
cylinder)
35.3 N·m
3.6 kgf·m
26.0 ft-lbs
Tightening torque
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Adaptor (Mower Lift Cylinder)
Mower Lift Cylinder Hose
Mower Lift Cylinder
Cotter Pins
(a) Keep Clearance
W1017880
(2) Grass Collector Cylinder (G21LD)
Separating Grass Collector Cylinder
1. Remove the cylinder cover (3).
2. Pull out the cotter pins (2), (4).
3. Separate the grass collector cylinder (1) from the platform.
4. Remove the adaptors (5), (6) from the grass collector cylinder.
(When reassembling)
• Install the adaptors as shown in the figure.
Tightening torque
Adaptor (Grass collector
cylinder)
(1) Grass Collector Cylinder
(2) Cotter Pin
(3) Cylinder Cover
35.3 N·m
3.6 kgf·m
26.0 ft-lbs
(4) Cotter Pin
(5) Adaptor (Grass Collector Cylinder)
(6) Adaptor (Grass Collector Cylinder)
A : 0.785 rad (45 °)
W1011284
6-S16
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Piston Rod Assembly
1. Drain hydraulic oil from the cylinder, and secure the tube end of
the cylinder in a vise.
2. Push the flange of the cylinder tube out of the groove of the
cylinder head.
3. Unscrew the cylinder head (1) with a pin key.
4. Pull out the piston rod assembly (2) from the cylinder tube (3).
(When reassembling)
• Visually inspect the cylinder tube for signs of scoring or damage.
• Clean the cylinder tube (3) and piston rod assembly (2).
• Secure the tube end of the cylinder in a vice.
• Insert the piston rod assembly (2) to the cylinder tube (3), after
covering the seal with new hydraulic oil and using care not to
damage the piston seal on the piston.
• Screw the cylinder head (1).
• Push the flange of the cylinder tube inside the groove of the
cylinder head (1) to avoid unlocking.
Tightening torque
250 to 300 N·m
25.5 to 30.6 kgf·m
184 to 221 ft-lbs
Cylinder head
(1) Cylinder Head
(2) Piston Rod Assembly
(3)Cylinder Tube
W1011558
Cylinder Head, Piston and Nut
1. Secure the rod end in a vise.
2. Unscrew the cylinder piston mounting lock nut (4).
3. Remove the piston (3) and cylinder head (2) from the piston rod
(1).
(When reassembling)
• Visually inspect all parts for signs of scoring or damage.
• Secure the rod end in a vice.
• Install the cylinder head (2) with seals mounted on the piston rod
(1).
• Install the piston (3) with seals mounted on the piston rod (1).
• Screw the cylinder piston mounting lock nut (4).
Tightening torque
Cylinder piston mounting
lock nut
(1) Piston Rod
(2) Cylinder Head
300 to 350 N·m
30.6 to 35.7 kgf·m
221 to 258 ft-lbs
(3) Piston
(4) Cylinder Piston Mounting Lock Nut
W1011806
Installing Piston O-ring
■
•
1.
2.
3.
NOTE
The piston seal doesn't need any particular tool to install.
Clean all components and check if anything is inside the grooves.
Make sure the O-rings are clean and without damage.
Install the O-ring (1) onto the internal groove of the piston (2)
without twisting it.
4. Install the O-ring (3) onto the external groove of the piston (2)
(1) O-ring
(2) Piston
(3) O-ring
W1012170
6-S17
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Installing Cylinder Head Seal
■ NOTE
• The cylinder head seal doesn't need any particular tool to
install.
1. Clean all components and check if anything is inside the groove.
2. Make sure the wiper seal (1) sliding surfaces are clean and
without damage.
3. Install the wiper seal (1) onto the internal groove of the cylinder
head (2).
■ NOTE
• Check the wiper seal is toward the inside of the cylinder.
4. Install the O-ring (3) against dust between the flange stopper of
the cylinder head (2) and the thread without twisting it.
5. Install the O-ring (4) onto the external groove of the cylinder head
(2) without twisting it.
(1) Wiper Seal
(2) Cylinder Head
(3) O-ring
(4) O-ring
W1012369
(3) Grass Collector Cylinder (G21HD)
Lift cylinder and rotating cylinder have the same structure.
Lift Cylinder
1. Disconnect the hydraulic hose (4) and (6).
2. Remove the lift cylinder mounting clevis pin (3) and (7).
3. Remove the lift cylinder (5).
4. Unscrew the cylinder guard mounting band (1).
5. Remove the cylinder guard (2) and the adapters (8) and (9).
(When reassembling)
• Install the adapters as shown in figure.
• Install the adapter with WHITE color mark to the cylinder end
side. And install the adapter with BLUE color mark to the cylinder
rod side.
• Apply seal tape to the threaded portion of adapter.
• Tighten the cylinder adapter with specified torque then rotate
(clockwise) the adapter to set the specified direction.
• Apply grease to the cylinder mounting clevis pin.
Cylinder hose
22.0 to 25.0 N.m
2.2 to 2.5 kgf.m
16.2 to 18.4 ft-lbs
Cylinder adapter
(1/4 NPTF)
24.5 N.m
2.5 kgf.m
18.1 ft-lbs
Tightening torque
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
Band
Cylinder Guard
Clevis Pin
Hydraulic Hose
Lift Cylinder
Hydraulic Hose
Clevis Pin
Adapter
Adapter
A : Cylinder Rod Side
B : Cylinder End Side
6-S18
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Rotating Cylinder Cover
(1) Cylinder Cover
Rotating Cylinder
1. Disconnect the hydraulic hose (4) and (5).
2. Remove the rotating cylinder mounting clevis pin (1) and (3).
3. Remove the rotating cylinder (2).
4. Remove the adaptors (6) and (7).
(When reassembling)
• Install the adaptors as shown in figure.
• Install the adaptor with RED color mark to the cylinder end side.
And install the adaptor with YELLOW color mark to the cylinder
rod side.
• Apply seal tape to the thread of adapter.
• Tighten the cylinder adaptor with specified torque then rotate
(clockwise) the adaptor to set the specified direction.
• Apply grease to the cylinder mounting clevis pin.
Cylinder hose
22.0 to 25.0 N·m
2.2 to 2.5 kgf·m
16.2 to 18.4 ft-lbs
Cylinder adaptor
(1/4 NPTF)
24.5 N·m
2.5 kgf·m
18.1 ft-lbs
Tightening torque
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Clevis Pin
Cylinder
Clevis Pin
Hydraulic Hose
Hydraulic Hose
Adaptor
Adaptor
A : Cylinder Rod Side
B : Cylinder End Side
Piston Rod Assembly
1. Drain hydraulic oil from the cylinder, and secure the tube end of
the cylinder in a vise.
2. Unscrew the cylinder head (1).
3. Pull out the piston rod assembly (2) from the cylinder tube (3).
(When reassembling)
• Clean the cylinder tube (3) and piston rod assembly (2).
• Secure the tube end of the cylinder in a vice.
• Insert the piston rod assembly (2) to the cylinder tube (1), after
covering the seal with new hydraulic oil and using care not to
damage the piston seal on the piston.
• Screw the cylinder head (1).
Tightening torque
Cylinder head
(1) Cylinder Head
(2) Piston Rod Assembly
98.07 to 117.68 N·m
10.0 to 12.0 kgf·m
72.33 to 86.80 ft-lbs
(3) Cylinder Tube
6-S19
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Cylinder Head, Piston and Nut
1. Secure the rod end in a vise.
2. Unscrew the lock nut (4).
3. Remove the piston (3) and cylinder head (2) from the piston rod
(1).
(When reassembling)
• Secure the rod end in a vice when tighten the lock nut.
Tightening torque
Cylinder piston mounting
lock nut
(1) Piston Rod
(2) Cylinder Head
78.46 to 98.07 N·m
8.0 to 10.0 kgf·m
57.86 to 72.33 ft-lbs
(3) Piston
(4) Lock Nut
Installing Piston O-ring
■
•
1.
2.
3.
NOTE
The piston seal doesn't need any particular tool to install.
Clean all components and check if anything is inside the grooves.
Make sure the O-rings are clean and without damage.
Install the O-ring (2) inside the internal groove of the piston (1)
(1) Piston
(2) O-ring
Installing Cylinder Head Seal
■ NOTE
• The cylinder head seal doesn't need any particular tool to
install.
1. Clean all components and check if anything is inside the groove.
2. Make sure the wiper seal (1) sliding surfaces are clean and
without damage.
3. Install the wiper seal (1) onto the internal groove of the cylinder
head (2).
■ NOTE
• Check the wiper seal is toward the inside of the cylinder.
4. Install the O-ring (3) against dust between the flange stopper of
the cylinder head (2) and the thread without twisting it.
5. Install the O-ring (4) onto the external groove of the cylinder head
(2) without twisting it.
(1) Wiper Seal
(2) Cylinder Head
(3) O-ring
(4) O-ring
W1026317
6-S20
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
(4) Arrangement of Hydraulic Hoses (G21HD)
Hoses
1. Connect the hoses with properly routing as shown in figures.
2. The hose PB2 (2) through the hole (1).
3. The hoses (6)and (5) to the LH lift cylinder are through the hole
(1) and between hose SA (4), SB (3) and DA (7), DB (8) as
shown in figure.
4. The hoses (5) and (6) to the RH lift cylinder are through the hole
(17).
Tightening torque
22.0 to 25.0 N·m
2.2 to 2.5 kgf·m
16.2 to 18.4 ft-lbs
Hydraulic hose
(All hoses)
(Reference)
Hose (Oil Port)
Color Mark
Reference
No. in figure
Length
Hose PB1 (PB1)
None
465 mm (18.31 in.)
(16)
Valve Hose 1 (RT2)
Black
465 mm (18.31 in.)
(15)
Valve Hose 2 (PB2)
None
465 mm (18.31 in.)
(2)
Cylinder Hose 1 (SB)
Red
355 mm (13.98 in.)
(3)
Cylinder Hose 2 (SA)
Yellow
355 mm (13.98 in.)
(4)
Cylinder Hose 3 (DA)
Blue
355 mm (13.98 in.)
(7)
Cylinder Hose 4 (DB)
White
355 mm (13.98 in.)
(8)
Lower Hose LH
Red
711 mm (27.99 in.)
(14)
Upper Hose LH
Yellow
750 mm (2.76 in.)
(13)
Lift Hose LH
Blue
1070 mm (42.13 in.)
(6)
Lift Lower Hose LH
White
750 mm (29.53 in.)
(5)
Lower Hose RH
Red
1171 mm (46.10 in.)
(9)
Upper Hose RH
Yellow
1171 mm (46.10 in.)
(10)
Lift Upper Hose RH
Blue
1415 mm (55.71 in.)
(11)
Lift Lower Hose RH
White
1070 mm (42.13 in.)
(12)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
Hole
Hose PB2
Hose SB
Hose SA
Lift Lower Hose LH
Lift Hose LH
Hose DA
Hose DB
Lower Hose RH
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
Upper Hose RH
Lift Upper Hose RH
Lift Lower Hose RH
Upper Hose LH
Lower Hose LH
Valve Hose 1
Hose PB1
Hole
6-S21
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
[4] MOWER LIFT LINKAGE (G21LD, G21HD)
Clearance between Rear Link and Frame Stopper
1. Lift the rear link assembly (1) to the highest position.
2. Measure the clearance (L) between the rear link assembly and
frame stopper (2).
3. If the measure is not within the factory specifications, adjust the
length (L1) of upper lift link (4) and lower lift link (3).
Clearance (L) between
rear link and frame
stopper
Factory spec.
1.0 to 2.0 mm
0.04 to 0.08 in.
(Reference)
• L1 :350mm (13.8in.)
(1) Rear Link Assembly
(2) Frame Stopper
(3) Lower Lift Link
(4) Upper Lift Link
Adjustment Mower Lift-up Stopper
■ NOTE
• First adjust the clearance between the rear link and frame
stopper and then adjust the mower lift-up stopper.
2. Loosen the lock nut (2) and adjust the stopper so that the bolt
head (1) is in contact with the underside of the frame.
3. Lower the mower deck.
4. Turn the stopper counterclockwise a half turn, then secure the
lock nut.
■ IMPORTANT
• After adjustment, check to see that the stopper is contact
with undersize of frame.
(Reference)
• The mower lift-up stopper is designed for maintaining the balance
of the mower deck, when lifting the mower to highest position.
• L : 43 mm (1.69 in.)
(1) Bolt Head
(2) Lock Nut
W1021830
6-S22
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Upper Lift Link and Rear Link Assembly
1. Pull out the rue ring cotters (3) and plain washers.
2. Remove the upper lift links (4).
3. Pull out the cotter pin (1) and plain washer.
4. Remove the L.H. rear link assembly (2).
5. Remove the R.H. rear link assembly retaining lock nut and bolt.
6. Remove the R.H. rear link assembly.
(When reassembling)
• Apply the grease to the rotary sliding surface.
• Adjust the upper lift link and lower lift link referring to the
"MOWER" section.
■ IMPORTANT
• Tighten the R.H. rear link assembly lock nut and bolt, leaving
gap between the frame and the lock nut as little as possible.
Also be sure that the rear link assembly turns smoothly.
(Reference)
• L : 350mm (13.8 in.)
(1) Cotter Pin
(2) L.H. Rear Link Assembly
(3) Rue Ring Cotter
(4) Upper Lift Link
(5) Lower Lift Link
6-S23
7
PTO SYSTEM
SERVICING
CONTENTS
1. TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................................................................7-S1
3. CHECKING, DISASSEMBLING AND SERVICING.......................................7-S3
[3] SERVICING ..............................................................................................7-S6
PTO SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
1. TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom
Loss of Power
Front PTO Noisy
PTO Clutch
Cannot Be
Disengaged even if
Grass Collector Is
Lifted
Probable Cause
Solution
Reference
Page
Weakened or broken PTO clutch spring
Replace
7-S5
Improper front PTO belt tension
Readjust
7-S3
Improper front PTO brake setting
Readjust
7-S3
Worn or damaged front PTO belt
Replace
7-S5
Improper front PTO brake setting
Readjust
7-S3
Worn tension pulley bearing
Replace
–
Worn PTO shaft bearing
Replace
7-S5
Worn or damaged front PTO belt
Replace
7-S5
Improper front PTO belt tension
Readjust
7-S3
Improper PTO clutch return cable length
Readjust
7-S6
Weakened or broken return spring
Replace
7-S5
W1014322
7-S1
PTO SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Item
Allowable Limit
88.0 to 89.0 mm
3.47 to 3.54 in.
–
PTO Clutch Spring
Length
Tension Arm to Tip of Adjusting Screw
Clearance
3.0 to 4.0 mm
0.12 to 0.16 in.
–
Belt Stay to Front PTO Belt
Clearance
1.0 to 2.5 mm
0.04 to 0.10 in.
–
Belt Retainer to Front PTO Belt
Clearance
2.0 mm
0.08 in.
–
Tension Collar to Tension Arm Bushing
Clearance
0.002 to 0.114 mm
0.0001 to 0.0045 in.
0.30 mm
0.0118 in.
Tension Collar
O.D.
19.000 to 19.030 mm
0.7480 to 0.7492 in.
–
Tension Arm Bushing
I.D.
19.032 to 19.114 mm
0.7493 to 0.7525 in.
–
5.7 to 6.3 mm
0.224 to 0.248 in.
4.0 mm
0.157 in.
123.9 to 124.0 mm
4.878 to 4.882 in.
123.0 mm
4.843 in.
Brake Lining
Thickness
Front PTO Pulley
O.D.
W1013874
7-S2
PTO SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
PTO Belt Tension
1. Place the machine on level ground, and stop the engine.
2. Set the PTO clutch lever to “ENGAGE” position.
3. Measure the length (L) of PTO clutch spring (2).
4. If the measurement is not within the factory specifications, adjust
with the adjusting nuts (1).
Length (L) of PTO clutch
spring
Factory spec.
88.0 to 89.0 mm
3.47 to 3.54 in.
■ IMPORTANT
• When replace the front PTO belts with new ones, the length
(L) of PTO clutch spring (2) should be 91 to 92 mm (3.58 to
3.62 in.).
After working for 50 hours, be sure to readjust the length (L)
to the factory specifications.
(1) Adjusting Nut
(2) PTO Clutch Spring
W1010891
Adjusting Front PTO Brake
2. Set the PTO clutch lever to “DISENGAGE” position.
3. Measure the clearance (L) between the tension arm (3) and tip of
adjusting screw (1).
the lock nut (2) and turn the adjusting screw (1) to adjust.
the tension arm and tip
of adjusting screw
Factory spec.
3.0 to 4.0 mm
0.12 to 0.16 in.
■ IMPORTANT
• After adjustment, check to see that the PTO brake is
released when the PTO clutch is engaged.
(1) Adjusting Screw
(2) Lock Nut
(3) Tension Arm
W1011087
7-S3
PTO SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Adjusting Belt Stay
3. Measure the clearance (L) between the belt stay (3) and front
PTO belt (1).
the belt stay mounting screws (2) and move the belt stay (3) to
adjust.
belt stay and front PTO
belt
Factory spec.
(1) PTO Belt
(2) Belt Stay Mounting Screw
1.0 to 2.5 mm
0.04 to 0.10 in.
(3) Belt Stay
W1011294
Adjusting Belt Retainer
3. Measure the clearance (L) between the belt retainer (2) and front
PTO belt (3).
the belt retainer mounting screws (1) and move the belt retainer
(2) to adjust.
belt retainer and front
PTO belt
Factory spec.
(1) Belt Retainer Mounting Screws
(2) Belt Retainer
2.0 mm
0.08 in.
(3) PTO Belt
W1011549
7-S4
PTO SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Battery and Bonnet
(1) Radiator Screen
(2) Head Light
(3) 1P Connector
(4) Wiring
(5) Bonnet Bracket
(6) Bonnet Stay Mounting Screw
W1012942
spring (6).
tension pulley.
(When reassembling)
bushing.
front PTO belt tension. (See page 7-S3.)
between the belt stay and front PTO belt. (See page 7-S4.)
Clearance (L): 1.0 to 2.5 mm (0.04 to 0.10 in.)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Cotter Pin
Tension Arm
Flange Bolt
PTO Clutch Spring
PTO Brake Assembly
(6) Return Spring
(7) Brake Spring
(8) Front PTO Belt
(9) Belt Stay
(10) Pulley
W1013401
PTO Shaft
2. Tap out the PTO Shaft (1) forward.
(When reassembling)
• Apply grease to the oil seal lip (6), and take care that it is not
rolled when installing the PTO shaft.
• Be sure to install the adjusting shims.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
PTO shaft
Internal Snap Ring
Ball Bearing
External Snap Ring
(5) Needle Bearing
(6) Oil Seal
(7) Front Axle Support
W1012277
7-S5
PTO SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
[3] SERVICING
Adjusting PTO Clutch Return Cable
3. Adjust the PTO clutch return cable length so that it stretchs
slightly tight.
■ IMPORTANT
• Check the PTO clutch lever gets disengaged when the grass
collector starts to open.
(Reference)
• L1: More than 26 mm (1.02 in.)
• L2: 10 mm (0.39 in.)
W1012635
Clearance between Tension Collar and Tension Arm Bushing
1. Measure the tension collar O.D. with an outside micrometer.
2. Measure the tension arm bushing I.D. with an inside micrometer,
3. If the clearance exceeds the allowable limit, replace the tension
arm bushing.
4. If the clearance still exceeds the allowable limit after replacing the
bushing, replace the tension collar.
Clearance between
tension collar and
tension arm bushing
Factory spec.
0.002 to 0.114 mm
0.0001 to 0.0045 in.
Allowable limit
0.30 mm
0.0118 in.
Tension collar O.D.
Factory spec.
19.000 to 19.030 mm
0.7480 to 0.7492 in.
Tension arm bushing
I.D.
Factory spec.
19.032 to 19.114 mm
0.7493 to 0.7525 in.
W1012489
Brake Lining Wear
1. Measure the brake lining thickness (T) with a depth gauge.
PTO brake.
Brake lining thickness
(T)
Factory spec.
5.7 to 6.3 mm
0.224 to 0.248 in.
Allowable limit
4.0 mm
0.157 in.
■ NOTE
• If the lining is carbonized or soaked with oil, replace the PTO
brake.
W1012662
7-S6
PTO SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Front PTO Pulley Wear
1. Measure the front PTO pulley O.D. with an outside micrometer.
Factory spec.
123.9 to 124.0 mm
4.878 to 4.882 in.
Allowable limit
123.0 mm
4.843 in.
Front PTO pulley O.D.
W1012789
7-S7
8
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
MECHANISM
CONTENTS
1. WIRING DIAGRAM AND ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT..................................... 8-M1
[1] WIRING DIAGRAM (G21LD and G21HD) .............................................. 8-M1
[2] ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT (G21LD and G21HD)........................................ 8-M2
G21LD . G21HD, WSM
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
1. WIRING DIAGRAM AND ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT
[1] WIRING DIAGRAM (G21LD and G21HD)
Color of Wiring
B ...... Black
BOr .. Black / Orange
BR ... Black / Red
BW .. Black / White
BY ... Black / Yellow
Br .... Brown
G ..... Green
GY ... Green / Yellow
GW .. Green / White
Gy ... Gray
L ...... Blue
LD ... Blue DK
LW ... Blue / White
Or .... Orange
Pi ..... Pink
Pu .... Purple
R ..... Red
RB ... Red / Black
RW .. Red / White
W ..... White
Y ...... Yellow
YW .. Yellow / White
GC Switch
[G21LD]
[G21HD]
Out Let
14Ga.R
OFF
(WITHOUT)
ON
(WITH)
Fuse (EPS MT) 30A
Fuse (E/G Stop)15A
+B
14Ga.R
Slow Blow 40A
12Ga.RB
18Ga.Gy
18Ga.YW
12Ga.R
Body Earth
(WITH)
OFF
(WITHOUT)
Seat Switch
OFF
(VACANT)
ON
(OCCUPIED)
18Ga.RW
18Ga.Br
Battery
E/G
ON
Relay
18Ga.Or
85
12Ga.R
(FREE)
OFF
(ENGAGE)
OFF
(DEPRESSED)
ON
(DISENGAGE)
ON
18Ga.YW 4
DIODE 3A
14Ga.BW
2
Starter
2 12Ga.L
Motor
(MAX 30A)
M
4 12Ga.BW
20Ga.Y 11
20Ga.LW 13
3 18Ga.Or
4
3
1 14Ga.BOr
2
1 BY
CN-2
20Ga.BY 14
20Ga.BR 15
20Ga.RW 16
20Ga.B 7
20Ga.B 9
14Ga.BY
Fuel Pump
(MAX 1.5A)
1 12Ga.G
3
2 20Ga.BW 6
1 20Ga.R 8
18Ga.B
14Ga.BW
MAG.Switch
Torque
Sensor
PTO Switch
Brake Switch
CN-1
3 20Ga.W 10
30
87
86
CN-2
RW
18Ga.RW
5 20Ga.Gy
1
4 20Ga.Br
2
1
3
2
3
ECU
Tester
18Ga.B
20Ga.B
12Ga.BR
18Ga.YW
P
20Ga.LD
20Ga.GY
18Ga.RW
Glow Lamp
12Ga.BR
18Ga.B
Glow Plug
(7.3A/11V)x3
14Ga.BY
18Ga.RW
Thermo Lamp
14Ga.B
18Ga.RW
Fuel Lamp
(12A/12V)
18Ga.RW
18Ga.LW
1 3
E/G Stop
Timer Relay
14Ga.B
E/G Stop Solenoid
Easy Checker
(3.4W)
Oil Lamp
18Ga.RW
2 4
18Ga.RW
30A
L
IG/M
12Ga.R
18Ga.B
14Ga.B
12Ga.B
Fuse (IG/M)10A
14Ga.RB
Oil Switch
18Ga.B
Thermo Switch
12Ga.R
Charge Lamp
18Ga.W
18Ga.RW
18Ga.Pu
18Ga.B
Light Switch
18Ga.RW
BAT ON GLOW ST
(IG/M)
OFF(STOP)
ON(RUN)
GLOW
START
Alternator
Main Switch
3GGAAAB9P001A
8-M1
Fuel Switch
18Ga.Br
18Ga.B
Head Light
18Ga.Br
18Ga.B
18Ga.RW
18Ga.B
(1.04A/12.8V)x2
Hour Meter
G21LD . G21HD, WSM
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
[2] ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT (G21LD and G21HD)
Main Switch
Color of Wiring
Terminal
B ...... Black
BOr .. Black / Orange
BR ... Black / Red
BW .. Black / White
BY ... Black / Yellow
Br .... Brown
G ..... Green
GY ... Green / Yellow
GW .. Green / White
Gy ... Gray
L ...... Blue
LD ... Blue DK
LW ... Blue / White
Or .... Orange
Pi ..... Pink
Pu .... Purple
R ..... Red
RB ... Red / Black
RW .. Red / White
W ..... White
Y ...... Yellow
YW .. Yellow / White
BAT
Key Position
ON
(IG / M)
GLOW
ST
OFF (STOP)
ON (RUN)
GLOW
START
Out Let
R
Fuse Box
RB
RW
10A
R
G
30A
Torque Sensor
W
BW
R
Y
LW
BY
BR
RW
B
B
RW
RW
B
Hour Meter
Head Light
Br
Head Light
B
Pu
B
B
B
B
Glow Plug
B
R
Starter
GY
B
YW
YW
P
Or
Fuel Pump
Engine Stop Solenoid
BW
RB
Br
LD
Fuel Switch
BY
Relay
BR
E/G Stop
(Timer Relay)
Alternator
(with
IC Regulator)
Br
R
W
YW
ON
Br
Slow Blow Fuse
Battery
LD
B
(WITH)
Gy
Br
GY
RW
RW
Servicing
Connector
OFF
Thermo
Lamp Glow Lamp
BOr
(OCCUPIED) ON
ON
(WITHOUT)
LW
BW
(WITHOUT) OFF
Oil Switch
(DISENGAGE)
Or
OFF
Y
(DEPRESSED) ON
YW
(FREE)
OFF
[G21HD] (WITH) ON
Thermo Switch
(ENGAGE)
OFF
Seat Switch
BY
(FREE)
PTO Switch
R
Diode
Brake Switch
M
Br
BY
GC Switch
Motor
L
BW
BR
[G21LD]
G
B
Light Switch
RW
R
Fuel
Lamp
15A
B
GY
Charge
Lamp Oil Lamp
R
GY
R
3GGAAAB9P002A
8-M2
SERVICING
CONTENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
CHECKING, DISASSEMBLING AND SERVICING.........................................8-S7
[1] BATTERY..................................................................................................8-S7
(1) Checking .............................................................................................8-S7
[2] STARTING SYSTEM ...............................................................................8-S8
(1) Checking .............................................................................................8-S8
(3) Servicing ...........................................................................................8-S13
[3] ENGINE KEY SWITCH SHUT-OFF SYSTEM ........................................8-S15
(1) Checking ...........................................................................................8-S15
[4] CHARGING SYSTEM ............................................................................8-S16
(1) Checking ...........................................................................................8-S16
(3) Servicing ...........................................................................................8-S19
[5] ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT....................................................................8-S20
(1) Checking ...........................................................................................8-S20
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
1. TROUBLESHOOTING
ALL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
Symptom
All Electrical
Equipment Does Not
Operate
Probable Cause
Reference
Page
Solution
Battery discharged or defective
Charge or replace
G-31
Fuse blown
Replace
G-43
Battery cable disconnected or improperly
connected
Replace
–
W1014322
SAFETY CONTROL SYSTEM
Symptom
Engine Does Not
Start
Probable Cause
Reference
Page
Solution
Wiring harness disconnected or improperly
connected
Repair or replace
–
Seat switch is at "OFF" position
Seat on operator'seat
–
Brake switch is at "OFF" position
Depress the brake
pedal
–
PTO switch is at "OFF" position
Set PTO clutch lever
at "DISENGAGE"
position
–
Fuse blown
Replace
G-43
Main switch defective
Replace
8-S8
Replace
8-S24
Replace
8-S23
Engine stop solenoid defective
Replace
8-S15
Engine Does Not
Stop When Operator
leaves Seat
(PTO Clutch Lever Is
Set at “ENGAGE”
Position.
Parking Brake Is Not
Applied)
Replace
8-S24
Replace
8-S15
Engine Does Not
Stop When Operator
leaves Seat
(PTO Clutch Lever Is
Set at “DISENGAGE”
Position.
Parking Brake Is
Applied)
Replace
8-S24
Replace
8-S23
Replace
8-S24
W1014322
8-S1
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
STARTING SYSTEM
Symptom
Starter Does Not
Function
Glow Plug Indicator
Does Not Glow
Probable Cause
Solution
Reference
Page
Weak battery
Charge
G-31
Faulty lead or connection (Magnet switch to
motor)
Replace or repair
8-S12
Starter defective
Repair or replace
8-S12
Charge or replace
G-31
Fuse blown
Replace
G-43
connected
Repair or replace
–
Starter defective
Repair or replace
8-S12
Replace
8-S8
PTO clutch lever is set at "ENGAGE" position
at “DISENGAGE”
position
Replace
8-S23
Weak battery
Charge
G-31
Replace
8-S8
Slow blow fuse blown
Replace
G-43
Glow plug defective
Replace
8-S11
connected
Repair or replace
–
–
W1014322
ENGINE KEY SWITCH SHUT-OFF SYSTEM
Symptom
Engine Does Not
Stop when Main
Switch is turned
"OFF”
Engine Does Not
Restart
Probable Cause
Solution
Reference
Page
Engine stop timer relay defective
Replace
8-S15
Replace
8-S8
Replace
8-S15
Fuse blown
Replace
G-43
connected
Repair or replace
–
PTO clutch lever is set at "ENGAGE" position
at "DISENGAGE"
position"
–
Replace
connected
Repair or replace
8-S15
–
W1014322
8-S2
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
CHARGING SYSTEM
Symptom
Battery Discharges
too Quickly
Probable Cause
Solution
Reference
Page
Cooling fan belt slipping
Adjust tension
1-S49
Alternator defective
Repair or replace
8-S17
connected
Repair or replace
–
Charge or replace
G-31
W1014322
LIGHTING SYSTEM
Symptom
Headlight Does Not
Light Up
Probable Cause
Solution
Reference
Page
Fuse blown
Replace
G-43
Bulb blown
Replace
G-43
Replace
8-S8
Light switch defective
Replace
8-S22
connected
Repair or replace
–
W1014322
8-S3
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
EASY CHECKER
Symptom
Charging Indicator
Does Not Light Up
when Main Switch is
turned "ON"
Probable Cause
Solution
Reference
Page
Fuse blown
Replace
G-43
Bulb blown
Replace
G-43
Replace
8-S8
connected
Repair or replace
–
Charging Indicator
Does Not Go Off
when Engine is
running
Short circuit between alternator L terminal lead
and chassis
Repair or replace
8-S17, S19
Alternator defective
Repair or replace
8-S17, S19
Oil Pessure Indicator
Lights Up when
Engine is running
Engine oil pressure too low
Check and repair
1-S47
Oil pressure switch defective
Replace
8-S20
Short circuit between oil pressure switch lead
(1P connector) and chassis
Repair
8-S20
EPS controller defective
Check to replace
5-S24
Replenish
G-21
Oil Pessure Indicator
Does Not Light Up
when Main Switch is
at "ON" Position and
Engine is Not
Running
Fuse blown
Replace
G-43
Bulb blown
Replace
G-43
Replace
8-S8
Check or replace
5-S24
connected
Repair or replace
–
Glow Indicator Does
Not Light Up when
Main Switch is at
"ON" Position and
Engine is Not
Running
Fuse blown
Replace
G-43
Bulb blown
Replace
G-43
Replace
8-S8
Check or replace
5-S24
connected
Repair or replace
–
Thermo Indicator
Does Not Light Up
when Main Switch is
at "ON" Position and
Engine is Running
Fuse blown
Replace
G-43
Bulb blown
Replace
G-43
Replace
8-S8
Check or replace
5-S24
Thermo switch defective
Replace
8-S21
connected
Repair or replace
Fuse blown
Replace
G-43
Bulb blown
Replace
G-43
Check or replace
5-S24
Fuel switch defective
Replace
8-S25
connected
Repair or replace
Fuel Indicator Does
Not Light Up when
Fuel Tank is Empty
–
–
W1014322
8-S4
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
BATTERY
Item
Battery
Voltage
Potential difference
Allowable Limit
More than 12 V
–
Less than 0.1 V
–
W1010878
STARTER
Commutator
O.D.
Difference of
O.D.’s
28.0 mm
1.102 in.
27.0 mm
1.063 in.
Less than 0.02 mm
Less than 0.0008 in.
0.05 mm
0.0020 in.
Mica
Undercut
0.60 mm
0.0236 in.
0.20 mm
0.0079 in.
Brush
Length
14.0 mm
0.551 in.
11.1 mm
0.437 in.
W1010973
ALTERNATOR
Stator
Resistance
Less than 1.0 ohms
–
Rotor
Resistance
2.9 ohms
–
Slip Ring
O.D.
14.4 mm
0.567 in.
12.8 mm
0.504 in.
Brush
Length
10.5 mm
0.413 in.
8.4 mm
0.331 in.
W1011055
GLOW PLUG
Glow Plug
Resistance
Approx. 0.9 ohms
–
W1011149
GRASS COLLECTOR SWITCH
Resistance between the terminals in pushing switch (G21LD)
0 ohms
–
Resistance between the terminals in pushing switch (G21HD)
infinity
–
W1026055
8-S5
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Item
N·m
kgf·m
ft-lbs
M terminal nut
9.8 to 13.7
1.0 to 1.4
7.2 to 10.1
C terminal nut
7.9 to 11.8
0.8 to 1.2
5.8 to 8.7
Magnetic switch mounting nut
5.9 to 10.8
0.6 to 1.1
4.4 to 7.9
Through bolt
4.42 to 7.35
0.45 to 0.75
3.26 to 5.42
93.1 to 127.4
9.5 to 13.0
68.7 to 94.0
Starter
Alternator
Pulley nut
W1012736
8-S6
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
•
•
•
•
■
•
CAUTION
To avoid accidental short circlet, be sure to attach the positive cable to the positive terminal before the
negative cable is attached to the negative terminal.
Never remove the battery cap while the engine is running.
Keep electrolyte away from eyes, hands and clothes. If you are spattered with it, wash it away completely
with water immediately.
Keep open sparks and flames away from the battery at all times. Hydrogen gas mixed with oxygen
becomes very explosive.
IMPORTANT
If the machine is to be operated for short time without battery (using a slave battery for starting), use
additional current (lights) while engine is running and insulate terminal of battery. If this advice is
disregarded, damage to alternator and regulator may result.
[1] BATTERY
(1) Checking
Battery Voltage
1. Stop the engine and turn the main switch off.
2. Connect the COM (−) lead of the voltmeter to the battery's
negative terminal post and the positive (+) lead to the positive
terminal post, and measure the battery voltage.
3. If the battery voltage is less than the factory specification,
recharge the battery.
Battery voltage
Factory spec.
More than 12 V
W1011541
Battery Terminal Connection
1. Turn the main switch on, and turn on the head light.
2. Measure the voltage with a voltmeter across the battery's positive
terminal post and the cable terminal, and the voltage across the
battery's negative terminal post and the chassis.
3. If the measurement exceeds the factory specification, clean the
battery terminal posts and cable clamps, and tighten them firmly.
Potential difference
Factory spec.
Less than 0.1 V
W1011657
8-S7
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
[2] STARTING SYSTEM
(1) Checking
(A) Main Switch
Connector Voltage
1. Open the bonnet.
2. Disconnect the 4P connector from the main switch.
3. Measure the voltage with a voltmeter between the connector
terminal and chassis.
4. If the voltage differs from battery voltage, the wiring harness is
faulty.
Voltage (Connector
terminal-Chassis)
Factory spec.
Approx. battery voltage
W1011831
8-S8
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Main Switch Continuity
1. Open the bonnet.
2. Disconnect the 4P connector from the main switch.
3. Remove the main switch from the panel.
4. Measure the resistance with an ohmmeter across the connector
terminals when the main switch key is set at (A) position.
terminals when the main switch key is set at (B) position.
terminals when the main switch key is set at (C) position.
terminals when the main switch key is set at (D) position.
8. If the resistance values specified below are not indicated, the
main switch is faulty.
■ Main switch key is set at (A) position.
30 terminal-19 terminal
Resistance
Infinity
Infinity
30 terminal-AC terminal
Infinity
AC terminal-19 terminal
Infinity
Infinity
Infinity
■ Main switch key is set at (B) position.
Resistance
Infinity
Infinity
Continuity
Infinity
Infinity
Infinity
■ Main switch key is set at (C) position.
Resistance
Continuity
Infinity
Continuity
Continuity
Infinity
Infinity
■ Main switch key is set at (D) position.
Resistance
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
30 Terminal
AC Terminal
50 Terminal
19 Terminal
Continuity
Continuity
Continuity
Continuity
Continuity
Continuity
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
“OFF” Position
“ON” Position
W1011967
8-S9
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
(B) Starter
M Terminal Voltage
1. Measure the voltage with a voltmeter between the M terminal and
the chassis.
2. If the voltage differs from the battery voltage, the battery’s
positive cable or the battery negative cable is faulty.
Voltage
Factory spec.
Tightening torque
M terminal nut
9.8 to 13.7 N·m
1.0 to 1.4 kgf·m
7.2 to 10.1 ft-lbs
W1012958
Motor Test
CAUTION
• Secure the starter to prevent it from jumping up and down
while testing the motor.
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable from the battery.
2. Disconnect the battery positive cable and the leads from the
starter M terminal.
3. Remove the starter from the engine.
4. Disconnect the connecting lead (2) from the starter C terminal
(1).
5. Connect a jumper lead from the connecting lead (2) to the battery
positive terminal post.
6. Connect a jumper lead momentarily between the starter motor
housing and the battery negative terminal post.
7. If the motor does not run, check the motor.
(1) C Terminal
(2) Connecting Lead
W1013277
Magnetic Switch Test
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable from the battery.
2. Disconnect the battery positive cable and the leads from the
starter M terminal.
3. Remove the starter from the engine.
4. Disconnect the connecting lead (3) from the starter C terminal
(2).
5. Connect a jumper lead from the starter S terminal (1) to the
battery positive terminal post.
6. Connect a jumper lead momentarily between the starter C
terminal (2) and the battery negative terminal post.
7. If the pinion gear does not pop out, check the magnetic switch.
■ NOTE
• This teat should be carried out for a short time, about 3 to 5
seconds.
(1) S Terminal
(2) C Terminal
(3) Connecting Lead
W1013480
8-S10
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
(C) Glow Plug
Lead Terminal Voltage
1. Disconnect the 1P connector (1) from the glow plug (2) after
turning the main switch off.
2. Turn the main switch key to the “PREHEAT” position, and
measure the voltage between the lead terminal and the chassis.
3. Make sure that the PTO switch is in the “DISENGAGE” position
and apply the parking brake.
4. Turn the main switch key to the “START” position, and measure
the voltage with a voltmeter between the lead terminal and the
chassis.
5. If the voltage at either position differs from the battery voltage, the
wiring harness or main switch is faulty.
Voltage
(Lead terminal-Chassis)
(1) 1P Connector
Main switch key at
“PREHEAT”
Main switch key at
“START”
(2) Glow Plug
W1013693
Glow Plug Continuity
1. Disconnect the lead from the glow plugs.
2. Measure the resistance with an ohmmeter between the glow plug
terminal and the chassis.
3. If 0 ohm is indicated, the screw at the tip of the glow plug and the
housing are short-circuited.
4. If the factory specification is not indicated, the glow plug is faulty.
Glow plug resistance
Factory spec.
Approx. 0.9 ohms
W1014109
8-S11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
(A) Starter
Disassembling Starter
(1) Magnetic Switch
Mounting Nut
(2) Housing
(3) Magnetic Switch
(4) C Terminal Nut
(5) Shaft Assembly
(6) Drive Lever
(7) Overrunning Clutch
(8) Armature
(9) Connecting Lead
(10) Yoke
(11) Brush Holder
(12) Mounting Screw
(13) Rear End Frame
(14) Through Bolt
(a) Plain Washer
(b) Center Bearing
(c) Internal Gear
(d) Plain Washer
(e) Shaft
(f) Plain Washer
(g) Planetary Gear
(h) Plate
W1015174
1. Unscrew the C terminal nut (4), and disconnect the connecting leads (9).
2. Unscrew the magnetic switch mounting nuts (1), and remove the magnetic switch (3) from the housing (2).
3. Unscrew the through bolts (14) and mounting screws (12), and remove the rear end frame (13).
4. Remove the brush from the brush holder while holding the spring up.
5. Remove the brush holder (11).
6. Draw out the armature (8) and yoke (10) from the housing.
7. Draw out the shaft assembly (5) with the drive lever (6) and overrunning clutch (7) from the housing.
■ NOTE
• Do not damage to the brush and commutator.
(When reassembling)
• Apply grease (NIPPONDENSO No.50 or equivalent) to the parts indicated in the figure.
Tightening torque
C terminal nut
7.9 to 11.8 N·m
0.8 to 1.2 kgf·m
5.8 to 8.7 ft-lbs
Magnetic switch
mounting nut
5.9 to 10.8 N·m
0.6 to 1.1 kgf·m
4.4 to 7.9 ft-lbs
Through bolt
4.42 to 7.35 N·m
0.45 to 0.75 kgf·m
3.25 to 5.42 ft-lbs
W1015003
8-S12
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
(3) Servicing
(A) Starter
Commutator and Mica
1. Check the contact face of the commutator for wear, and grind the
commutator with emery paper if it is slightly worn.
2. Measure the commutator O.D. with an outside micrometer at
several points.
3. If the minimum O.D. is less than the allowable limit, replace the
armature.
4. If the difference of the O.D.’s exceeds the allowable limit, correct
the commutator on a lathe to the factory specification.
5. Measure the mica undercut.
6. If the undercut is less than the allowable limit, correct it with a saw
blade and chamfer the segment edges.
Factory spec.
28.0 mm
1.102 in.
Allowable limit
27.0 mm
1.063 in.
Factory spec.
Less than 0.02 mm
Less than 0.0008 in.
Allowable limit
0.05 mm
0.0020 in.
Factory spec.
0.60 mm
0.0236 in.
Allowable limit
0.20 mm
0.0079 in.
Commutator O.D
Difference of O.D.'s
Mica undercut
(1) Segment
(2) Undercut
(3) Mica
(a) Correct
(b) Incorrect
W1015371
Brush Wear
1. If the contact face of the brush is dirty or dusty, clean it with emery
paper.
2. Measure the brush length (A) with vernier calipers.
3. If the length is less than the allowable limit, replace the yoke
assembly and brush holder.
Factory spec.
14.0 mm
0.551 in.
Allowable limit
11.1 mm
0.437 in.
Brush length (A)
W1015798
Brush Holder
1. Check the continuity across the brush holder and the holder
support with an ohmmeter.
2. If it conducts, replace the brush holder.
W1015919
8-S13
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Armature Coil
1. Check the continuity across the commutator and armature coil
core with an ohmmeter.
2. If it conducts, replace the armature.
3. Check the continuity across the segments of the commutator with
an ohmmeter.
4. If it does not conduct, replace the armature.
W1016056
Field Coil
1. Check the continuity across the lead (1) and brush (2) with an
ohmmeter.
2. If it does not conduct, replace the yoke assembly.
3. Check the continuity across the brush (2) and yoke (3) with an
ohmmeter.
4. If it conducts, replace the yoke assembly.
(1) Lead
(2) Brush
(3) Yoke
W1016179
Overrunning Clutch
1. Inspect the pinion for wear or damage.
2. If there is any defect, replace the overrunning clutch assembly.
3. Check that the pinion turns freely and smoothly in the
overrunning direction and does not slip in the cranking direction.
4. If the pinion slips or does not rotate in the both directions, replace
the overrunning clutch assembly.
W1016321
8-S14
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
[3] ENGINE KEY SWITCH SHUT-OFF SYSTEM
(1) Checking
Timer Relay Connector Voltage
1. Disconnect the connector from the timer relay after turning the
main switch off.
2. Measure the voltage with a voltmeter across the connector 4
3. Turn the main switch on, and measure the voltage across the
connector 3 terminal and chassis.
4. If these voltages differ from the battery voltage, the wiring
harness or main switch is faulty.
Voltage
Connector 4 terminalchassis
Connector 3 terminalchassis
(1) Timer Relay
W1016544
Test of Timer Relay
1. Remove the timer relay (1) from the tractor.
2. Connect jumper leads across the battery positive terminal and
the timer relay 3 terminal, and across the battery positive terminal
and the timer relay 4 terminal.
3. Connect jumper leads across the battery negative terminal and
the timer relay 2 terminal, and across the battery negative
terminal and the bulb terminal.
4. Connect jumper lead across the timer relay 1 terminal and the
bulb terminal.
5. The bulb lights up when disconnecting a jumper lead from the 3
terminal arid goes off 6 to 13 seconds late, the timer relay is
proper.
(1) Timer Relay
(2) Load (Lamp)
(3) Battery (12V)
W1016721
Engine Stop Solenoid Test
1. Disconnect the 1P connector from the engine stop solenoid.
2. Remove the engine stop solenoid from the engine.
3. Connect the jumper leads from the battery positive terminal to the
1P connector, and from the battery negative terminal to the
engine stop solenoid body.
4. If the solenoid plunger is not attracted, the engine stop solenoid
is faulty.
W1016870
8-S15
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
[4] CHARGING SYSTEM
(1) Checking
(A) Alternator
Alternator
1. Disconnect the 2P connector (3) from alternator (2) after tuning
the main switch OFF.
2. Perform the following checkings.
(1) B Terminal
(2) Alternator
(3) 2P Connector
W1017030
Connector Voltage
1. Turn the main switch OFF. Measure the voltage between the B
terminal (1) and the chassis.
2. Turn the main switch ON. Measure the voltage between the IC
terminal (3) and the chassis.
Voltage
(Main switch at OFF)
B Terminal - Chassis
Voltage
(Main Switch at ON)
IG terminal - Chassis
(1) B Terminal
(2) Alternator
(3) IG Terminal
(4) L Terminal
W1017151
No-Load Test
1. Connect the 2P connector (6) to previous positions of the
alternator after turning the main switch OFF.
2. Connect the jumper lead (3) between IG terminal (4) and B
terminal (2).
3. Start the engine and then set the idling speed.
5. Measure the voltage between the B terminal (2) and the chassis.
6. If the measurement is less than the factory specification,
disassemble the alternator and check the IC regulator.
Voltage
Factory spec.
More than 14V
(Reference)
• Once the engine has started, the altinator temperature rises
quickly up to an ambient temperature of 70 to 90 °C (158 to 194
°F). As the temperature goes higher than 50 °C (122 °F), the
alternator voltage slowly drops; at higher than 100 °C (212 °F), it
drops by about 1 V.
(1) Voltmeter
(2) B Terminal
(3) Jumper Lead
(4) IG Terminal
(5) L Terminal
(6) 2P Connector
W1017349
8-S16
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
(A) Alternator
Pulley
1. Secure the hexagonal end of the pulley shaft with a doubleended ratchet wrench as shown in the figure, loosen the pulley
nut with a socket wrench and remove it.
(When reassembling)
Tightening torque
Pulley nut
93.1 to 127.4 N·m
9.5 to 13.0 kgf·m
68.7 to 94.0 ft-lbs
W1017643
Rear End Cover
1. Unscrew the three rear end cover screws and the B terminal nut,
and remove the rear end cover.
W1017960
Brush Holder
1. Unscrew the two screws holding the brush holder (1), and
remove the brush holder (1).
(1) Brush Holder
W1018041
IC Regulator
1. Unscrew the three screws holding the IC regulator (1), and
remove the IC regulator (1).
(1) IC Regulator
W1018137
Rectifier
1. Remove the four screws holding the rectifier(1) and the stator
lead wires.
2. Remove the rectifier (1).
(1) Rectifier
W1018229
8-S17
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Rear End Frame
1. Unscrew the two nuts and two screws holding the drive end
frame and the rear end frame(1).
2. Remove the rear end frame (1)
(1) Rear End Frame
W1018366
Rotor
1. Press out the rotor (1) from drive end frame (3).
■ IMPORTANT
• Take special care not to drop the rotor and damage the slip
ring or fan, etc..
(1) Rotor
(2) Block
(3) Drive End Frame
W1018524
Retainer plate
1. Unscrew the four screws holding the retainer plate (1) and
remove the retainer plate (1).
(1) Retainer Plate
W1018671
Bearing on Drive End Side
1. Press out the bearing from drive end frame (3) with a press and
jig (1).
(1) Jig
(2) Block
(3) Drive End Frame
W1018752
Bearing at Slip Ring Side
1. Lightly secure the rotor (1) with s vise to prevent damage, and
remove the bearing (2) with a puller (3).
(1) Rotor
(2) Bearing
(3) Puller
W1018849
8-S18
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
(3) Servicing
(A) Alternator
Bearing
1. Check the bearing for smooth rotation.
2. If it does not rotate smoothly, replace it.
W1018966
Stator
1. Measure the resistance across each lead of the stator coil with an
ohmmeter.
2. If the measurement is not within factory specification, replace it.
3. Check the continuity across each stator coil lead and core with an
ohmmeter.
4. If infinity is not indicated, replace it.
Resistance
Factory spec.
Less than 1.0 ohms
W1019167
Rotor
1. Measure the resistance across the slip rings with an ohmmeter.
2. If the resistance is not the factory specification, replace it.
3. Check the continuity across the slip ring and core with an
ohmmeter.
4. If infinity is not indicated, replace it.
Resistance
Factory spec.
2.9 ohms
W1019305
Slip Ring
1. Check the slip ring for score.
2. If scored, correct with an emery paper or on a lathe.
3. Measure the O.D. of slip ring with vernier calipers.
Factory spec.
14.4 mm
0.567 in.
Allowable limit
12.8 mm
0.504 in.
Slip ring O.D.
W1019427
Brush Wear
1. Measure the brush length with vernier calipers.
2. If the measurement is less than allowable limit, replace it.
3. Make sure that the brush moves smoothly.
4. If the brush is defective, replace it.
Factory spec.
10.5 mm
0.413 in.
Allowable limit
8.4 mm
0.331 in.
Brush length
W1019560
8-S19
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Rectifier
1. Check the continuity across each diode of rectifier with an analog
ohmmeter. Conduct the test in the (R × 1) setting.
2. The rectifier is normal if the diode in the rectifier conducts in one
direction and does not conduct in the reverse direction.
■ IMPORTANT
• Do not use a 500 V megger for measuring because it will
destroy the rectifier.
■ NOTE
• Do not use an auto digital multimeter. Because it’s very hard
to check the continuity of rectifier by using it.
W1019720
IC Regulator
1. Check the continuity across the B terminal and the F terminal of
IC regulator with an analog ohmmeter. Conduct the test in the (R
× 1) setting.
2. The IC regulator is normal if the IC regulator conducts in one
direction and does not conduct in the reverse direction.
■ IMPORTANT
• Do not use a 500 V megger for measuring because it will
destroy the IC regulator.
■ NOTE
• Do not use an auto digital multimeter. Because it’s very hard
to check the continuity of IC regulator by using it.
W1019909
[5] ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
(1) Checking
(A) Oil Pressure Switch
Oil Pressure Indicator Lamp
1. Disconnect the 1P connector from the oil pressure switch (1).
2. Turn the main switch key to the “ON” position, and connect a
jumper lead from the 1P connector terminal to the chassis.
3. If the oil pressure indicator lamp does not light, the bulb or wiring
harness is faulty.
(1) Oil Pressure Switch
(a) From Oil Pressure indicator Lamp
W1020070
Oil Pressure Switch Continuity
1. Disconnect the 1P connector from the oil pressure switch (1).
2. Measure the resistance with an ohmmeter between the switch
terminal and the chassis.
3. If 0 ohm is not indicated in the normal state, the switch is faulty.
4. If infinity is not indicated at pressure over 4.9 kPa (0.5 kgf/cm2,
7 psi), the switch is faulty.
Resistance
(Switch terminalChassis)
In normal state
0 ohm
At pressure over
approx. 4.9 kPa
(0.5kgf/cm2, 7 psi)
Infinity
(1) Oil Pressure Switch
W1020184
8-S20
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
(B) Thermo Switch
Connector Voltage
1. Disconnect the 1P connector from the thermo switch (1).
2. Turn the main switch key to the “ON” position, and measure the
voltage with a voltmeter between the connector terminal and the
chassis.
3. If a certain voltage is not indicated, the wiring harness or coolant
temperature gauge is faulty.
Voltage (Connector
terminal - Chassis)
Factory spec.
A certain voltage is
indicated
(1) Thermo Switch
W1020374
Thermo Switch Continuity
1. Disconnect the 1P connector, and remove the thermo switch.
2. Using an ohmmeter, check for continuity between the switch
terminal and the chassis as shown in the figure.
3. If infinity is indicated at temperature over factory specifications,
the switch is faulty.
Working temperature
(A) ON
(B) OFF
Factory spec.
120 to 126 °C
248.0 to 258.8 °F
(C) 116 °C (240.8 °F) or more
(D) 120 to 126 °C (248.0 to 258.8 °F)
W1020510
(C) Fuel Pump
Connector Voltage
voltage with a voltmeter between the connector terminals.
3. If the voltage differs from the battery voltage, the wiring harness
or main switch is faulty.
Connector voltage
Factory spec.
W1028106
Fuel Pump Continuity
2. Check the continuity between the connector terminals with an
ohmmeter.
3. If it does not conduct, the fuel pump is faulty.
W1028246
8-S21
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
(D) Head Light Switch
Connector Voltage
1. Disconnect the 1P connectors from the head light switch (1).
voltage with a voltmeter between the connector terminal (Red /
White) and the chassis.
3. If the voltage differs from the battery voltage, the wiring harness
or main switch is faulty.
Voltage (Connector
terminal - Chassis)
Factory spec.
(1) Head Light Switch
W1028370
Head Light Switch Continuity
1. Disconnect the 1P connectors from the head light switch (1).
2. Using an ohmmeter, check for continuity between the connector
terminals.
There should be no continuity when the head light switch is set at
“OFF” position, and continuity when the head light switch is set
at “ON” position.
(1) Head Light Switch
W1029219
8-S22
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
(E) Brake Switch
Brake Switch
1) Connector Voltage
2. Disconnect the 4P connectors from the brake switch (1).
3. Set the PTO clutch lever at “DISENGAGE” position.
4. Turn the main switch to “ON” position.
faulty.
7. Turn the main switch to “START” position.
faulty.
Voltage
(3 terminal - Chassis)
Factory spec.
Battery voltage
Voltage
Factory spec.
Battery voltage
2) Terminal Continuity
1. Measure the resistance with an ohmmeter between the terminal
while pressing the brake pedal.
while the brake pedal is relased.
brake switch is faulty.
■ Brake Padal is pressed
Resistance
(1 terminal-2 terminal)
Factory spec.
Continuity
Resistance
Factory spec.
Continuity
■ Brake Padal is released
Resistance
Factory spec.
Infinity
Resistance
Factory spec.
Infinity
(1) Brake Switch
(2) 4P Connector
W1031630
8-S23
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
(F) PTO Switch
PTO Switch
1) Connector Voltage
2. Disconnect the 4P connector from the PTO switch (1).
3. Turn the main switch to “ON” position.
faulty.
6. Turn the main switch to “START” position.
If the voltage differs from battery voltage, the wiring harness is
faulty.
Voltage
Factory spec.
Battery voltage
Voltage
Factory spec.
Battery voltage
2) Terminal Continuity
1. Measure the resistance with an ohmmeter between the terminals
when the PTO clutch lever is set at “DISENGAGE” position.
when the PTO clutch lever is set at “ENGAGE” position.
PTO switch is faulty.
■ PTO clutch lever is set at “DISENGAGE” position.
Resistance
Factory spec.
Continuity
Resistance
Factory spec.
Continuity
■ PTO clutch lever is set at “ENGAGF” position.
Resistance
Factory spec.
Infinity
Resistance
Factory spec.
Infinity
(1) PTO Switch
(2) 4P Connector
W1029375
(G) Seat Switch
Seat Switch Continuity
1. Disconnect the 2P connector for the seat switch.
terminals.
There should be continuity when the seat switch is depressed
(seated) and no continuity when the seat switch is released
(standing).
W1030037
8-S24
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
(H) Grass Collector Switch
Grass Collector Switch Continuity (G21LD)
1. Disconnect the grass collector switch (1) from the wiring harness.
2. Push the switch, and check the resistance between the terminals
with an ohmmeter.
3. If the resistance is infinity ohms, the grass collector switch (1) is
faulty. Replace the grass collector switch (1).
Resistance between the
terminals in pushing
switch
Factory spec.
0 ohm
(1) Grass Collector Switch (Normaly
Open Type)
W1010751
Grass Collector Switch Continuity (G21HD)
1. Disconnect the reverse switch from the wiring harness.
2. Push the switch, and check the continuity between the terminals
with an ohmmeter.
3. If the continuity is 0 ohm, the grass collector switch is faulty.
Replace the grass collector switch.
Continuity between the
terminals in pushing
switch
Factory spec.
Infinity
(1) Grass Collector Switch (Normally
Closed Type)
W1010639
(I)
Fuel Switch
Fuel Switch Continuity
1. Disconnect the 2P connector from the fuel switch.
terminals.
There should be continuity when the fuel in the tank is empty, and
no continuity when the fuel in the tank is full.
W1030121
8-S25
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
(J) Relay
Relay
1. Disconnect the 5P connector, and remove the relay.
2. Using an ohmmeter, check that there is continuity across the
terminal 3 and 4.
3. Using an ohmmeter, check that there is no continuity across the
terminals 3 and 4 when the positive terminal of a 12 V battery is
connected to the terminal 2 and the negative terminal is
connected to the terminal 1.
4. If Operation is not as specified, replace the relay.
W1036560
8-S26
9
MOWER
SERVICING
CONTENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
CHECKING, DISASSEMBLING AND SERVICING.........................................9-S4
[2] DISMOUNTING AND MOUNTING ...........................................................9-S8
[4] SERVICING ............................................................................................9-S14
MOWER
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
1. TROUBLESHOOTING
SAFETY CONTROL SYSTEM
Reference
Page
Symptom
Probable Cause
Blade Does Not
Rotate
Weaken or broken front PTO belt
Replace
7-S3 to S5
Damaged mower belt
Replace
9-S4, S9
Mower Belt Slipping
Weaken tension spring
Replace
9-S10
Damaged mower belt
Replace
9-S4, S9
Mower plugged
Unplug and clean
mower deck
–
Debris in pulleys
Clean
–
Grass too wet
Wait for grass to dry
–
Grass too long
Raise cutting height
and cut grass twice
9-S7
Cutting too low
9-S7
Engine speed too low
Mow at full throttle
–
Ground speed too fast
Slow down
–
Slow down
–
Engine speed too low
Mow at full throttle
–
Grass too long
Cut grass twice
Blades dull or damaged
Replace blades or
have blades
sharpened
9-S4, S9
Debris in mower deck
Clean mower deck
–
Mower deck not level
Level mower deck
9-S5, S6
Slow down
Blades dull or damaged
Replace blades
9-S4, S9
Blades worn
Replace blades
9-S4, S9
Low tire inflation pressure
Add air to correct
G-23
Cutting height too low
9-S7
Turning speed too fast
Reduce speed on
turns
–
Ridges in terrain
Change mowing
pattern
–
Bend blades
Replace blades
9-S9
Debris on mower deck or in pulleys
Clean mower deck
and pulleys
–
Damaged mower belt
Replace mower belt
9-S4, S9
Damaged pulleys
Replace pulleys
Pulleys out of balance
Check pulleys
–
Blades out of balance
Have blades
balanced
–
Discharge Chute
Plugged
Streaking of Grass
Uncut
Uneven Cut
Blades Scalping
Grass
Excessive vibration
Solution
9-S7
–
9-S10, S11
W1014322
9-S1
MOWER
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Item
Allowable Limit
Front Tip of Blade to Rear Tip of Blade
Difference
Less than 5 mm
0.20 in.
–
Left Tip of Blade to Right Tip of Blade
Difference
Less than 4 mm
0.16 in.
–
Mower Gear Case Oil
Capacity
0.40 L
0.42 U.S.qts.
0.35 lmp.qts.
–
Bevel Gears
Backlash
0.13 to 0.25 mm
0.0052 to 0.0098 in.
–
Tension collar to Tension Arm Bushing
Clearance
0.005 to 0.117 mm
0.0002 to 0.0046 in.
0.30 mm
0.0118 in.
18.997 to 19.027 mm
0.7479 to 0.7491 in.
–
19.032 to 19.114 mm
0.7493 to 0.7525 in.
–
Tension Collar
Tension Arm Bushing
O.D.
I.D.
W1013874
9-S2
MOWER
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Item
N·m
kgf·m
ft-lbs
Reamer bolt
77.4 to 90.2
7.9 to 9.2
57.1 to 66.5
Mower blade screw
98.0 to 117.6
10.0 to 12.0
72.3 to 86.7
15
1.5
11
Center pulley holder mounting screw
77.4 to 90.2
7.9 to 9.2
57.1 to 66.5
Side blade pulley holder mounting nut and bolt
77.4 to 90.2
7.9 to 9.2
57.1 to 66.5
102.9 to 117.6
10.5 to 12.0
75.9 to 86.8
L.H. tension pulley mounting bolt and nut
47.0 to 56.8
4.8 to 5.8
34.7 to 42.0
L.H. tension arm mounting bolt and nut
77.4 to 90.2
7.9 to 9.2
57.1 to 66.5
108.8 to 130.3
11.1 to 13.3
80.3 to 96.2
77.4 to 90.2
7.9 to 9.2
57.1 to 66.5
Breather plug
Side blade pulley mounting nut
R.H. tension pulley mounting bolt and nut
R.H. tension arm mounting bolt and nut
W1012736
9-S3
MOWER
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Checking Mower Blade
1. Check the cutting edge of mower blade.
2. Sharpen the cutting edges, if the mower blades are as shown in
figure (2).
3. Replace the mower blades, if they are as shown in figure (3).
■ IMPORTANT
• Never forget to set the spring plate between mower blade
and spline boss, when reassembling the mower blades.
■ NOTE
• To sharpen the mower blades by yourself, clamp the mower
blade securely in a vise and use a large mill file along the
original level.
• To balance the mower blade, place a small rod through the
center hole and check to see if the blade balances evenly.
File heavy side of the blade until it balances out even.
(1) New Blade
(2) Worn Blade
(3) Cracked Blade
W1010988
Checking Mower Belts
1. Check to see the mower belts.
2. Replace the mower belt with a new one, if there is found surface
split at more than 3 positions.
(When replacing mower belt)
1. Remove the mower from the machine.
2. Remove the left and right hand shield (1), (5) from the mower
deck.
3. Clean around the right side pulley (4) and the tension pulley (8)
to remove the LH belt (2) and the RH belt (7) from the pulleys (4),
(8), (9). Slip the LH belt (2) over the top of the left side pulley (9).
4. To install new belts, reverse the above procedure.
Tightening torque
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
LH Shield
LH Belt
Gear Case
Right Side Pulley
RH Shield
Tension Spring
77.4 to 90.2 N·m
7.9 to 9.2 kgf·m
57.1 to 66.5 ft-lbs
Reamer bolt
(7)
(8)
(9)
A:
B:
RH Belt
Tension Pulley
Left Side Pulley
LH belt layout
RH belt layout
W1010629
9-S4
MOWER
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Adjusting Front and Rear Cutting Height
1. Mount the mower to the machine, and place the vehicle on a level
ground.
2. Set the cutting height to “2” position.
3. Measure the heights (F), (R) of the blade.
4. If the difference between front tip of blade and rear tip of blade
exceeds the factory specification, adjust the length (L) of front
links.
(Reference)
• L : 435 mm (17.1 in.)
Difference (F-R)
between front tip of
blade and rear tip of
blade
(on blade A, B and C)
Factory spec.
Less than 5 mm
0.20 in.
(a) Front
W1010915
9-S5
MOWER
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Adjusting Left and Right Cutting Height
1. Mount the mower to the machine, and place the machine on a
level ground.
2. Set the cutting height to “2” position.
3. Measure the heights (L), (R) of the blade.
4. If the difference between left tip of blade and right tip of blade
exceeds the factory specification, adjust the length (L1) of upper
lift link (1) and lower lift link (2).
(Reference)
• L1 : 350 mm (13.8 in.)
Difference (L-R)
between left tip of blade
and right tip of blade (on
blades A, B and C)
(1) Upper Lift Link
(2) Lower Lift Link
Factory spec.
Less than 4 mm
0.16 in.
(a) Left
W1012173
Adjusting Rotation Plate
1. Park the machine on level ground, and stop the engine.
2. Dismount the mower.
3. Turn over the mower.
4. Turn the adjusting screw (3) until the rotation plate (1) and the
performance plate end (2) come into contact with each other.
(Reference)
• L : 26 mm (1.02 in.)
(1) Rotation Plate
(2) Performance Plate End
(3) Adjusting Screw
W1012598
9-S6
MOWER
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Adjusting Cutting Height
1. To set the cutting height, pull the mower lift lever backward to
raise the mower deck to the top position. Turn the cutting height
control dial to adjust height.
2. Set the anti-scalp roller’s height as shown to keep clearance
between rollers and ground more than 6 mm (0.24 in.).
(1) Cutting Height Control Dial
W1012775
9-S7
MOWER
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
[2] DISMOUNTING AND MOUNTING
Anti-scalp Rollers and Cutting Height Adjusting Dial
1. Park the machine on level ground, and stop the engine.
2. Set the front anti-scalp rollers (1) sideways and at the topmost
position.
3. Set the cutting height adjusting dial to “1” position, and down the
mower.
(1) Front Anti-scalp Roller
W1013013
Front Link
1. Pull the lever fulcrum fixing pin (2) and turn it clockwise to release
the lock.
2. Push down the link fixing lever (1).
3. Remove the front link (3) from the mower deck.
(When reassembling)
• When attach the front link, make sure the length of the front link.
(See page 9-S5.)
(1) Link Fixing Lever
(2) Lever Fulcrum Fixing Pin
(3) Front Link
W1013166
Rear Links and Universal Joint
1. Place the hydraulic lift lever (1) in the “DOWN” position. Push
down the rear links (2) to align with the mower bracket.
2. Disconnect the rear links (2) from the mower deck, pulling the Lpins (3).
3. Pull back the coupler (4) to unlock.
4. Remove the universal joint (5) from the PTO shaft.
5. Start the engine, and lift the rear links (2).
6. Stop the engine.
(When reassembling)
• Apply grease to the splines and grease nipples of the universal
joint.
• Slide the universal joint back and forward to make sure the
universal joint is locked securely.
• When attach the lift links, make sure the length of the lift links.
(See page 9-S6.)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Hydraulic Lift Lever
Rear Links
L-Pins
Coupler
Universal Joint
(A) Push Down
(B) Pull
W1013384
Dismounting Mower
1. Turn the front wheel to the left.
2. Pull out the mower deck to the right.
3. Return wheels to straight ahead position.
4. Reset the front anti-scalp rollers to straight ahead position.
(A) LEFT
W1013629
9-S8
MOWER
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Universal Joint and Covers
1. Remove the universal joint.
2. Remove the left and right hand covers (1), (2).
(When reassembling)
• Apply grease to the splines and grease nipples of the universal
joint.
(1) L.H. Cover
(2) R.H. Cover
W1013857
Mower Blade (Center Blade and Outer Blades)
2. Remove the mower blade screw (1).
3. Remove the spring plate (2), blade (3) and dust cover (4).
4. Remove the external snap ring (5) on the bevel gear shaft (only
center blade).
5. Remove the spline boss (6).
■ NOTE
• To remove the blade securely, wedge a block of wood
between one blade and the housing in such position that it
will hold the blade safely while loosing or tightening the
blade screws.
• The screw of red-painted mower blade is of inverse helical
type.
(When reassembling)
• Be sure to pay attention to how to assemble the spring plate.
• Apply grease to the spline boss.
■ IMPORTANT
• Make sure the spring plate is not flattened out or worn,
causing mower blade to slip easily.
• Replace the spring plate if it is damaged.
■ NOTE
• After reassembling the blade, check the blade slippage. If
the blade slips below blade slippage torque (66.7 N·m, 6.8
kgf·m, 49.2 ft-lbs), check the blade tightening torque and
spring plate.
Tightening torque
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Mower Blade Screw
Spring Plate
Blade
Dust Cover
Mower blade screw
103.0 to 118.0 N·m
11.0 to 12.0 kgf·m
76 to 87 ft-lbs
(6) Spline Boss
A : Loosen
W1011598
9-S9
MOWER
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Mower Belt, Gear Case and Center Pulley Holder
2. Remove the tension springs (7), (9).
3. Remove the mower belts (1), (6).
4. Remove the RH case stay (5).
5. Remove the reamer bolts (2), (3).
6. Remove the LH case stay (8).
7. Separate the gear case (4) with the center blade pulley from the
center pulley holder assembly.
(When reassembling)
• Apply grease to oil seals and bevel gear shaft.
face of LH case stay.
• Install the reamer screws at their original position.
■ IMPORTANT
• After setting the LH case stay mounting reamer bolts on the
desk without tightening, then mount the other screws on the
gear case. And finally tighten them.
Tightening torque
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
77.4 to 90.2 N·m
7.9 to 9.2 kgf·m
57.1 to 66.5 ft-lbs
Reamer bolt
Mower Belt
Reamer Bolts
Reamer Bolts
Gear Case
RH Case Stay
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
Mower Belt
Tension Spring
LH Case Stay
Tension Spring
W1012217
Disassembling Center Pulley Holder Assembly
1. Remove the center pulley holder mounting screws (1).
2. Separate the center pulley holder assembly from the mower
deck.
3. Remove the lower oil seal (7).
4. Remove the internal snap ring (6), ball bearing (5) and center
collar (4).
5. Remove the upper oil seal (2).
(When reassembling)
• Apply grease to the bearing and oil seal lips.
• Apply grease to the inside of center collar (4).
• Be sure to pay attention to how to assemble lower oil seal (7).
(Steel cover is outside.)
face of center pulley holder (3).
Tightening torque
Center pulley holder
mounting screw
(1) Center Pulley Holder Mounting
Screws
(2) Upper Oil Seal
(3) Center Pulley Holder
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
77.4 to 90.2 N·m
7.9 to 9.2 kgf·m
57.1 to 66.5 ft-lbs
Center Collar
Ball Bearing
Internal Snap Ring
Lower Oil Seal
W1012645
9-S10
MOWER
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Side Blade Pulley Holder Assembly
1. Remove the side blade pulley mounting nut (2).
2. Remove the side blade pulley (3), feather key (7) (only right side
blade pulley) and grease nipple (1) from the blade shaft (6).
3. Remove the side blade pulley holder mounting nuts (4) and bolts
(5).
4. Separate the side blade pulley holder assembly from the mower
deck.
Side blade pulley holder
mounting nut and bolt
77.4 to 90.2 N·m
7.9 to 9.2 kgf·m
57.1 to 66.5 ft-lbs
Side blade pulley mounting
nut
102.9 to 117.6 N·m
10.5 to 12.0 kgf·m
75.9 to 86.8 ft-lbs
Tightening torque
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Grease Nipple
Side Blade Pulley Mounting Nut
Side Blade Pulley
Side Blade Pulley Holder Mounting
Nuts
(5) Side Blade Pulley Holder Mounting
Bolts
(6) Blade Shaft
(7) Feather Key (Only right side blade
pulley)
W1012965
Disassembling Side Pulley Holder Assembly
1. Tap out blade shaft (7).
2. Remove the lower oil seal (6).
3. Remove the bearings (2), (5) and collar (4).
4. Remove the upper oil seal (1).
(When reassembling)
• Apply grease to the bearing and oil seal lips.
• Apply grease to the inside of center collar.
• Be sure to pay attention to how to assemble lower oil seal. (Steel
cover is outside.)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Upper Oil Seal
Ball Bearing
Side Pulley Holder
Collar
(5) Ball Bearing
(6) Lower Oil Seal
(7) Blade Shaft
W1013296
9-S11
MOWER
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Disassembling LH Tension Pulley
1. Remove the tension spring from the tension arm (10).
2. Remove the tension arm mounting bolt (5) and nut (1).
3. Remove the tension arm assembly, tension collar (2) and plate
(4).
4. Remove the tension pulley mounting bolt (9) and nut (6).
5. Remove the tension pulley (8) and the tension cover (7) from the
tension arm (10).
(When reassembling)
• In fitting the tension cover (7), be careful not to confuse its top
and bottom as shown in the figure.
• Apply grease to the tension arm bushing.
Tension pulley mounting
bolt and nut
47.0 to 56.8 N·m
4.8 to 5.8 kgf·m
34.7 to 42.0 ft-lbs
Tension arm mounting bolt
and nut
77.4 to 90.2 N·m
7.9 to 9.2 kgf·m
57.1 to 66.5 ft-lbs
Tightening torque
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Tension Arm Mounting Nut
Tension Collar
Grease Nipple
Plate
Tension Arm Mounting Bolt
Tension Pulley Mounting Nut
Tension Cover
(8)
(9)
(10)
A:
B:
Tension Pulley
Tension Pulley Mounting Bolt
Tension Arm
Top (Nut Side)
Bottom (Tension Pulley Side)
W1013542
Disassembling RH Tension Pulley
1. Remove the tension spring from the tension arm (5).
2. Remove the tension arm mounting bolt (10) and nut (6).
3. Remove the tension arm assembly, tension collar (7) and plate
(9).
4. Remove the tension pulley mounting bolt (4) and nut (1).
5. Remove the tension pulley (3) and the tension cover (2) from the
tension arm.
(When reassembling)
• In fitting the tension cover (2), be careful not to confuse its top
and bottom as shown in the figure.
• Apply grease to the tension arm bushing.
Tension pulley mounting
bolt and nut
108.8 to 130.3 N·m
11.1 to 13.3 kgf·m
80.3 to 96.2 ft-lbs
Tension arm mounting bolt
and nut
77.4 to 90.2 N·m
7.9 to 9.2 kgf·m
57.1 to 66.5 ft-lbs
Tightening torque
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Tension Pulley Mounting Nut
Tension Cover
Tension Pulley
Tension Pulley Mounting Bolt
Tension Arm
Tension Arm Mounting Nut
Tension Collar
(8) Grease Nipple
(9) Plate
(10) Tension Arm Mounting Bolt
A : Top (Nut Side)
B : Bottom (Tension Pulley Side)
W1013954
9-S12
MOWER
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Disassembling Mower Gear Case Assembly
1. Unscrew the drain plug (15), and drain gear case oil.
2. Remove the center pulley (22) with a puller, and remove the
feather key (23) on the bevel gear shaft (20).
3. Remove the gear case caps (1), (19).
4. Remove the oil seal (8), internal snap ring (9) and shims (10).
5. Tap out the pinion shaft (12) with the ball bearing (11), and
remove the 21T bevel gear (3).
6. Remove the internal snap ring (9), shims (17) and ball bearing
(16).
7. Remove the external snap ring (2(, and draw out the bevel gear
shaft (20).
8. Remove the 16T bevel gear (4), ball bearing (5), shims (6) and oil
seal (21).
(When reassembling)
• Replace the oil seals (8), (21) and gear case caps (1), (19) with
new ones.
• Check the backlash and turning torque.
If not propper, adjust with the shims (6), (10), (16).
(See page 9-S14.)
■IMPORTANT
• Use the specified gear case oil.
Mower gear case
oil
Capacity
0.40 L
0.42 U.S.qts.
0.35 Imp.qts.
Tightening torque
Bearing plug
15 N·m
1.5 kgf·m
11 ft-lbs
(1) Gear Case Cap
(3) 21T Bevel Gear
(4) 16T Bevel Gear
(5) Ball Bearing
(6) Shims
(7) Plug
(8) Oil Seal
(10) Shims
(11) Ball Bearing
(12) Pinion Shaft
(13) Breather Plug
(14) Gear Case
(15) Drain Plug
(16) Ball Bearing
(17) Shims
(19) Gear Case Cap
(20) Bevel Gear Shaft
(21) Oil Seal
(22) Center Pulley
(23) Feather Key
W1018659
9-S13
MOWER
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
[4] SERVICING
Backlash between Bevel Gears
1. Remove the gear case cap (2).
2. Place fuses the 21T bevel gear (3) on the pinion shaft.
3. Turn the pinion shaft.
4. Take out the fuses, and measure the thickness of fuses with an
outside micrometer. Backlash equals thickness of fuse.
5. If the backlash is not within the factory specifications, adjust with
shims (1), (4).
6. Apply red lead lightly over several teeth at three positions equally
spaced on the bevel gear.
7. Turn the pinion shaft.
8. Check the tooth contact. If not proper, adjust with shims (1), (4).
■ IMPORTANT
• After checking the tooth contact, check the backlash
between pinion shaft and bevel gear again.
• After the backlash has been adjusted, turn the pinion shaft
by hand to make sure it moves smoothly.
Backlash between bevel
gears
Factory spec.
0.13 to 0.25 mm
0.0052 to 0.0098 in.
Turning force
Factory spec.
Less than 14 N
Less than 1.4 kgf
Less than 10 lbs
Turning torque
Factory spec.
Less than 0.7 N·m
(Reference)
• Thickness of adjusting shims (1):
0.2 mm (0.0079 in.) (Part No. :36330-28420)
0.3 mm (0.0118 in.) (Part No. :36330-28410)
• Thickness of adjusting shims (4):
0.1 mm (0.0039 in.) (Part No. :70712-33570)
0.2 mm (0.0079 in.) (Part No. :76539-33410)
(1) Shims
(2) Gear Case Cap
(3) 21T Bevel Gear
(4) Shims
W1014294
Checking Proper Contact
More than 35 % red lead contact area on the gear tooth surface.
The center of tooth contact at 1/3 of the entire width from the small
end.
W1014886
9-S14
MOWER
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Clearance between Tension Collar and Tension Arm Bushing
1. Measure the tension collar O.D. with an outside micrometer.
2. Measure the tension arm bushing I.D. with an inside micrometer,
3. If the clearance exceeds the factory specification, replace them.
Clearance between
tension collar and
tension arm bushing
Factory spec.
0.005 to 0.117 mm
0.0002 to 0.0046 in.
Tension collar O.D.
Factory spec.
18.997 to 19.027 mm
0.7479 to 0.7491 in.
Tension arm bushing
I.D.
Factory spec.
19.032 to 19.114 mm
0.7493 to 0.7525 in.
W1014933
9-S15
MOWER
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
9-S16
10
HIGH DUMP GRASS
COLLECTOR
SERVICING
CONTENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
TROUBLESHOOTING ..................................................................................10-S1
SERVICING SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................................10-S2
TIGHTENING TORQUES ............................................................................10-S3
CHECKING, DISASSEMBLING AND SERVICING....................................10-S4
[1] CHECKING .............................................................................................10-S4
[2] DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING................................................10-S6
(1) Dismounting Grass Collector Bag .....................................................10-S6
(2) Platform Complete ............................................................................10-S8
(3) Lift Arm Assembly and Head Guard ...............................................10-S10
(4) Disassembling Grass Collector Bag ...............................................10-S11
HIGH DUMP GRASS COLLECTOR
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
1. TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom
Probable Cause
Solution
Reference
Page
Grass Bag Control Is
Not Smooth
Transmission oil is low
Replenish
PTO Lever Does Not
Engage
Grass collector is lifted
Lower the grass
collector
Improper PTO wire cable adjustment
Readjust
10-S5
Grass collector switch defective
Replace
10-S4,
8-S25
Fuse blown
Replace
G-43
Grass collector is lifted
Lower the grass
collector
Engine Shut Off
When Engage the
PTO Lever
G-7, G-13
–
–
W1014322
10-S1
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Item
Allowable Limit
PTO wire cable retainer length
Reference
8.0 mm
0.31 in.
–
Rotating restriction wire cable retainer
length
Reference
15.0 mm
0.59 in.
–
Upper rear cover and top cover
Clearance
3.0 to 5.0 mm
0.12 to 0.20 in.
–
Top of the gate and the bag
Clearance
0.0 mm
0.0 in.
–
W1010776
10-S2
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Item
N·m
kgf·m
ft-lbs
Rear gate link flange screw
48.0 to 55.9
4.9 to 5.7
35.4 to 41.2
PB1 hose (9/16)
22.0 to 25.0
2.2 to 2.6
16.2 to 18.4
PB2 hose (9/16)
22.0 to 25.0
2.2 to 2.6
16.2 to 18.4
Platform mounting bolt and nut M10
48.05 to 55.90
4.9 to 5.7
35.44 to 41.23
M12
77.47 to 90.27
7.9 to 9.2
57.2 to 66.5
107.8 to 130.3
11.0 to 13.3
79.6 to 96.2
22.0 to 25.0
2.2 to 2.6
16.2 to 18.4
Rear wheel mounting nut
Lift cylinder hose (9/16)
W1012736
10-S3
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
[1] CHECKING
Bag Rotating Restriction
1. Adjust the wire retainer nut (1) so that the grass collector rotates
when setting the grass collector bag line (3) horizontally to the
upper joint (2).
2. Make sure that the grass collector does not rotate when setting
the line of grass collector (3) horizontally to the lower joint (4).
Wire adjusting length:
L1
(1) Wire Retaining Nut
(2) Upper Joint
Reference value
5.0 mm
0.20 in.
(3) Line of Grass Collector Bag
(4) Lower Joint
W1011375
Checking PTO Safety Control 1
1. Remove the pin (1) of the PTO wire (2) in outside.
3. Check the engine should shut off when engage the PTO lever
and lift the grass collector.
4. If the engine does not shut off, check the grass collector switch.
(See page 8-S25.)
5. Assemble the PTO wire with pin (1).
(1) Pin
(2) PTO Wire
W1010998
10-S4
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Checking PTO Safety Control 2
•
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CAUTION
Be sure to keep yourself out of the bag way.
Lift the grass collector (2) and remove the lever spring (1) then
lower the grass collector (2).
Run the engine at half throttle.
Make sure that the PTO lever (3) moves automatically to the
disengage position when lifting the grass collector (2) to the L1
distance of 100 mm (3.9 in.).
If the PTO lever does not disengage, adjust the wire retaining nut
(4).
Make sure that the PTO lever remains at the engage position
when lifting the grass collector (2) to the L3 distance of 50 mm
(1.97 in.).
If the PTO lever (3) does not remains at the engage position,
adjust the wire retaining nut (4).
Lift the grass collector and hook the lever spring (1) in position.
Wire adjusting length:
L2
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Lever Spring
Grass Collector
PTO Lever
Wire Retaining Nut
Reference value
8.0 mm
0.31 in.
L1 : 100 mm (3.9 in.)
L2 : 8.0 mm (0.31 in.)
L3 : 50 mm (1.97 in.)
W1011135
10-S5
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
(1) Dismounting Grass Collector Bag
• Park the machine on firm level ground, shut off the engine and remove the key.
• Choke the wheels when remove the wheels.
Cylinder Cover, Rear Gate and Cylinder
2. Remove the upper rear cover (1).
3. Remove the rear gate link mounting screw (3) and pin (4), (6).
4. Remove the rear gate (7).
5. Remove the cylinder mounting pin (5).
(When reassembling)
• Make sure there is no gap between top of the gate and the grass
collector bag.
• When reassembling the upper rear cover (1), keep the clearance
evenly between the upper rear cover (1) and top cover (8).
• Apply grease to the caller and cylinder mounting pin (5).
Tightening torque
Rear gate link flange screw
48.0 to 55.9 N·m
4.9 to 5.7 kgf·m
35.4 to 41.2 ft-lbs
Clearance between top
of the gate and the bag
L1
Factory spec.
0.0 mm
0.0 in.
Clearance between
upper rear cover and top
cover L2
Factory spec.
3.0 to 5.0 mm
0.12 to 0.20 in.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Upper Rear Cover
Cylinder Cover
Rear Gate Link Mounting Screw
Pin
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Cylinder Mounting Pin
Pin
Rear Gate
Top Cover
W1011559
10-S6
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Grass Collector Bag
1. Turn the cylinder end (1) at 1.57 rad. (90 °) as shown in figure.
2. Support the grass collector bag with block as shown in figure.
3. Remove the lift arm connector pin (3), (4) from the lift arm
connector (2) as shown the figure.
4. Remove the lower connector pin (4) (short one) only from the
container.
5. Remove the lift arm supporting block, then down the grass
collector rear side.
6. To dismount, pull up the front side of grass collector bag so that
the grass collector bag unhooks from the hitch point (7).
■ NOTE
• Do not remove the connector pin (3), (4) from the connector
(2) and the lift arm (5).
(When reassembling)
• Remove the lever spring (6) from the grass collector switch lever
to prevent the deforming the grass collector bag.
• Apply grease to the connector pins (3) and (4).
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Cylinder End
Lift Arm Connector
Pin (Upper)
Pin (Lower)
(5) Lift Arm
(6) Lever Spring
(7) Hitch Point
W1011834
10-S7
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
(2) Platform Complete
Dismounting Grass Collector Bag
1. See page 10-S6, S7.
W1016036
Front Cover, Discharge Plate and Discharge Duct
1. Remove the quick clean lever (1) and oil filler port mounting
screw (2).
2. Remove the front cover (3).
3. Remove the discharge plate (4) and discharge duct (5).
(1) Quick Clean Lever
(2) Oil Filler Port Mounting Screw
(3) Front Cover
(4) Discharge Plate
(5) Discharge Duct
W1013709
10-S8
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
Platform Complete
1. Remove the rear wheels and choke the front wheel.
2. Disconnect the PTO wire (1) from PTO lever.
3. Remove the drain hose (2) and PB2 hose (3).
4. Remove the PB1 hose (4) from the auxiliary control valve (Hi
Dump Control Valve) (5).
5. Disconnect the 4P coupler (6).
6. Hook the head guard (8) as shown in figure and unscrew the
platform mounting bolts and nuts to remove the platform (9).
(When reassembling)
• Be sure to fix the hydraulic hoses to the original position.
• Check and adjust the PTO safety devise. (See page 10-S4, 5.)
• Be sure to assemble the plain washer (7) in order.
Adjusting PTO lever wire
retainer: L1
Tightening
torque
PB1 hose (9/16)
22 to 25 N·m
2.2 to 2.5 kgf·m
16.2 to 18.4 ft-lbs
PB2 hose (9/16)
22 to 25 N·m
2.2 to 2.5 kgf·m
16.2 to 18.4 ft-lbs
M10
48.05 to 55.90 N·m
4.9 to 5.7 kgf·m
35.44 to 41.23 ft-lbs
M12
77.47 to 90.27 N·m
7.9 to 9.2 kgf·m
57.2 to 66.5 ft-lbs
Platform mounting bolt
and nut
107.8 to 130.3 N·m
11.0 to 13.3 kgf·m
79.6 to 96.2 ft-lbs
Rear tire mounting nut
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
3.0 mm
0.12 in.
Factory spec.
PTO Wire
Drain Hose
PB2 hose
PB1 hose
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
4P Coupler
Plain Washer
Head Guard
Platform
W1012252
10-S9
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
(3) Lift Arm Assembly and Head Guard
1. See pages 10-S6, S7.
W1015133
Upper Lift Joint and Lower Lift Joint
1. Remove the PTO wire cable mounting pin (1) and stopper wire
cable mounting pin (2).
2. Remove the upper lift joint (3) and lower lift joint (4).
(1) PTO Wire Cable Mounting Pin
(2) Stopper Wire Cable Mounting Pin
(3) Upper Lift Joint
(4) Lower Lift Joint
W1012702
Lift Cylinder and Rotating Cylinder Hose
1. Remove the lift cylinder mounting pin (1).
2. Disconnect the cylinder hose connector (2).
(When reassembling)
• Apply grease to the lift cylinder mounting pin.
Tightening torque
Lift cylinder hose
(1) Lift Cylinder Mounting Pin
22 to 25 N·m
2.2 to 2.5 kgf·m
16.2 to 18.4 ft-lbs
(2) Cylinder Hose Connector
W1012886
Lift Arm Assembly and Head Guard
1. Hold the lift cylinder (1) and support (4), using the rope or tape as
shown in figure.
2. Remove the hose clamp (3).
3. Remove the head guard (5).
4. Remove the lift arm assembly (2).
(When reassembling)
• Apply grease to the lift arm mounting pin.
(1) Lift Cylinder
(2) Lift Arm Assembly
(3) Hose Clamp
(4) Support
(5) Head Guard
W1013036
10-S10
G21LD · G21HD, WSM
(4) Disassembling Grass Collector Bag
1. See pages 10-S6, S7.
W1015248
Top Cover and Side Cover
1. Remove the bag handle (1).
2. Remove the top cover (2).
3. Remove the side cover (3).
4. Remove the cover stays (4).
(When reassembling)
• All bolts are inserted from outside.
(1) Bag Handle
(2) Top Cover
(3) Side Cover
(4) Cover Stay
W1013209
Top Net
1. Remove the top net (1) and cover stay (2).
(When reassembling)
(1) Top Net
(2) Cover Stay
W1013341
Bottom Plate
1. Turn over the bag frame
2. Remove the bottom plate (2) and lower bag support (1).
(When reassembling)
• All bolts are inserted from inside.
• Be sure to assemble the cover stay together with front side lower
bag support.
(1) Lower Bag Support
(2) Bottom Plate
W1013492
Side Bag Frame and Front Bag Frame
1. Remove the both side frames (2).
2. Remove the front frame (1).
(When reassembling)
(1) Front Frame
(2) Side Frame
W1013683
10-S11
EDITOR:
KUBOTA FARM & INDUSTRIAL MACHINERY SERVICE, LTD.
64, ISHIZU-KITAMACHI, SAKAI-KU, SAKAI-CITY, OSAKA, 590-0823, JAPAN
PHONE : (81)72-241-1129
FAX
: (81)72-245-2484
E-mail : [email protected]
KUBOTA Corporation
Printed in Japan 2006. 03, S, EI, EI, e
2005. 07, S, EI, EI, e
Code No.9Y011-15091

G21LD,G21HD

Transcription

Similar documents

Dual Port, Four Barrel, Aluminium lnlet Manifold. Crane Cam and

syntheticmarinelubric antsyntheticmarinelub ricantssyntheticmarin e

Quick Guide

TAKLIMAT KESELAMATAN (PENGENDALIAN TANGKI GAS)

Renovators Supply, Inc.© www.rensup.com

Temptrol®

An Evolutionary strategy for transforming the Business

S-3 Oil Flyer - Cen-Pe-Co